Home

b-gl-385-010 - Eryx

1. 147 LESSON3 FIRE FAMILIARIZATION PRACTICES 148 IN SERUCION IN OLS agonal sey ial teste aban 148 Conduct Gf tlie Less 148 SLAC PAE CC 149 xii Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CONC IISION TTA 149 LESSON 4 FIRE PRONE PRACTICES 151 eI M AN EUR dE 151 Conductor tlie EESSOD oid 152 Crossing Targets Left to 10 20222 152 Crossing Targets Right to 2 153 Date esie a 153 Oblique Targets Left to 22 154 Oblique Targets Right to 0 2 2 154 RTT 155 TS E 155 LESSON 5 FIRE KNEELING PRACTICES 156 IriSteuc LOLS NOTCS oaen 156 Conduct of the Lesson 157 157 157 Crossing Tarsets Left to RIGA nenna 158 Crossing Targets Right to 2 158 Oblique Targets Left to 22 22 158 Oblique Targets Right to 0 000 2 159 Review 159 N 15
2. 5 ms Ti A A em en SN NAME RANK 451 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Firing posn PT Prone with tripod K Kneeling without tripod KT Kneeling with tripod Vif TI is used O oblique A advancing Veh Leo Leopard LAV I COY Coyote M 113 Iltis BV 206 LSVW R Range in metres P F Pass or fail Number of missions succeeded Instructor s notes 452 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX D GUIDELINES FOR ERYX TRAINING PLAN FROM DP 1 TO DP 3A NOTE references are to B GL 385 010 PT 001 unless noted otherwise DP 1 ERYX FAMILIARIZATION O OBJECTIVE REMARKS TIME FeumesmaWa 01 Describe the Except missile 2 Chap2 SRAAW H components and Lesson 1 weapon operation 02 Maintain the 1 SRAAW H 03 Prepare the 2 SRAAW H for firing 04 Handle the 2 SRAAW H 05 Dig in the Defensive tasks 1 SRAAW H only Fire familiarization practice Eryx Test Of Excluding Elementary Training thermal imager Total 11 03 Chap 2 Lesson 2 Chap 2 Lesson 3 Chap 2 Lesson 4 Chap 2 Lesson 5 N Chap 4 Lesson 3 Chap 7 Annex B GL 385 010 PT 001 453 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy PO 103 review in order to refresh prepared
3. 88 Figure 2 25 Blank Range 89 Figure 3 1 The Mirabel Thermal 98 Figure 3 2 Schematic of the Mirabel Thermal Imager 99 Figure 3 3 Lining up the Hinge Pins with the Hinges 100 Figure 3 4 Locking the Thermal Imager onto the Firing Post 100 Figure 3 5 Installing the Battery 102 Figure 3 6 Mirabel Power Source MPS Parts 104 Fieure 5 7 MPS Connec hOM sun dee ett acr de 104 Figure 3 8 Power Switch and Image Controls 106 Figure 3 9 The Electromagnetic Spectrum 113 Fieure 5 10 The Diurnal Cycle 117 Figure 4 1 Main Case Assembly MCA 126 Figure 4 2 Instructor Case Assembly 126 Figure 4 3 Missile Launch Assembly MLA 127 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Figure 4 4 Wire Pull Assembly WPA 127 Figure 4 5 Assembly Diagram for EVIGS 129 Figure 4 6 EVIGS System Interconnection Cables Layout 130 Figure 4 7 WPA to MTA Wire Connection 131 Pisute E 132
4. 30 Figure 2 7 Firing in Confined 3l Figure 2 8 Logistic Container Markings Labels 42 Figure 2 9 Individual Container Markings 43 Figure 2 10 Field Packing Markings esses 44 Figure 2 11 Prone Position EU eia ens 51 Figure 2 12a Kneeling Unsupported Position 55 Figure 2 12b Kneeling Supported Position with Tripod 56 2 15 Standing Positions eee 37 Fieure 2514 Gunner S R cksack 59 2 15 Loader S Rucksack vi situ wea ee 60 Fieure 2 16 Eryx Reticule Pattern eene dente det 66 Figure 2 17 Determining Engagement 67 Frere 2 197 Pormt OP NUT 90 24 0556 3 8 40 20509 5 2 ons E 68 Figure 2 19 Point of Aim Low Profile 68 Figure 2 20 Point of Aim Partially Obscured Target 69 Figure 2 21 Point of Aim Oblique 69 Figure 2 22 Eryx Trench 85 Figure 2 23 Eryx Trench Stage 2 Rear View 86 Figure 2 24 Example of a Range
5. B GL 385 010 PT 001 433 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ACTION BY GUNNER ACTION BY LOADER Carry the missile to the dud pit The coach gives the order INSTALL THERMAL IMAGER Mirabel Verify that lens cover is ON and that the power switch is OFF see note 6 Install thermal imager note 6 Install battery note 6 Flip the power switch to STANDBY and wait for 5 to 9 minutes Flip the power switch to and raise the lens cover Adjust the image brightness contrast and focus Check collimation Can help if needed Flip the power switch to STANDBY close the lens cover and report ERYX READY 8 The coach gives the order LOAD Verify that the safety catch 15 engaged and the thermal imager power switch is at STANDBY Repeat LOAD Repeat LOAD Remove the field packing and inspect following missile tube nose cone guide pins electrical connectors alignment pin 434 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 7 ACTION BY GUNNER ACTION BY LOADER copper ribbon 3 wires at rear of tube nozzles and beacon Load the missile onto the firing post Report READY Repeat READY coach gives TARGET followed by a target indication Repeat TARGET Flip the thermal imager power Check backblast area and switch to and raise the r
6. NONE RANDOM RANDOM IE NONE RANDOM RANDOM E NONE OFF OFF E NONE OFF OFF OFF ON BI NONE OFF ON E NONE ON NONE ON Select Mission Set fields to view Parameter 5 Target Display values related to the target of the Mission Set The fields are mission ID mission number target target aspect target masking target range target speed target bearing firing position aim point mark fall of shot azimuth fall of shot elevation mission elapsed time engagement result B GL 385 010 PT 001 235 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 5 M113 RIGHT VIEW UNKNOWN 2 LAV RECCE REAR VIEW LOW 10 1115 RIGHT VIEW NONE 25 LAV RECCE LEFT VIEW NONE 24 LAV RECCE RIGHT FRONTAL VIEW NONE 22 LAV RECCE UNKNOWN NONE 21 LAVRECCE RIGHT VIEW NONE 23 LAV RECCE RIGHT VIEW NONE Select Mission Set fields to view Show Azimnuth Elevation 6 All Values All available column values will show Pee e Jemen jme s owe Sane tone rome ra E 08 55 24 BOUCHER 58992654 11 0 1998 091832 BOUCHER 58992654 1 0 19988 105247 BOUCHER K58992654 11 0 1988 105041 BOUCHER 58992654 E 11 40 1933 104251 BOUCHER K56992654 11 40 1999 103224 BOUCHER 58992654 11 0 1999 104644 BOUCHER 58992654 cs 11 14 16 BOUCHER K58992654 CAPT g Select Mission Set fields to view Values M Show Azimuth Elevation f Azimuth Elevation Check Box Values pictured below displays a series of values w
7. m 331 Conductor the 6550 ia 332 Responsibilities of Range Staff 332 Conduct ord 336 Eryx Ranse usd oett 341 342 LESSON 4 COACH 344 Instructor Notes 344 Conduct OF tlie 345 Cogchmne Before FINDS 345 Coaching After Firing oio rere err e aee 347 rou ESI 349 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LESSON 5 ERYX THROUGH SIGHT VIDEO CAMERA SY STE MICE 65 350 Instructor NOES cc cc E 350 Conduct the ous osos 351 Systeni Components turis axo ded dove 352 ETSVCS Installation and Start up Procedure 397 Battery Check and Charging Procedure 360 O 361 LESSON 6 OPERATE THE INTREST TRAINER 363 IriSteuc tof NOLES 363 Conduct OL tlie 364 General Information and Assembly of the Trainer 365 Opening the Session Creating the Training Diskette 367 Group Training and Evaluation 2 0404 370 Terminology and 01 2542 CONCH STOD use 373 LESSON7 TRAINING CONDUCT WITH THE
8. 1 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Eryx teaching material 2 LFCO 21 13 para5b f g standards LFCO 21 13 Annex A identification list 25 1995 level 1 and 2 Z 4 23 16 paras 28 29 Eryx training standards 2 31 33 35 to A1 z 5 TP Eryx gunner qualification teaching standards PO 205 6 TP Eryx coach qualification Eryx teaching standards PO 305 B GL 385 010 PT 001 459 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy APPENDIX 1 TO ANNEX D ERYX TRAINING POLICY OUTLINE PREREQUISITES AND STANDARDS TO ACHIEVE P1 DP 2A Gunner E Z Q a lt E Un TOET without thermal imager no mistake will be tolerated where safety 15 involved 205 PO 103 1 TOET with thermal imager review no mistake will be tolerated where Optical AFV safety 1s involved Recognition 2 PO 103 205 01 04 05 written Level 1 test 60 minimum PREREQUISITES BTE COE sp 3 Thermal AFV Recognition Level 1 test must recognize successfully 24 out of 30 items 4 Thermal AFV Recognition Level 2 test must recognize successfully 24out of 30 items 5 Prone test beginner 8 10 6 Kneeling test intermediate 7 10 7 Thermal Imager test advanced 7 10 B GL 385 010 PT 001 461 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy PREREQUISITES Continuous PO 205 training Gunner qualified Appointed as an Eryx gunner or loader STANDARDS TO ACHIEVE Indivi
9. 3 4 Comparing the gunner s current point of aim with the current PPA Modelling the missile in flight and control CRT image display in the gunner s sight Feeding azimuth elevation and cant movements of the firing post into the missile flight equation to control the missile Determining the target velocity in azimuth elevation and range and hence determining B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator if moving the bearing and aspect of the target 5 When the modelled missile reaches the measured target range the missile position is compared with the aimed at target position type aspect and masking to determine whether the mission result was a hit or a miss a If the missile hit the target the computer causes display of missile impact effects in the gunner s sight a star icon will flash for 1 second after impact b If the missile misses the target the flight continues until a maximum range of 600 metres is reached Then a crown icon will flash for 1 second at the point of impact c If the missile hits the ground before the target is reached or beside the target the crown icon flashes for 1 second at the point of impact 6 The MTA sound generator generates no sounds to simulate missile impact either on striking the ground or hitting the target 7 Approximately 1 second after missile impact on the ground or on the target the GM computer ass
10. 3s Case NO sessione tinere esas eedem Pautas dca demere us 174 Fisura Case NO 2 175 Figure 5 3 Gunner Module GM Ignore Terminology Used gand 177 Figure 5 4 Instructor Module 182 Freure 5 5 et ove e e ERE Ree reas 183 Rt 185 Freure 2 75 Battery esie ete mes 187 Figure 5 8 Retroreflector Assembly TSS 188 Figure 5 9 Operational Mission Sequence Timing Diagram 191 Figure 5 10 Schematic of the EPGS FSS Cable Connections 203 Figure 5 11 Controls and Indicators Battery Pack and Charger C ON VEL db dna ete 204 Figure 5 12 Controls and Indicators Instructor Module Keypad 214 Figure Sedo 280 Figure 5522 TIS EIS sb dose ae ato 6 290 Figure SAS AVOR eb doces cix aUos 29 Fieure A4 AV GP C OUBAE 292 Figure 5 5 Leopard To be modified for Leopard 2 293 Figure 5A 6 LAV APC Coyote and 3 294 Pisure oA 7 TAC 295 19 re TW aod ssa ees eee ie oe 296 APOM uua er cr ere ner 297 Fieure sue che 298 igure 9D 5 SAV 299 Proute AV GP CO
11. _ 1 Broad side movers soft target board 2 Portable moving target system hard target board 3 Static target Hard BERN Firing position used by the gunner a 1 Prone use forbidden until further notice 2 Kissing witout Range of engagement for each firing position f Type of protection 1 trench 2 protection wall sand bags or concrete o Through Sight Video Camera used i Report to be submitted B GL 385 010 PT 001 425 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 1 Eryx Firing Report DND 2053 Ammunition Accident Incident Defect and Malfunction Report DND 410 1 Number of gunners j Type of exercise continuous training instructor qualification or prep for an op mission RSO SN name rank OIC SN name rank 1 Attach a photocopy of each Eryx Firing Report DND 2053 to the present report 2 Remarks SN RANK NAME INIT APPT UNIT 426 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CHAPTER 7 GUNNERY TRAINING GENERAL 1 The dwindling availability of training time the high cost of live missiles dictate that neither be wasted Effective and efficient SRAAW H training can be accomplished by conducting three progressive phases of training see Annex D Guidelines for Eryx Training Plan from DP 1 to DP 3A and in particula
12. base assembly secured with a lock pip pin except for the Grizzly installation The complete assembly is mounted on the target vehicle using a selection from a set of three short and four long clip on straps The straps are used in appropriate combinations to secure the assembly to tie down points on the vehicle EPGS RETROREFLECTOR ASSEMBLY p adii MODULE INSTRICTEUR STPE 117928 421 006789 CONTR 5467 456734 SER 00 CANADA MOUNTING HUB LOCKING PIP PIN CLIP ON STRAP LONG OR SHORT BASE ASSEMBLY Figure 5 8 Retroreflector Assembly TSS 22 Confirm by questions CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS Explain 23 EPGS Capabilities a operation from 24 V Battery Pack 24 V vehicle supply or from 110 AC main power supply 188 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator target range from 50 to 600 metres tracking up to 4 targets operate day or night operate in moderate rainy or dusty surroundings operate with 5 differing target types and permits training tactical drills with much more realism 24 EPGS Limitations a Multiple targets must be at least 5 metres apart in azimuth and 30 metres in line Target line of sight blockages may obstruct engagement Poor atmospheric conditions will affect system performance Tracking reliability for frontal side and oblique targets decreases when targets are moving at a
13. 11 The Electromagnetic Spectrum Infrared IR energy waves first noted by Sir William Herschel in 1800 are part of the electromagnetic energy spectrum that exists between visible waves and radio waves see Figure 3 9 Infrared energy is invisible energy emitted by heated objects due to the vibration of molecules in that object This phenomenon is also known as thermal radiance 112 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager 12 The amount of thermal radiance emitted by an object depends on several factors These factors include the object s temperature its surface reflectivity and its structural properties Natural infrared energy is produced when objects absorb and radiate solar energy and convection heat energy from warm air currents Man made objects such as vehicles emit large amounts of infrared energy from the heat of their engines and friction of moving parts The various thermal sources acting on objects in a real setting produce the radiant infrared energy that makes up a thermal scene 13 As illustrated Figure 3 9 the infrared part of the spectrum 15 divided into the near middle far and extreme bands These bands have nothing to do with range or distance but refer to parts of the electromagnetic spectrum Military infrared sights are sensitive to energy from the near middle and far bands ULTRAVIOLET VISIBLE piro X RAYS RADIO INFRARED al Ex 10A 1100 0 1 1 10 100
14. ENGLISH or FRANCAIS as appropriate and release the C1 key and NOTE Do not click a button more than once This will cause the EVIGS to run two programs at once the EVIGS software should now be activated and the Window should appear shortly NOTE The simulator must reach normal operating temperature before calibration After power up allow the simulator to warm up for at least 10 minutes before attempting calibration 21s Confirm by questions and practice B GL 385 010 PT 001 133 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 22 Power Down The EVIGS uses a UNIX operating system and should never be turned off without conducting the full power down procedure Failure to perform this procedure can result in severe corruption of the operating system and can crash the system 23 To power down the system from the Main Window a put the WPA power switch to OFF position b from the Window select C press and hold the key move the pointer to and release the C1 key and d once the pointer no longer responds to the tracker ball turn off the main power of the MCA and the ICA 24 The EVIGS can remain set up for short periods of inactivity However if it will be idle for extended periods it should be disassembled to protect it from dust and damage 25 Confirm by questions and practice DISASSEM
15. 1 View Missions button Opens the Mission Set Summary Window 2 Tutorial button Opens the Guided Tour program that describes EMRM application functions Information found in the guided tour can be referenced from material covered in the Common Tasks section of the User Manual Help file You can also open the Guided Tour from the Help Menu on the Mission Set Summary Window 3 User Manual button Opens a printable version of the Online Help file in MS Word 97 format You can also open the User Manual from the Help Menu on the Mission Set Summary Window 4 Quit Program button Allows you to exit the EMRM application You can also exit the program by closing the Start Up Window d Start Up Window Menu Bar The Menu Bar on the Start Up Window pictured below is a good place to look when getting started The options B GL 385 010 PT 001 241 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy found within the various menu items are listed below EAEPGS Mission Results Manager File Tools Help File Tools Help View Missions Language Selection 9 Online Help F1 Tutorial id User Manual NM About View Opens the Mission Set Summary Window Missions Quit Exits the EMRM Program Program Tools Menu Language Opens a Language Selection Dialog box Selector where the default language can be set to English or French Help Menu On line Help Opens the Help file
16. 26 The procedure for shutting down the trainer is simple the instructor returns to the system menu and clicks on Shut down the system The rest of the procedure 1 similar to that for any other computer connected to a projector 24 Confirm by questions and practice TERMINOLOGY AND DEMONSTRATION Explain and demonstrate 28 Terminology As taught previously certain terminology is used to standardize training The Intrest trainer contains four different target types and demonstrates their most common features The four 372 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching target types are tracked armoured fighting vehicles wheeled armoured fighting vehicles fixed wing aircraft and rotary wing aircraft The last two targets will not be used during this lesson which 1 oriented towards Eryx instructor training 29 Demonstration Two AFVs are shown during a 20 minute demonstration This participatory style of demonstration should stimulate the students into asking questions relating to their future role as a thermal AFV Recognition instructor A short test prepared ahead of time is given at the end of this lesson demonstration The instructor must set some time aside for a question period Extra time remaining is used to prepare diskettes for the student instructors 30 Confirm by questions CONCLUSION 3 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm all main teaching points by questions and practic
17. 30 angle relative to the gunner target line This causes the targets to become tri dimensional and the uni dimensional aiming pattern pre programmed in the firing post will thus go off the target 22 Confirm by questions OPERATIONAL MISSION SEQUENCE Explain and demonstrate 26 The following describes the essential actions common to all EPGS missions from target acquisition to mission result a Target Acquisition and Tracking Pre launch 1 After the FSS 15 powered on and all set up procedures are performed safety catch is on the mission starts when the REC key B GL 385 010 PT 001 189 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 190 on the IM keypad is pressed see Figure 5 9 2 Pressing the REC key causes the gunner s through sight view TSV to be displayed on the IM At the same time the DVR in the IM begins collecting and storing the gunner s TSV in RAM The instructor will at this point time TREC in Figure 5 9 give the order to the gunner to acquire and track the target 3 After the gunner has acquired the target time the gunner arms the FSS by raising the safety catch time TS This causes the scanner in the GM to begin searching for the target From this point movements of the firing post in azimuth elevation and cant are monitored to allow scanning and tracking to be stabilized 4 A target is sensed when the scanner detects laser pulses reflected back from the
18. 381 000 5 000 prior to the start of the lesson 2 Miscellaneous The ideal setting for instructing this lesson is a walk through talk through of an actual range set up complete with range staff 8 The lesson has been written as a guideline and does not supersede B GL 38 1 000 75 000 9 The lesson contains guidance for the safe firing of Eryx missiles The format used is that of a permanently designated range B GL 385 010 PT 001 331 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy with a moving target system but the information can easily be applied to field firing exercises CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 10 Safety Precautions If any weapons are used in class safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 11 Review Nil Introduction Explain Like any other firing range the Eryx firing range requires resources training area vehicles communications safety instructions training sequence staff with specific jobs etc All this would not be successful without coordination and teamwork To initiate and conduct fire practices it 1s imperative that you establish clear instructions brief appropriate staff present an organized range with clear safety rules and provide a good description of the exercise The following is a guideline for the conduct of Eryx fire practices RESPONSIBILITIES OF RANGE STAFF Explain 13 Officer in Command OIC The OIC is appointed by the
19. 39 Extended Caution Zone behind the Weapon Explain There is a peacetime requirement for an extended caution zone when firing HEAT missiles This zone extends 150 metres on each side of the firing post and 100 metres to the rear see Figure 2 6 B GL 385 010 PT 001 29 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 23 11 5 4 77 4 226 DANGER AREA THE VERTICAL PLANE 23 150 GUNNER S HEAD n n p NT E us WE u LOCATION OF INSTRUCTOR S HEAD DANGER AREA IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE Figure 2 6 Extended Caution Zone for HEAT Missile 40 Firing in Confined Spaces Explain Eryx can be fired from confined spaces because the dual rocket motor design gives the missile a low ejection speed at launch The minimum requirements of the firing space see Figure 2 7 are a floor space 2 8 m x 2 8 m b height 2 5 m firing port 1 m x 1 m and 30 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx d ventilation 2 m x 2 m 1 1 WINDOW 1 FROM THE FLOOR FIRING AXIS LAUNCH TUBE HEIGHT 2 50 m VOLUME 21 Figure 2 7 Firing in Confined Spaces 41 The gunner may fire with the front of missile tube 0 5 metres inside the firing port When doing so care must be taken to ensure that the missile exits the tube through the centre of the opening without striking a wall 42 The ventilation need only be on the rear wall an
20. B GL 385 010 PT 001 159 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LESSON 6 FIRE THERMAL IMAGER PRACTICES INSTRUCTORS NOTES 1 Aim To develop fundamental tracking skills from all firing positions with the Mirabel Thermal Imager 2 Main Teaching Points Engage a advancing targets b crossing targets and oblique targets 3 Time Fourteen 40 minute lessons 4 Method Each practice consists of firing five repetitions of the same mission in accordance with criteria detailed at Chapter 7 Annex B total of 70 engagements Students are to rotate after firing five repetitions each A debrief is to be given following every repetition A series can be repeated to practice weak areas see Chapter 7 Annex B Practices will be conducted from all positions and therefore the progression must be logical respecting the range of engagement versus the firing position used 1 e kneeling position without support up to 300 metres kneeling position with tripod from 300 to 600 metres and prone position from 400 to 600 metres 5 Stores One EVIGS with Mirabel simulator per four gunners 6 Preparation The instructor will install the Mirabel simulator on EVIGS and start all of them put laser disc 2 IR missions in the videodisc player and run several missions on each to ensure that the simulators are serviceable Mission Parameters are to be set to ADVANCED unless otherwise stated under COMMENTS 7 Miscellaneo
21. ENTER to select the required mission Press ENTER again to acknowledge the confirmation or press ESC to cancel the operation DELETE ALL MISSIONS allows deletion of all stored missions performed by the currently selected gunner and is verified by the same DELETE MISSION request for confirmation Press ENTER to delete all stored missions for the current gunner or press ESC to cancel the operation B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator 22 The System Maintenance Menu Selecting this menu will cause the error message LOOPBACK CONNECTOR REQUIRED TO ACCESS THIS MENU PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE to appear This menu was designed for use by maintenance personnel and is not available to the coach 23 Confirm by questions and practice STATUS DISPLAYS AND HOT KEYS Explain and demonstrate 24 Status Displays FSS configuration operational status and mission status are displayed in status bars at the top and bottom of the IM display screen area while the FSS is operational Three status bars are provided as follows a System Configuration bar The IM displays the system configuration bar at the top of the screen at all times during normal operation when the firing system is awake This bar contains four fields for main configuration settings for the current mission From left to right these fields are firing position target type obscuration level and masking level
22. Elapsed time Far 17 Missions 3585 lines imported into EMAM is 4 seconds T Empty File Print e Cancel EPGS Results Import Log m ELTE Empty File button clears the information out ane of the Communications Log File The file will still exist but will be blank Print button prints the contents of the EPGS Results Import Log File Cancel button closes the EPGS Results Import Log File Viewer 39 Communications Status Communications Status Bar pictured below is a display only item found on all steps of the Download from IM Wizard Depending on the RS 232 communications line conditions various items the status bar will light up or be highlighted in red or green The items on the Communications Status Bar are listed below Brk CTS DCO OSA Eror TsO DTRRTS Download from IM Communications Status Bar 278 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator Break Lights up when there is a break the RS 232 data cable Clear to Send Lights up when the EMRM status is clear to send Note that this is CVC in the new EMRM version Data Carrier Detect DCD is usually for modem connections only not direct RS 232 links DCD indicates if the modem connection is in effect DCD signal is cleared if any of the modems disconnect Not relevant for EMRM unless we have a future option to transmit mission results via modem Note that this is DPD in the new EMR
23. Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy forecast the next lesson f pack kit 76 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx LESSON 5 SITING THE ERYX DURING COMBAT OPERATIONS INSTRUCTORS NOTES 1 Aim To teach fundamentals and considerations for defensive and offensive siting of Eryx The Eryx team will be able to site entrench and prepare a range card enabling the team to a provide maximum destruction of enemy armoured elements b provide mutual support amongst sub units and apply proper concealment and local protection 2 Main Teaching Points a fundamentals b siting considerations fire control d Eryx defensive tasks e Eryx offensive tasks and f safety considerations 9 Time One 40 minute lesson at DP 1 Eryx defensive tasks one 40 minute lesson at DP 2A the remaining main teaching points 4 Method Briefing Stores a screen b multimedia classroom and B GL 385 010 PT 001 77 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy check the serviceability of training aids b check and review tactics techniques and procedures for Eryx and master the subject 7 Miscellaneous This lesson s subject matter should be taught by simplifying the fundamentals of Eryx usage There is no need at this level to have exhaustive explanations Keep things simple and focus on clear understanding of why where and how Eryx
24. ICON TITLE TEXT DESCRIPTION LABEL Range Short Range represents a short range engagement distance missile traveled 0 200 f rom gunner to target for the current simulation There is no icon for range None so Range None is represented by the Short icon Medium Range represents a medium range engagement distance missile 201 300 m traveled from gunner to target for the current simulation Long Range represents a long range engagement distance missile traveled from gunner to target for the current simulation 301 600 Speed represents the speed of a moving target for the current simulation The text label above this icon will display the actual value from the currently selected mission e g 55 km h Speed represents a stationary target for the current simulation The text label above this icon will display the actual value from the currently selected mission e g 0 km h Masking None represents no masking on the target Low Masking Low represents low masking on the target Medium Masking None represents medium masking on the target High Masking None represents high masking on the target 25 Confirm by questions and practice 262 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator DETAILED MISSION RESULTS WINDOW Explain and demonstrate 26 The Detailed Mission Results Window is used by the EMRM application to display mission results from the
25. on the screen 10 Introduction The EVIGS is a user friendly gunnery simulator With only a brief introduction to the controls the operator can very easily navigate through the menus and learn the operation of the simulator for himself 11 This lesson will introduce the graphical computer environment and outline the general sequence of events that should be followed to run missions A walk through talk through format 15 used to take advantage of the user friendliness of the operating system 12 Do not dwell on trying to define a set procedure Effort should be made to develop a familiarity with each menu and its functions B GL 385 010 PT 001 137 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy GENERAL PRINCIPLES Explain and demonstrate using the screen and keypad in conjunction with the following notes 13 The EVIGS uses a graphical operating system In general menus appear in the form of a window on the screen Each window contains several buttons which are used to activate the functions of the window NOTE Refer to the Main Window as an example 14 The EVIGS keyboard has a tracker ball which is used to control the position of the pointer arrow on the screen To push a button move the pointer over the button and press the C1 key 15 Each window performs a specific function Once finished with a window return to the previous window by pushing the Close button NOTE As an exam
26. Tutorial Opens the Guided Tour User Manual Opens a Word document with the contents of the manual Once it is opened in Word a hard copy can be printed About Opens the EMRM About Box containing copyright information 25 Confirm by questions 242 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator MISSION SET SUMMARY WINDOW Explain and demonstrate 24 The Mission Set Summary Window appears when you click the View Missions button on the Start Up Window and select a Mission Set This screen is the most commonly used screen in the EMRM program and contains the following items EPGS Mistion Results Manager Mission Set Summary Eie Ed Mons Windows Help Open Saecied Mission Details l2 6 s gt nti wQEL 6 Bg no 090805 ISM 2000 10 06 26 ISM 2000 10 09 42 ISM 0 102243 15 2000 10 29 05 ISM 2000 1047 08 15 2000 10 51 21 ISM 16 2000 11 01 09 ISM WRUNPSUE PST m 522 x Saec Mission Set felts lo view View T Show Azimuth Eevalion C Program Fies DND EMRM 1 O EMRM Filec Missions FRY DB EMEM o0 0119 Al Missione Set SY E SIMULATION PARAMETERS MISSION PARAMETERS 1 0850 is ee A C Program FileeNDN D E v1 0 DB ENGUSH 1 4 1 Mission Set Summary Window a Menu Bar Contains all the available commands to be used with this window The followin
27. check the entire weapon cracks or damage verify that both missile indexing slots are clear of blockage and not cracked verify that the electrical connector and cover are functional and free from obstruction verify that the firing post and missile locking levers are functional verify that the trigger button safety catch and safety cover are functional 1 when the safety catch is engaged the safety cover should not open 2 when the safety catch is disengaged the safety cover should click when opened and the trigger button should fully depress and B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx 3 when the safety cover is open and the safety catch is engaged the trigger button should not fully depress f check the eye piece for damage check the optical ports for damage h verify that the elevation unit operates smoothly and 1 verify that the tripod traverses 360 degrees smoothly 34 Test Set Explain Should the serviceability of an Eryx be in question the test set should be used to test firing post circuitry The test set is held by first line maintenance and Fire Control Technicians are trained to operate and interpret it 35 The test set be operated from batteries or external power sources and can test a firing post within minutes Firing posts should be tested a after a severe shock such as a fall b after exposure to excessive undamped vibration every 30 days an ope
28. the missile allowing the initiation of a normal firing sequence The safety cover also closes a supply voltage line which supports communication with the missile On release of the cover after missile launch communications will cease and the thrust stopping device TSD will engage Safety catch a physically locks the safety cover in the closed position and b physically prevents pressing the trigger button when engaged Trigger button initiates the missile launch sequence Firing handle gripped by the right hand when firing from the shoulder Retaining bar scecures the firing post to the tripod B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx A Narrow Field of View Window G Electrical Connectors B Sight Window Missile Indexing Slots Wide Field of View Window M Retaining Bar D Sight Protective Plug N Firing Handle E Left Hand Handle Figure 2 2 Parts of the Firing Post Front View B GL 385 010 PT 001 19 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy E Left Hand Handle Missile Locking Lever F Eye Piece J Safety Cover G Electrical Connectors K Safety Catch H Missile Indexing Slots L Trigger Button Figure 2 3 Parts of the Firing Post Rear View 26 Mounting the firing post is done the following manner a place the firing post retaining bar on the supporting platform b slide the firing post forward until the bar slips off the end of the platform andslide the firi
29. within 2 1 seconds to give the firing post sufficient time to gain control of the missile 40 During launch phase gunners must absorb weight shift and weight loss to avoid excessive jerking of the firing post Motion beyond the minimum standard will result in a missile excursion This standard is based on the field of view of the sight 41 During cruise phase gunners must maintain the sight on the point of aim Movement of the sight outside of the minimum standard will result in a miss see Figure 6 2 This standard is based on the size of a main battle tank and the missile flight path Point of aim must be Point of aim within this area for a hit ENTUM d E 2 5m Y 2 25m KM IN PEE METRE gt Target motion gt Figure 6 2 Cruise Phase Minimum Standards B GL 385 010 PT 001 313 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 42 Score As a qualified gunner a soldier is expected to be capable of more than just maintaining control of the missile As such a score 1s used to reflect overall performance It is based on the same criteria as the minimum standards except that each criterion is further ranked with a score from 0 to 10 see Annex F Note that a zero score corresponds to the minimum standard 43 The nine scores are combined according to the following formula launch phase and cruise phase V x gt response time max high max low max left max right x N max high m
30. ASSEMBLY KEYBOARD PRINTER Figure 4 5 Assembly Diagram for the EVIGS B GL 385 010 PT 001 129 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy MISSILE LAUNCH ASSEMBLY WIRE PULL PRINTER ASSEMBLY NOT LABELLED J1 12 1 FIRING SIGHT INSTRUCTOR CASE ASSEMBLY MAIN CASE ASSEMBLY P2 J5 PRIMETECH amp Figure 4 6 EVIGS System Interconnection Cables Layout 130 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator HEAD ASSEMBLY WIRE ASSEMBLY LOCKING KNOB POLE ASSEMBLY MISSILE TUBE BASE ASSEMBLY WIREPULL ASSEMBLY Figure 4 7 WPA to MTA Wire Connection 18 Confirm by questions and practice POWER UP AND POWER DOWN Explain demonstrate and practice 19 Prior to power up the instructor must verify that the fuse cartridges see Figure 4 8 in the MCA and ICA are correctly installed for the line voltage The embossed arrow on the main power assemblies must point to 110 for North American voltage or to 220 for European voltage Change the cartridge as necessary by prying up the faceplate rotating the cartridge and snapping it back into place B GL 385 010 PT 001 131 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 110V Configuration 220V Configuration Configuration 110V Configuration 220V Figure 4 8 Fuse Cartridge CAUTION Ensure that the MCA and ICA
31. All moisture should be carefully removed from optical surfaces b The missile should be kept in the protective envelope for as long as possible and only removed for firing e Once field packing is removed efforts should be made to keep moisture away from exposed missile parts The end caps can be replaced on a loaded missile tube B GL 385 010 PT 001 37 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy d Electrical connectors should not be allowed to get wet NOTE The lifespan of the missile once field packing has been removed has yet to be determined 20 Confirm by questions NBC DECONTAMINATION Explain 21 There are no specific decontamination methods for the Eryx weapon system Special attention however should be given to a the firing post 1 eye piece 2 optical ports 3 handles and 4 junction unit assembly b the tripod 1 handles 2 feet of the legs and 3 traverse assembly and elevation unit C the missile 1 crush fuse and rear section 2 protective foam padding 3 interlock unit and 38 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx 4 junction unit 22 The missile is sealed at every stage of the packaging process It can therefore be used immediately once removed from a contaminated container The field packing is made from porous foam and cannot be decontaminated Consequently it should be discarded 23 Video Clip Play video clip Lesson 2 Part 2
32. B GL 385 010 PT 001 59 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy A Missile tubes 2 B Collars 3 per MT Straps D Packboard frame Figure 2 15 Loader s Rucksack 37 Confirm by practice STOWAGE Explain 38 Eryx is a highly flexible weapon system that can be transported in all combat and logistic vehicles Since the missile is sensitive to vibration and shock it must be stowed in dampened racks when transported in tracked vehicles Illustrated stowage configurations for every combat vehicle will soon be issued as an amendment to this manual 39 Confirm by questions CONCLUSION 40 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class 60 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx play video clip Lesson 3 Part 3 Review of Lesson 3 confirm all main teaching points by questions and practice conduct safety precautions summarize the lesson and stress that 1 a proper firing position is crucial for successful target engagements 2 weapon operation with two soldiers is preferable and 3 weapon drills must become second nature for the gunner forecast the next lesson and pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 61 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LESSON 4 PERFORM SRAAW H HANDLING DRILLS INSTRUCTOR NOTES 62 Aim To teach a proper Eryx handling drills to reduce engagement time and ensure safety b the importance of a proper fire position for effective trac
33. C stop firing and or close the range when conditions arise that would constitute a hazard d report all unsafe equipment or practices to the CO and recommend changes to existing orders in the interest of safety e inspect all range facilities for correct operation before the practice and f give a safety briefing to all personnel on safety aspects of the range practice identification of range safety personnel and any safety signals which may be used 19 Confirm by questions 20 Second In Command 2IC The OIC appoints a 2IC to assist him in his duties Ordinarily the 2IC is responsible for the 334 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching administration of the range logistics preparation concurrent activities dismantling the range 21 Assistant Range Safety Officer ARSO The ARSO is a qualified Eryx instructor either an officer or non commissioned officer NCO who carries out the detailed supervision of one weapon system on the firing point or supervision of the waiting zone see also B GL 381 001 TS 000 Chapter 1 section 2 paragraph 45 The ARSO is responsible for all safety arrangements on the firing point or in the waiting zone and must be present whenever firing takes place 27 23 to The ARSO is responsible to assist the RSO his duties ensure command and control on the firing point weapon system or in the waiting zone ensure that all safety orders instructions a
34. Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Go to Saved Bookmark Button Recalls the bookmark from memory and highlights it Print Selected Button Prints a report of selected missions results the table Online Help Button Opens the Windows Help File for the EMRM application d Mission Results Table The Mission Results Table pictured below is a database table that contains a Mission Set project file of mission results These mission sets can be acquired from a number of sources including a download from the IM or from a EPGS Result file CSV stored on a hard drive network location floppy disk or CD ROM 7149 AO TOS 150 102243 10 20 152 104708 153 10 51 21 154 11 01 08 Mission Results Table Once mission results are in the table you can begin to work with the records as follows 1 Selecting Missions In order to work with the missions you must first select them To select highlight a mission simply click the record with your mouse or use the keyboard hot keys Selecting a single mission result from the table causes a few important things to occur a Recorded values for the simulation parameters and mission parameters from the selected mission result are displayed as icons graphic images in the 250 B GL 385 010 PT 001 2 3 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator Simulation Parameters and M
35. IDENTIFICATION STANDARDS FOR THE INFANTRY 1 AFV and AC identification LEVEL 1 is applicable to all LFC personnel 388 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 6 IDENTIFICATION STANDARDS FOR THE INFANTRY 1 identification LEVEL Il is applicable to a MCpl CWO b all Reconnaissance Platoon and Anti Armour Platoon personnel c Mortar Fire Controllers MFC 2 AC identification LEVEL Il is applicable to Sgt to CWO b Infantry Platoon commanders c all Anti Armour Platoon personnel d Mortar Fire Controllers MFC IDENTIFICATION STANDARDS FOR THE INFANTRY 1 AFV identification LEVEL is applicable to a all Reconnaissance and Anti Armour Platoon personnel b Mortar Fire Controllers MFC B GL 385 010 PT 001 389 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LFCO 21 13 Identification is the ability to state the common name and role of the AFV or AC Artillery Reconnaissance Anti Armour Engineers Armour Armoured Personnel Carrier Armoured Recovery Vehicle Bridge Layer Chemical biological radiological Command Post Air Defence Fighter Aircraft Attack Helicopter Transport Helicopter LFCO 21 13 Minimum Identification Standard a minimum success rate of 80 24 30 b froma list of twenty different AFV or AC for each test at all levels Various Viewing Distances Minimum Identification Conditions 390 B GL 385 010 PT 001
36. Wheeled vehicles generate frictional heat in tires shock absorbers drive shafts transmissions axles and differentials The smallest of these features can only be resolved at long range if they are quite warm Driving through wet grass water or mud will cool down these areas making them difficult to detect Frictionally heated feature cues can be used by the gunner at long range to detect the vehicle and classify it as wheeled or tracked At shorter ranges these cues can be used to identify the vehicle 23 Reflected Radiance Certain smooth glossy surfaces such as vehicle windshields and glossy painted fenders can reflect IR radiation hitting them from other sources Vehicle windshields such as those of trucks often appear very dark because they reflect the low radiant temperatures of the cold night sky The thermal radiation from B GL 385 010 PT 001 115 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy a fire located next to a glossy painted APC could be reflected off the vehicle s flat side surfaces Thermal reflections can cause some odd signature effects The gunner should be aware of this phenomenon but need not be overly concerned Only very smooth glossy surfaces are subject to strong reflections Generally surface reflections are diffuse in nature and do not usually cause problems 24 Confirm by questions THERMODYNAMICS OF THE INFRARED BATTLEFIELD Explain 29 The Diurnal Cycle of the natural and man made
37. When an image 1 visible the thermal imager should be unlocked from the firing post and rotated up so that the optics of the firing post are clear Place the crosshairs on a distant object such as the top of a tree Without disturbing the firing post carefully lock the thermal imager back down Look at the image through the optics and the crosshairs should be pointing at the same place If this is not the case there may be damage to some of the internal components of the thermal imager and it should be turned in for repair 28 Confirm by questions and practice BRIGHTNESS FOCUS CONTRAST POWER SWITCH Figure 3 8 Power Switch and Image Controls FIRING WITH THE THERMAL IMAGER Explain demonstrate and practice 29 There are subtle differences in firing with the thermal imager attached to the firing post The most significant 15 the change in the effect of weight shift When firing with just the firing post the firing post will drop down approximately 10 mils the space between the pre aim arrow and the crosshairs When the thermal sight is added to the firing post the weight distribution 1s changed The end result is that the observable weight shift is seen as a shift down by the 106 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager crosshairs of only approximately 6 mils This means that a gunner should still aim and fire in the same way but be ready to make a small adjustment down to get the crosshairs on the prope
38. and partially or fully camouflaged Visuals are to be free from obscuration such as smoke and haze and weather conditions are to be clear with high ambient light levels Aircraft should be identified against all types of sky including partly and fully clouded skies D Users of Specialist Weapons and Equipment must have AFV and AC recognition standards commensurate with the equipment in use Identification standards for members of the Anti Armour Platoon Eryx weapon system teams and other users of night observation devices optical sights Low Light TV Thermal Imagery and FLIR shall meet or exceed the identification standards contained in LFCO 21 13 These identification standards are published in applicable corps documents and equipment publications The following is the standard for using optical and thermal sights for AFV Recognition Level 1 and 2 a optical sight up to 600 metres and b thermal sight up to 600 metres 18 Confirm by questions TEACHING METHODS Explain 19 Teaching methods There are four questions to be answered before giving a lesson in AFV identification particularly for the Eryx gunner qualification B GL 385 010 PT 001 379 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy a Who are the students and what is their level of knowledge Individuals are DP 1 qualified and have knowledge limited to optical AFV Recognition Level 1 An entrance test on this level will be given on the Eryx gunner qualificat
39. e Check that the speaker cover and the missile tube connector front right end side of the tube are clean with no signs of impact damage corrosion moisture or entry of foreign matter 12 Firing Post 198 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator a Check that the case and top cover of the firing post are both clean and undamaged Check that the sight eyepiece and front lens are clean and not cracked and that the rubber eye shield is present and secure Check that the scanner window 15 clean and not cracked Examine the eyepiece and front windows for internal misting b Remove the IM GM cable connector cap and check that the connector pins are clean with no signs of damage corrosion moisture misalignment or foreign matter Check that the safety catch safety cover and trigger button function correctly by mechanical feel Check that the MTA guide slots and MTA locking lever are undamaged and free of corrosion d Ensure the retaining bar and lock for tripod mounting are present and not damaged E Ensure the umbilical cable and connector are clean and undamaged f Ensure the neutral density filter is present and undamaged 13 Tripod Assembly Check the following for cleanliness and any damage a supporting platform assembly b elevation unit traverse platform assembly and d tripod support and all locking levers and clamps 14 Mirabel Thermal Imager Perform visual and o
40. except that no file selection dialogs need to be opened and the process can proceed immediately The dialog to indicate import progress as used in Import EPGS Results form will be seen during the Generating phase to indicate the import phase that generates the Mission Set from the downloaded EPGS Results text 38 Once the translation is done the following window will appear to show the EPGS results import log Pimp Importing 5 Results Mission s into Readable format by EMAM x Translating Record total lines 0 B GL 385 010 PT 001 217 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 5 Results Import Log olx 41 11 15 2001 10 00 44 Mission Results file line 3262 mission 16 co ordinate is out of sequence Processing will continue 9 43 104 18 2001 10 00 44 Mission Results line 3305 mission 16 co ordinate out of sequence Processing will continue 112 52 15 15 2001 10 00 44 Mission Results line 3456 mission 17 has unexpected content and cannot be processed 742 113 15 2001 10 00 44 Mission Results line 3457 mission 17 co ordinate is out of sequence Processing will continue 75 2 83 15 2001 10 00 44 Mission Results line 3494 mission 17 co ordinate is out of sequence Processing will continue 112 23 7 18 2001 10 00 48
41. levelling bubble verifies the tripod is level always faces the gunner leg locking lever locks the legs in the desired position low medium high leg locking clamp locks the leg when the leg is extended and shoe supports the tripod B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Figure 2 1 Parts of the Tripod 23 Mounting the tripod is done in the following manner a open the traverse handle D b unlock the tripod legs I using leg locking levers open the legs and make sure that the levelling bubble J is facing the gunner with respect to the centre of arc B GL 385 010 PT 001 15 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy d lock the legs with leg locking levers at the desired height and then adjust the level by unlocking the leg locking clamps L to allow extension of the legs orient the supporting platform A to the centre of arc and f open the elevation handle H 24 Confirm by questions 25 Firing Post The firing post is designed for compactness and can be used with or without the tripod It has three major assemblies a Sight Assembly consisting of 1 sight localizer guidance SLG computer generates guidance orders for the missile 2 optics a wide field of view WFV window charge coupled device CCD camera used to localize the missile determine its position at launch b narrow field of view NFV window CCD camera used to localize
42. the EPGS will ensure that the skills and experience gained in earlier training can be carried forward into much more varied and challenging single and multiple target training scenarios The EPGS must be seen as complementary advanced training for gunners already qualified through all three phases of training see Chapter 7 However there is no need for a tracking table because this will reduce the realism of engaging targets Nevertheless the EPGS offers the same coaching capacity as the EVIGS using the same calculations and graphics 38 Minimum Standards Explain and demonstrate graphics on screen EVIGS EPGS and using visual aids The minimum standards were developed from analysis of missile flight performance The criteria include realignment time motion during launch phase and motion during cruise phase If a gunner tracks within the minimum standards he will have just maintained control of the missile The minimum standards are permanently marked on the tracking graphs and are as follows a realignment time 2 1 seconds b launch maximum left 28 mrad launch maximum right 56 mrad d launch maximum high 28 mrad launch maximum low 42 mrad 312 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching f cruise maximum left 1 75 metres g cruise maximum right 1 75 metres h cruise maximum high 1 25 metres and 1 cruise maximum low 1 00 metre 39 Gunners must realign the sight to the correct point of aim
43. 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator MISSION SETUP 24 This set of windows is used to identify the gunner select a series of missions to be fired and specify the firing parameters to be used on the series a Gunner s Data Identifies the gunner and stores the results of his last 100 missions 1 New Gunner Data Establishes a new gunner database The last name and service number must be filled in 2 Retrieve Gunner Data Retrieves data for the designated gunner or service number 3 Correct Gunner Data Saves changes made to the gunner s particulars 4 Close Gunner Data Clears the window of all data 5 Delete Gunner Data Deletes data for the designated gunner or service number 6 Print Mission s Prints the data as highlighted by the operator 7 Format Floppy Prepares a blank floppy disk for data storage b Select Mission s Selects a series of up to ten missions from the video disk 1 2 Video Disk Selected Identifies the video disk from which to select missions This window only appears if no video disk is selected Select Mission s B GL 385 010 PT 001 141 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 142 a b d e f g Mission Name Lists the missions available on the video disk Missions are identified by the number followed by a period followed by the range of the target Missions can be selected by double cli
44. 15 sited and how to draw an Eryx range card CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions Conduct safety precautions as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 Review Characteristics of the Eryx a Range 1 50 to 600 m 2 missile arms itself within 40 50 m 3 short range hazard of 150 m and 4 after 600 m missile will run out of propellant wire b Accuracy 1 90 hit probability when fired from tripod 78 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx 2 70 from the shoulder 3 effective range from the shoulder unsupported 300 400 m due to the wire pull and 4 hit probabilities are for moving targets Penetration 1 over 900 mm RHA 2 over 2 5 m reinforced concrete and 3 over 5 m earth Vulnerability The gunner must maintain his point of aim throughout the missile s flight and is therefore vulnerable during an engagement 1 time of flight to reach 300 m 1 3 sec and 2 600 m in 4 3 sec Flexibility 1 operated and fired by one or two soldiers 2 transported in any vehicle 3 transported by helicopter or dropped by parachute 4 man packed short distances 5 night firing capabilities or through smoke and 6 small back blast and can be fired in confined spaces B GL 385 010 PT 001 79 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 10 Introduction Explain The Eryx is best suited to defensive operations It is allocated to section leve
45. 235 100cm 10 100m ikm 10km 100km gol WAVELENGTH 75 i MIDDLE FAR EXTREME NEAR INFRARED INFRARED INFRARED 1 0 4 06 081 15 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 30 WAVELENGTH p Figure 3 9 The Electromagnetic Spectrum 14 Confirm by questions TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCES AND THERMAL IMAGES Explain 15 Visual discrimination of objects in the thermal scene is made possible by the fact that most of the objects have a radiated temperature either higher or lower than their immediate background Even radiated temperature differences less than one degree will appear on the thermal imager display These temperature differences appear B GL 385 010 PT 001 113 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy as variations of the brightness level on the display This concept of temperature differences 1s fundamental to thermal imager technology and thermal images Thermal signatures are the result of the different amounts of IR energy emitted by different parts of a target 16 If there is no difference between the radiated temperature of an object and its background the object will not be distinguishable from its background It will in effect be invisible A target vehicle with its engine running will likely appear much brighter than the background During sunny days a target vehicle will often appear much darker than its background During the night the reverse is often true Even within a target veh
46. 305 02 written test 80 Instructor 5 qualified or more Advanced Small 2 Eryx coach test on EVIGS Arms Course Chapter 6 Annex A successfully ASAC qualified passed as follows Or a coaching before firing DEMO small 80 40 50 or more amo b coaching after firing mod l 80 40 50 or more inf qualified 3 Eryx coach test on live firing Fir missil ed a missile same as para 2 following gunner qualification 4 Participate in the set up and desirable conduct of a live firing range RSO qualification Prior to starting DP 3A student 5 Fire Eryx missile TP to will practice following standards missions in prone a engage target at and kneeling 550 metres moving at positions and 35 km h from prone also with the position with tripod thermal imager engage a target at 300 metres moving at 25 km h from kneeling position without tripod At least one or the other target must be engaged successfully 466 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy APPENDIX 2 TO ANNEX D ERYX THERMAL AFV RECOGNITION IDENTIFICATION VBC THERMIQUE FICHE D EVALUATION EVALUATION SHEET Rank Grade Name Nom SN NM Level Niveau 1 2 VEHICLE ROLE VEHICLE ROLE VEHICULE ROLE VEHICULE ROLE B GL 385 010 PT 001 467 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy TANK RECCE DEFENSE AIR DEFENCE A RIENNE Mark Note 30
47. 412 000 M B 000 Annex D and or the printed version of the EMRM CD ROM user s manual Miscellaneous a confirm that the PC has a male port to fit the RS232 cable and spreadsheet software if the EMRM is not available b do not play with HyperTerminal application e g side scroll bars etc when saving results as this may cause data corruption and C before proceeding with the training on mission results data transfers it is imperative to empty the IM memory menu 65 for the following reasons 1 the RAM memory of the IM does not empty its data by itself thus each time a download is done the entire memory up to 1500 missions will be added on the download of the latest missions 2 the instructor must take into account that downloading takes time generally 45 minutes for every group of 250 missions and B GL 385 010 PT 001 231 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 3 ideally at the level of the Eryx instructor qualification it is not necessary to exceed 20 missions per student because the aim is to practice them on downloading rather than to improve their firing technique CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions If any weapons are used in class or outside safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review Nil 10 Introduction Explain In addition to outdoor operation with the GM the IM can operate in stand alone with the Charger C
48. Annex to Chapter 6 LFCO 21 13 4 Specialist Weapons and Equipment Users Identification Conditions a Equal or greater the following standards 1 when using optical sights up to 3500 metres 2 when using thermal sights up to 1500 metres CONFIRMATION OF STAGE 1 B GL 385 010 PT 001 391 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy PO EO 403 01A REF A LFCO 21 13 PREPARE A LESSON ON AFV AC IDENTIFICATION TEACHING POINTS 1 AFV AC identification standards 2 Teaching methods 3 Training aids TEACHING METHODS 1 There are 4 questions to be answered before giving a lesson in AFV and AC identification a Who are the candidates and what is their level of knowledge What level should be taught How much time does the instructor have What environment and training aids are available 392 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex A to Chapter 6 TEACHING METHODS Time available 5 vehicles aircraft 40 minutes Teach the AFV AC with their variants Avoid showing identifying signs All aspects are shown one side view one front view and one three quarter view Realistic distance for the AFV AC Respect teaching sequence Use proper terminology TEACHING METHODS Apply the six principles of instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 Interest Understanding Emphasis Participation Obtaining results Confirmation B GL 385 010 PT 001 393 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CON
49. B GL 385 010 PT 001 117 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy is heavy enough not enough energy will get through to allow the target to be seen In lighter precipitation the apparent temperatures of both target features and background objects are decreased The basic emitted signature cues do not change due to atmospheric transmission losses but become fainter as precipitation that has fallen and collected on objects gradually cools the various features to the same temperature Falling precipitation tends to reduce thermal imager visibility more than fallen precipitation 30 Under conditions of falling rain or snow target features that are solar or frictionally heated cool down and emit less energy Frictional heat loss is caused by water and mud accumulating on tracks wheels and other drive and suspension components While background temperatures fall and normally visible features on vehicles disappear engine compartment and exhaust system temperatures remain high and very visible The background becomes washed out with the loss of landmarks such as tree lines tracks and contour features depending on the duration and temperature of the rain The washed out background tends to reduce scene clutter and can increase target detectability Recognition and identification of targets is more difficult due to the loss of features normally solar or frictionally heated The contrast level on the thermal imager must be increased to compen
50. Commanding Officer CO for a specific exercise and is responsible for all aspects of command and control His duties may also include those of the Range Safety Officer RSO if qualified as an Eryx instructor and if it is considered unnecessary to appoint one officer specifically to perform the function of OIC see also B GL 381 001 TS 000 Chapter 1 section 2 paragraph 48 14 The OIC is responsible to a Plan and control the exercise to ensure it accomplishes the aim b Issue detailed local instructions as required 6 Inform all concerned personnel of the exercise plan 332 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching Ensure that applicable safety regulations are made known and are understood by all participating personnel Control and supervise personnel and weapons Ensure that all safety regulations are observed during the exercise including the preparation of the danger area trace the Eryx Danger Area Template is at Annex I Give orders to commence and cease fire Ensure that communications required by Range Control and unit orders are maintained at all times Ensure that range facilities are left in an acceptable condition and that any defects or suggested improvements are reported in accordance with range and unit orders Ensure that duds and misfires are dealt with in accordance with regulations and Range Standing Orders Report ammunition failures in accordance with range and unit orders Ma
51. EPGS and Target Sub System TSS 100 metres from the firing post Place the two EPGS boxes on a stores cart with the TSS mounted on top To simulate 350 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching an Iltis aim at the height of the cart wheels floor and select Iltis with the IM hot key d Review the ETSVCS user s manual TSV 4980 yi Miscellaneous The following must also be taught during this lesson a The ETSVCS uses a lead acid battery which must be fully recharged after use b Voltage selection 110 or 220 V must be completed prior to connecting an external power source Failure to comply will result in damage to the system C Always turn the iris knob day night selector on the camera smoothly to the end of its run fully clockwise or counter clockwise without applying undue force Excessive force will damage the iris selection mechanism d It is very important to understand and to follow the appropriate installation and start up procedures Failure to adhere to these procedures may result in serious damage to the equipment or in poor quality recordings e The ETSVCS was manufactured with commercial off the shelf items Therefore the ETSVCS cannot and shall not be operated under inclement weather such as rain etc CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions If any weapons are used in class or outside safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Re
52. Environmental Considerations 24 Confirm by questions STORAGE Explain 25 Firing Post The Eryx firing post like any other weapon must be stored in accordance with A 51 100 001 AS 000 Security Orders for the Canadian Forces 26 Tripod The tripod is a serialized item and must be stored as such 24 Missile Regulations regarding the storage handling and transportation of Eryx missiles are contained in C 09 153 001 FP 000 Explosive Safety Manual 28 The desiccant bag found in the individual container should be replaced a each time the individual container is opened and b every two years 29 Storage Temperature The missile can be stored at temperatures from 46 C to 71 C 30 Shelf Life The shelf life of the Eryx missile is 10 years 3 Temporary Field Storage The temporary field storage area for Eryx missiles should have the following characteristics a temperature between 31 and 51 B GL 385 010 PT 001 39 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy b level ground provide protection from 1 physical damage 2 direct sunlight 3 rain and 4 snow d have adequate drainage not be directly on the ground f be secure 32 Confirm by questions WEAPON SYSTEM CHECK OUT PROCEDURE Explain demonstrate 33 After cleaning weapon whenever in doubt of its serviceability the gunner should perform the following inspections a b 40
53. H s can defeat a modern main battle tank MBT frontally 15 Video Clip Play video clip Lesson 1 Part 1 History This clip covers paragraphs 11 through 14 ROLE AND CHARACTERISTICS Explain 16 Role The role of the SRAAW H 1 to provide short range anti armour fire 17 Description Eryx is a short range optically tracked thrust vector controlled single wire guided missile 18 Characteristics Regardless of different ground and tactical situations proper employment of Eryx will depend on careful consideration of its characteristics a Range 1 minimum 50 m and 2 maximum 600 m b Penetration Eryx can penetrate all known armour including reactive armour It can penetrate 1 over 900 mm of rolled homogeneous armour RHA 2 over 2 5 m of reinforced concrete and 3 over 5 m of earth Flexibility Eryx be transported in all types of vehicles It can be carried by one man over short distances or by two men over long distances It can be fired from either the tripod or the shoulder and from enclosed spaces 12 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx d Accuracy The weapon uses semi automatic command to line of sight SACLOS guidance with thrust vector control This gives a probability of hit of 90 when firing from the tripod and 70 when firing from the shoulder even against moving targets The guidance computer flies the missile to the point of aim regardless of target mov
54. INTREST TRAINE R sie ens 375 Rc 375 Conductor the Lesson 376 Identification 376 Teaching WIUIOOS E 379 BECHER 382 Cone US TON 385 MAIN POINTS OF LESSON 7 POWERPOINT PRESENTATION 387 ANNEX B ERYX COACH TEST Live Pire B VIGS BPOS ees 403 B GL 385 010 PT 001 ANNEX C RANGE VS TIME AND SPEED VS TIME CHARIS 407 ANNEX D TRAJECTORY OF A MISSILE ON A VERTICAL PLAN sci ee 409 ANNEX E TRAJECTORY OF A MISSILE ON A HORIZONTAL PLAN 411 ANNEX F OPERATION OF EXPLOSIVE REACTIVE ARMOUR a A 413 ANNEX G SCORE CRITERIA TABLFE 415 ANNEX H EXAMPLES OF EVIGS SCORE CALCUEDXATIONS iecit 417 ANNEX I EVIGS GRAPHS tients 419 ANNEX J DANGER AREA 42 ANNEX K ERYX FIRING REPORT 423 ANNEX ERYX FIRING SUMMARY MESSAGE 425 7 GUNNERY TRAINING 427 Trarmmie 429 TESTS OF ELEMENTARY TRAINING TOETS ASE 431 EVIGS GUNNERY STANDARDS 437 APP
55. OIC ensures compliance with the Eryx Danger Area Template see Annex I 44 Confirm by questions CONCLUSION 45 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class 342 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching confirm all main teaching points by questions and practice conduct safety precautions summarize the lesson and stress that Eryx missiles are exceptionally expensive and thus staff must ensure that maximum training value is garnered from each one forecast the next lesson and pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 343 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LESSON 4 COACH LIVE FIRE INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach a coaching techniques for Eryx live fire and b the importance of coaching to maximize the training value of live fire Main Teaching Points a coaching before firing and b coaching after firing 3 Time One 40 minute lesson 4 Method Explanation demonstration and application during live fire 5 Stores a one Eryx per two gunners b one dummy missile per weapon and classroom target per weapon 6 Preparation The instructor should a check the weapons for serviceability and b place the classroom targets 6 metres from the weapons 7 Miscellaneous This lesson should be given to instructor students immediately prior to live fire 344 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching 8 The review for this lesson is crucial There is no point in conti
56. Once an item is selected it is maximized and becomes the active window HELP MENU FUNCTIONS On line Help Opens the Help file Tutorial Opens the Guided Tour User Manual Opens a Word document with the contents of the manual Once it is opened in Word a hard copy can be printed About Opens the EMRM About Box containing copyright information b Mission Set Summary Window Toolbar From the buttons located in the Mission Set Summary Window Toolbar pictured below you can open or close a mission set project file download results from the EPGS Instructor Module and manage EPGS results files B GL 385 010 PT 001 247 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Open Selected Mission Detail s Button Opens the mission detail s currently selected in the Mission Results Table Open Mission Set Button Opens the EMRM Mission Set Selector Dialog Box where you can select a Mission Set EMRM project file to be opened Close Mission Set Button Closes the currently open mission set prompting you to verify deletion of flagged mission files Import EPGS Mission File Button Opens the Import EPGS Results window where you can import an EPGS file previously downloaded into EMRM format from EMRM_CSV to DB EMRM Download from IM Opens the Download from IM Wizard C Table Navigation Buttons The navigation buttons pictured below found on the Mission Set Summary Window are used to navigate through the
57. Start Up Window is where you choose to open the Mission Set Summary Window by clicking the B GL 385 010 PT 001 239 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy View Missions button view a tutorial Guided Tour on how to operate the EMRM open the User Manual Online Help file or Quit the EMRM application a The first time the application is executed a pop up dialog box for language selection appears pictured below At this point you select a default language for the application You must select a language in order to use the application The language selection will remain in effect even after shutting down and restarting the EMRM program A Language Selection _ ap if a Language Selection Dialog b If a user decides to change the language selection in a future session the Language Selection Dialog Box can be accessed from the EMRM Start Up Window by clicking the Language Selector option from the Tools Menu EQ EPGS Mission Results Manager File Tools Help o Language Selection The Language Selector Option 240 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator NOTE The best time to change the language selection is at the beginning of a session The Language Selector will not be enabled if any mission results have been previously opened Start Window Button Descriptions pictured below Start Up Window Buttons
58. TSS on the target vehicle Target range position and velocity are determined for subsequent scans and following launch the PPA calculation Range position and velocity are also reported regularly to the instructor as a text overlay on the IM display As tracking commences the GM computer begins to assemble the gunner s tracking performance data NOTE If the GM is tracking for more than 40 seconds prior to trigger press the system exits tracking mode if the REC button is pressed again on the IM the system starts lasing again B GL 385 010 PT 001 TIME 0 Tres Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator GUNNER LOCKING TRIGGER MISSILE AT ACQUIRES LEVER PRESS TARGET TARGET RAISED DISTANCE TA Ts Tr Tres Trezs TR MODULE TIREUR CAMERA ON SCANNING AND TRACKING READ AZM ELEV AND CANT SENSORS TRACKING ASSESSMENT LAUNCH SOUND WEIGHT LOSS SIGHT OBSCURATION CRT DISPLAYS FLIGHT MOTOR WIRE PULL SIMULATION OPERATE FLIGHT EQUATION CRT DISPLAYS HIT ICON INSTRUCTEUR MODULE DVR RECORDING TSV LCD MONITOR DISPLAYS TSW LCD MONITOR DISPLAYS TARGET RANGE AND MOVEMENT LCD MONITOR DISPLAYS MISSION RESULT AND MISSION ANALYSIS COMMENCES DEBRIEF MODE THROUGH SIGHT VIEW 0 Y i TIME OF FLKSHT d Ta Tras Tres LAUNCH Figure 5 9 Operational Mission Sequence Timing Diagram b Launch 1 2 B GL 385 010 PT 001 The gu
59. Target All Values Fields to View Lists 1 Normal View Display the default set of columns The fields are date time rank init name engagement result mission result score BOUCHER BOUCHER BOUCHER BOUCHER BOUCHER BOUCHER BOUCHER BOUCHER mms amm 2 Header Display mission set header information The fields are mission ID mission number date time score mission result French mission valid EPGS import 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 8 8 3 Gunner Instructor Display values related to identification of the mission s Gunner 254 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator and Instructor The fields are mission ID mission number mission result ID gunner name gunner service number gunner initials gunner rank gunner instructor ID instructor surname instructor service number instructor rank instructor initials ese tn enero BOUCHER 58992654 BOUCHER 58932654 BOUCHER 58992654 BOUCHER 58992654 BOUCHER K 58992654 BOUCHER 58992654 BOUCHER K 58992654 BOUCHER K58992654 Select Mission Set fields to view Gunne Instructor 4 Parameter Display values related to the parameters of the Mission Set The fields are mission number mission ID sound weight loss wire pull launch obscuration launch motor fail flight motor fail wire break Leer seed nga
60. Weapon Heavy T EI Figure 3 5 Installing the Battery 22 Mirabel Power Source MPS While the thermal imager dramatically increases the night observation capability of the platoon particularly in defence where the need for OPs is essential this increase comes with a cost An adequate power supply is necessary to enable the Mirabel to operate without interruption all night long The MPS see Figure 3 6 has been designed specifically for this purpose using TCCCS radio batteries as its primary power source MPS characteristics are a dimensions 265 mm high x 265 mm long x 96 mm wide b weight 1 2 14 kg without battery 102 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager 2 4 16 kg with two Lithium batteries and 3 5 76 kg with two Nickel Cadmium batteries operating temperature range 31 C to 51 C batteries batteries and recharger used for the Mirabel Thermal Imager are the same as those used for the TCCCS radio 1 BB 590 U NiCad rechargeable 5 hours of normal operation at 20 C before recharging Session 2 B 5590 U Li non rechargeable 15 hours of normal operation at 20 C and 3 BCE T 201 battery recharger battery selection a rocker type switch see Figure 3 7 allows the user to select either of the two batteries and power cable a 3 foot long modified power cable 1s used to connect the thermal imager to the MPS see Figure 3 7
61. a frontal view No aim point marker 15 displayed b Specific settings related to advanced applications 28 Mission Start By pressing the REC key on the IM keypad the FSS enters into Mission mode The DVR starts recording the gunner s TSV The TSV image is displayed on the IM display screen The system configuration bar and mission status bar are also displayed on the IM display screen If the DVR is not ready when Mission mode is started the message DVR NOT READY PLEASE WAIT is displayed The mission cannot start if any FATAL or NON FATAL failures have been detected by Power on BIT or Status BIT The Mission mode can be exited at any time by pressing ESC to return to MENU mode 29 After the firing order is issued the gunner will start acquiring the target Once the system has detected all the targets and determined which target is the aimed at target the mission status bar will change from LASER to ON NOTE Prior to trigger press the gunner may switch from tracking one target to a different target This will cause a change to calculations and PPA within the firing post If prior to trigger press the aimed at target is lost from view for more than 0 5 seconds it will lose its aimed at status but if the target can be re acquired it will regain its aimed at status 30 Mission Status Once the trigger button is pressed the missile launch sequence starts followed by the missile flight simulati
62. also see the Organizing the Mission Results Table tutorial 6 Scroll Bars The table also contains vertical and horizontal scroll bars They can be used to scroll up and down and left to right to view information not visible in the current view of the table 7 Filtering Missions Filtering the missions allows you to select missions in the table that meet certain criteria By choosing the Filter button d or the Filter option located the Tools menu the Filter Dialog Box will appear From this dialog box you can specify the criteria for your filter including Passed or Failed missions missions of specified score or score range missions with specified parameters and missions by selected gunner instructor time and date For more information also see the Filtering Mission Results in the Open Database tutorial 8 Clear Filter Button Clear Filter will remove any filters that are currently in effect on the open Mission Set restoring display of all records of the Mission Set e Select Mission Set Fields to View Combo Box This provides a pick list to choose group of fields to show in the grid The options view list includes Normal View Header Gunner Instructor Parameter Target and Values Select Mission Set fields to view Norma View Select Mission Set B GL 385 010 PT 001 253 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy yew Normal View Header Inunner Instructor Parameter
63. and confidence in the weapon 26 Confirm by questions 348 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching CONCLUSION PAR Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm all main teaching points by questions and practice e conduct safety precautions d summarize the lesson and stress that 1 the coach must be an expert on all aspects of Eryx gunnery 2 the coach must not harass the gunner by over coaching prior to firing and 3 ETSVCS should be used on every live engagement e forecast the next lesson and f pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 349 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LESSON 5 ERYX THROUGH SIGHT VIDEO CAMERA SYSTEM ETSVCS INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach how to prepare and use ETSVCS The user will be able to operate and maintain the ETSVCS 2 Main Teaching Points a system components overview b ETSVCS installation and start up procedure and battery check and charging procedure 3 Time One 40 minute lesson 4 Method Explanation demonstration and practice using the ETSVCS installed on the EPGS in order to record missions 5 Stores a one EPGS system per section and b one ETSVCS per section 6 Preparation a Confirm that the ETSVCS is operational and ready for use including an 8 mm tape for the ETSVCS tape deck b Confirm adequate space and power including ensuring that the ETSVCS battery is fully charged Install
64. are disconnected from external power before changing the fuse cartridge 20 Power Up To power up EVIGS a verify that the main power switches on the MCA and ICA are set to the OFF position b ensure that the power ON OFF switches of the following elements are set to the position 1 the two MCA computers DOS and UNIX 2 the ICA computer and the two monitors 3 the printer 4 the video disk player and 5 the WPA after being plugged in a power source turn the ICA main power switch ON and check if the power LED 1s lit d wait for the user name prompt 3 to 5 minutes then turn the MCA main power switch ON and check if the power LED 1 lit the right screen of the ICA will turn blue 132 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator NOTE If a component does not come on check that all switches are that no circuit breaker is tripped and that no fuses are blown e connect the WPA wire to the MLA f adjust the height of the WPA wire in accordance with the firing position and or the height of the gunner at this point 4 to 6 minutes the right screen of the ICA should have turned to black with the message Trying to accept type VIGS and press Enter h after the left monitor clears to grey a further minute an hourglass will appear very briefly 1 press and hold the C1 key move the pointer to
65. b System Status bar When not engaged in mission recording or debriefing the IM displays the system status bar at the bottom of the screen This bar has just three fields which display from left to right the currently selected gunner s rank and name FSS error status and power supply status Mission Status At all times while recording training mission in Mission mode or during debriefing Debriefing mode the IM displays the mission status bar at the bottom of the screen This bar has five fields which display from left to right target orientation target speed target range time into mission and system status or score 251 Dedicated Hot Keys As already described in teaching the menu system these keys allow the coach to directly access a particular B GL 385 010 PT 001 221 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy menu or dialogue box and provide a means of directly altering a session parameter through specific function keys as follows 222 b Delete Last Mission menu 63 Gunner Select menu 41 Graph Video switches directly between graph display and video display when in debrief mode Switching to video display freezes the video at the frame indicated by the time scroll bar from graph display This key functions only if there is stored video associated with the mission results In video display mode this key changes to the graph display if the video is paused or stopped If the
66. bar A lower level menu or menu option may be accessed directly using the MENU hot key to input the required menu number on the keypad All sub menus are described in detail in paragraphs 16 to 22 of this lesson 16 The System Management Menu manages the following FSS settings a SET TIME and SET DATE Set using direction keys and ENTER to apply the correct date and time stamp to all training results collected b SET ICON BRIGHTNESS Set the intensity of the PPA cross the missile trace and the Hit and Grounded icons for the ambient light conditions of an exercise TEST LASER This setting causes the lasers scanner to perform a diagnostic search scan to look for targets within the scanner field of view If successful the IM displays the target location range velocity and direction d TEST SYSTEM This setting performs the system configuration check and power on BIT check on demand and results are displayed in the IM SAVE RESULTS TO PC This setting begins the transfer of mission results to a PC via a data cable Once mission results have been transferred to the PC they can be opened in a spreadsheet application for analysis During the transfer the IM displays the B GL 385 010 PT 001 215 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy following message SAVING RESULTS TO and indicates transfer progress by means of a bar display advancing left to right as the transfe
67. battery or rechargeable nickel cadmium NiCad batteries three contacts at the base of the battery It can also be powered by external power sources such as the Mirabel power source MPS see paragraph 22 or by radio or vehicle batteries using an adapter The non rechargeable batteries are used during operations and will give approximately 12 hours of operation in the position under normal operating temperatures of 20 C 5 The rechargeable batteries are used during training and will give approximately 4 hours of operation under normal operating temperatures In weather that is much colder or much hotter the battery life will be reduced Turning the thermal imager to STANDBY when not in use will extend battery life The thermal imager will indicate when a battery is nearly dead by flashing two horizontal white bars in the display approximately 30 seconds before the battery is dead Dead non rechargeable batteries especially lithium batteries must be properly disposed of and must never be placed in a battery recharger as there is a danger of explosion 21 Installing and Removing Batteries Ensure that the thermal imager is turned off then install a battery into the housing with the large end down pushing it firmly to the bottom see Figure 3 5 Before removing a battery ensure that the thermal imager is turned off and simply pull straight up on the battery B GL 385 010 PT 001 101 Eryx Short Range Anti armour
68. be caused by a protrusion on the optical fixture Note that every time the optical fixture 15 rotated the PAL NTSC transcoder U D and L R switches must be changed B GL 385 010 PT 001 357 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy see Figure 6 10 to orient the video image with the actual scene Rotate the ETSVCS optical fixture iris knob to select day or night mode remember that night mode must be used when using the Mirabel Thermal Imager d Position the ETSVCS power supply selection rotary switch to the desired available power source AC DC or BATT see Figure 6 9 e Switch power supply ON OFF switch to ON to power up all ETSVCS sub systems note that the VCR if it was switched off before ETSVCS was last shut down needs to be switched on independently f Switch the PAL NTSC transcoder mode switch to RECORD position see figure 6 10 g Ensure power is h Conduct image adjustment if the ETSVCS display is not similar to Eryx gunner s view as follows 1 if the image is slightly rotated adjust the ETSVCS optical fixture on its rotating axis 2 if the image 15 rotated up and down switch the PAL NTSC transcoder U D rotary switch to the other position see Figure 6 10 and 3 if the image is rotated left and right switch the PAL NTSC transcoder L R rotary switch to the other position see Figure 6 10 1 For VCR replay set the PAL NTSC transcoder mode swi
69. carriers and their NATO 376 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching and non NATO variants In order for LFC to maintain up to date test lists 1 G3 Artillery produces an updated AC identification list each year for G3 Armour 2 G3 Armour distributes an updated AFV and AC identification list each year and 3 G2 produces as operations dictate specific to theatre AFV and AC identification lists d Responsibilities for Identification and Performance Objectives Applicable to Different Occupations and Designated Positions e g for the infantry the AFV Level 2 list is applicable from MCpl to CWO and for all Reconnaissance and Anti Armour Platoon personnel Mortar Fire Controllers and Eryx weapon system teams 12 Identification standards for the infantry 3 identification levels and 2 AC identification levels are as follows a the AFV and AC identification Level 1 lists are applicable to all LFC personnel b the AFV Level 2 list is applicable to 1 MCpl to CWO 2 all Reconnaissance and Anti Armour Platoon personnel 3 mortar fire controllers MFC and 4 Eryx weapon system teams the AC Level 2 list is applicable to 1 Sgt to CWO B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 2 Infantry Platoon commanders 3 all Anti Armour Platoon personnel and 4 mortar fire controllers MFC and d the AFV Level 3 list is applicable to 1 all Reconnais
70. data in the Mission Results Table can also be accessed through the Menu bar Navigation Buttons Mission Set Summary Window First Record Button Jumps to the first mission record in the table 248 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator Previous Record Button Jumps to the previous mission in the table Next Record Button Jumps to the next mission in the table Last Record Button Jumps to the last mission in the table Refresh Mission Set Button Refreshes the mission Set Flag Mission for Deletion Button Adds a red line to Flag for deletion record will be deleted on Close Un flag Mission for Deletion Button Removes the red line to Un Flag record will not be deleted on Close Filter Button Sets the filter conditions for listing the mission set records Clear Filter Button Removes any filters that are currently in effect on the open Mission Set restoring display of all records of the Mission Set Advanced Sort Button Sorts the records in the table according to more than one Key field Statistics Report Button Will calculate a percentage of missions Passed and or Failed based on the missions selected in the Mission Results Table Search Next Button Finds the next Mission that matches the current incremental search entry Set Bookmark Button Creates a bookmark in memory to remember the selected record B GL 385 010 PT 001 249
71. engaged a target with a hit during the previous year can carry on directly with collective training 464 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Appendix 1 of Annex D to Chapter 7 QL DP STANDARDS TO ACHIEVE PREREQUISITES Live Firing 2 PO 205 Gunner Collective training during Eryx qualified concentration at the unit Eryx gunner or missiles for this training will loader depend on what is left over following Live Firing 1 Live Intermediate Firing 1 has ammunition j combat scenario used for collective training to have loaders fire a missile providing prerequisites are respected Eryx detachment exercise bush lane stage 4 within established tactical scenarios enabling the Eryx detachment to challenge the quality of their training and acquired cohesion Scenarios involving the set up of an observation post tank hunting team operation delay or cut off in an ambush are preferable 2 Exercise of the section and up stage 5 Following stage 4 this exercise will allow the integration of sub unit Eryx detachments within every phase of war for almost every kind of operation During this exercise the Eryx detachment may be used for flank protection as part of a fire base during delay operations in an ambush etc B GL 385 010 PT 001 465 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy QL DP E lt Z a lt E un PREREQUISITES DP3A 30 PO 205 gunner l PO
72. firing post is a Class 1 laser device and so it is unconditionally eye safe while in use However do not attempt to disassemble the firing post Do not use the firing post if its casing 15 broken open B GL 385 010 PT 001 197 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions If any weapons are used in class safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review As the components of the EPGS are laid on the ground review their names and functions and the way they work together 10 Introduction Inspection is a thorough physical and mechanical check on equipment condition An inspection shall be carried out immediately prior to use If any item is damaged or dirty refer to the EPGS Operator s Manual C 10 412 000 M B 000 Part 6 The following is the sequence for an efficient inspection INSPECTION Explain and demonstrate 11 Missile Tube Assembly MTA a Check the weights front and rear and verify that both are undamaged Attach the weights to the magnets on the tube ends and verify that they are held firmly by the magnets Remove the weights Full functionality will be confirmed later on with the power on BIT procedure b Check that the wire pull simulation cord and mechanism is clean and undamaged Check that the cord is present untangled and runs freely over the pulley if pulled out gently against the return spring pressure
73. for the written test course package Optical Recognition Level 1 Entrance Test Fire the SRAAW H gunner qualification Describe the SRAAW H the missile Fire the SRAAW H prone position beginner level Fire the SRAAW H kneeling position intermediate level Operate the imager 454 DP 2A ERYX GUNNER QUALIFICATION PO OBJECTIVE REMARKS TIME students and get them jon DP 1 i e SRAAW H thermal Chap 3 Lesson 1 05 Employ thermal 2 Chap3 imager fundamentals Lesson 2 Covering what has been taught 1 period for PO 103 01 to 103 02 and period for PO 103 03 to 103 05 LFCO 21 13 Annex A 5 to 8 students every 15 min on the Intrest trainer with multimedia projector Missile components and Practices conducted on EVIGS IAW 18 Chap4 Lesson 4 14 Chap4 Lesson 5 2 Practices conducted on EVIGS IAW B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex D to Chapter 7 LFCO 21 13 Annex A AFV level 2 A vehicles per 40 min period 8 students per Fire the SRAAW H Practices 14 Chap 4 with the thermal conducted on Lesson 6 EVIGS IAW Chap 4 Lesson 1 10 Operate the EVIGS 2 Chap 4 Lesson 2 Chap 2 Lesson 5 12 Assemble and prepare EPGS 13 JOperate the EPGS Chap 5 Lesson 3 B GL 385 010 PT 001 455 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 14 Conduct EPGS Exercise 1 8d 6n 7 mission with the Chapte
74. he is off the correct point of aim and 4 tracks by moving his torso and not his arms 51 Video Clip Play video clip Coaching Points EVIGS Graphs 328 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching 52 Live Fire Errors EVIGS does not accurately reproduce missile flight dynamics As such the gunner may be surprised by the missile the first time he sees it when firing live 33 The missile appears very prominently in the gunner s sight and the rocket jets are highly visible throughout its flight As a result the gunner can make the following errors a Distraction The gunner can easily be distracted by the missile and have an erratic track of the target b Track the Missile The gunner can place the crosshairs on the missile instead of the target the Missile gunner may see that the missile is not exactly on target and try to give ita correction by moving the crosshairs off the correct point of aim 54 All of the above faults will cause the missile to miss the target At all times the gunner must concentrate on the target and ignore the missile The coach can minimize these errors by familiarizing new gunners with the effects of the missile Through sight video footage of live missile firings using the Eryx Through Sight Video Camera System ETS VCS see Chapter 6 Lesson 5 should be shown repetitively over the course of Eryx training Firing results have to be recorded on the Eryx Firin
75. knee perpendicular to the firing axis 2 has his left foot forward of his left knee and in front of the rear left tripod s leg 3 elbows slightly raised and body weight forward onto the handles and 4 locks his shoulder against the missile tube d Standing Ensure that the gunner 1 has a wide stance 2 tucks his left elbow into the stomach area and 3 hunches his body as compact as possible 49 coach must ensure that the gunner does not flinch when pressing the trigger button He must also ensure that the gunner holds the trigger button throughout the missile flight B GL 385 010 PT 001 327 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 50 Erratic Cruise Phase This is caused by poor tracking To correct it a Tripod Ensure that the gunner 1 keeps his weight on the handles 2 holds the handles as far out as possible 3 tracks by moving his torso and not by pushing or pulling with his arms 4 starts tracking with an extreme wrist rotation on the elevation handle to avoid having to change grip during the missile flight 5 brings the cross hairs gradually to the target if he is off of the correct point of aim and 6 only engages targets within a comfortable tracking arc b Shoulder Ensure that the gunner 1 supports the firing post with the palm of his left hand 2 only engages targets within a comfortable tracking arc 3 brings the crosshairs gradually to the target if
76. may cause internal damage Though it is rugged the weapon system is essentially a computer and must be treated as such CARE AND CLEANING Explain and demonstrate 11 As with any weapon Eryx requires periodic cleaning to ensure operational readiness at all times I2 To clean the firing post a remove all dirt from the exterior surfaces with a damp rag b remove all dirt from cracks and recesses with a paint brush e note any abnormal marks which may indicate internal damage and have the weapon tested on the test set by a qualified technician if in doubt as to its serviceability d pay particular attention to ensure that dirt and debris are removed from the following 1 electrical connector 2 missile indexing slots 3 missile alignment pin recess 4 trigger assembly 5 optical ports and B GL 385 010 PT 001 23 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 6 eye piece e use water and detergent to remove grease and stubborn dirt and f add glycerol to the water to prevent freezing in arctic conditions 13 To clean the optical ports and the eye piece lens a blow loose dust off lens b fold lens paper in half and be careful not to touch the surface to be used e lightly wipe lens surface using circular motion from the centre outward d wet a clean lens paper with lens cleaning liquid to remove grease or stubborn dirt and take extreme care not to scratch the lens surface 14
77. of simulation parameter icons are described below Note that only one icon from each set will be visible in the Simulation Parameters Group Box at atime For example if the sound parameter is ON for a selected mission only the icon representing sound on will be visible DESCRIPTION Sound On represents the presence of sound for the current simulation Sound Off represents the lack of sound for the current simulation PPA represents the Preferred Point of Aim PPA turned on for the current simulation PPA represents the Preferred Point of Aim turned off for the current simulation WL represents Weight Loss turned on for the current simulation WL represents Weight Loss turned off for the current simulation OBSC represents Launch Obscuration turned on for the current simulation OBSC represents Launch Obscuration turned off for the current simulation 258 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator DESCRIPTION Wire Pull represents Wire Pull turned on for the current simulation Wire Pull Wire Pull represents Wire Pull turned off for the current simulation Missile NO Fail No Fail represents no missile Fail failure for the current simulation Missile Launch Launch Motor Fail represents Fail Motor a launch motor failure for the current simulation Flight Motor Fail represents a flight motor failure for the current simulation Miss
78. on the communication link The download could not be continued View the Log file for details Check that port settings on each end match Baud Parity Data and Siop Bits Also check the cable between this system and the EPGS IM is properly connecied Correct any cable or port problems then click Try Again to start over or click Close to close tliis session E Results Log amp Help Brik CTS DSA Error RxD TxD DTRATS oh io 9 Again Close Download Failure Error Message 43 In the event that the download does not work the first time you try click the TRY AGAIN button The download may not work the first time even though the port settings are correct This problem was encountered during testing and it was found that clicking the AGAIN button stabilized the link between the IM and EMRM If this results in another failed communication link adjust the Port Settings by following the procedure detailed in paragraph 33 When using the Download from IM Wizard the following download stopped error message may appear This is a common occurrence any time the download from IM is intentionally halted by the user Even though the download was stopped any mission results transferred up to this point can still be viewed by clicking the RESULTS button unless they are deleted from the IM 282 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulato
79. on the state of the vehicle s suspension Check the base of the TSS for movement If the base moves adjust it and retighten the straps to make the assembly stable During training you should stop the vehicle from time to time to confirm that the TSS assembly remains secure GUNNER TO PC VEHICLE SUPPLY MODULE GM RS232 DATA CABLE USE EWHKS SERIAL DATA POWER CABLE FOR SENDING DATA TO OR FROM LI l INSTRUCTOR MODULE IM MISSILE TUBE JUUNCTION UNIT UMBILICAL CABLE FIRING POST DC POWER CABLE DC POWER CABLE ALTERNATIVE USE CHARGER CONVERTER 110V AC POWER CABLE or 220V AC POWER CABLE Figure 5 10 Schematic of the EPGS FSS Cable Connections B GL 385 010 PT 001 203 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 1 2 13 12 11 BATTERY PACK BLOC BATTERIE 10 CHARGER CONVERTER CHARGEUR CONVERTISSEUR 7 Protection Fuse 6 25 A Charging Inlet Connector 24 V DC Outlet Connector Charging Indicator LED ON OFF Switch Carrying Handle Power ON Indicator LED 27 6 V DC Outlet DC Protection Fuse 6 25 A AC Power ON OFF Switch AC Protection Fuse 3 A AC Power Inlet Connector Vent Screw 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Fusible de protection 6 25 Connecteur d entr e de charge Connecteur de sortie 24 V c c Indicateur DEL de charge Interrupt
80. output connection see sub para d IM Operational Modes There are four modes built into the IM software as follows 1 Menu mode provides a menu system which allows the instructor to control the FSS via the keypad and display 2 Mission mode in which the IM displays the gunner s sight view controls the current mission sequence and gathers mission data 3 Debrief mode in which the IM provides analysis and display of mission data or playback of recorded mission video 4 BIT mode in which the IM uses the menu system to implement Built In Test BIT and diagnostic facilities for the instructor and maintenance technicians B GL 385 010 PT 001 181 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy STK 8000 09 309 4068 EPGS INSTRUCTOR MODULE MOOULE INSTRUCTEUR STPE 117928 PTPO 421 006789 CONTR 5467 456734 SER 00 XXXX DND CANADA STK 8000 09 309 4068 EPGS INSTRUCTOR MODULE MODULE INSTRUCTEUR STPE MFG L17928 PTPO 421 006789 CONTR 67 456 SER 00 XXXX DND CANADA 5 1 Display Screen 1 Ecran du panneau de commande 2 Fuse Video Outlet and RS232 Data 2 Fusible sortie vid o et connecteur Connector de donn es RS232 3 Power Inlet Connector 3 Connecteur d entr e d alimenation lectrique 4 IM GM Cable Connector 4 Connecteur de cable 5 Keypad 5 Clavier Figure 5 4 Instructor Module IM 14 Confirm by questions 15 Charger Converter The Charger Converter see Figur
81. passed the EVIGS gunnery tests for prone and kneeling positions with minimal scores respectively of 8 and 7 out of 10 In conditions where there is a cross wind of 36 km h or greater it is strongly recommended that missiles not be fired B GL 385 010 PT 001 341 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 34 Targets closer than 150 metres shall not be engaged with HEAT rounds In addition an anti fragmentation wall or a trench must be used when firing HEAT 35 Practice missiles shall only be fired at a moving target board 36 HE rounds shall only be fired at hard targets or at the portable moving target system PMTS also known as BADGER 37 The through sight video camera ETSVCS shall be used for every engagement if available 38 An Ammunition Technician must be present or on call during the firing of missiles to dispose of duds and misfires and confirm missile defects for the Eryx Firing Report DND 2053 Annex J 29 misfires shall be reported the Eryx Firing Report DND 2053 Annex J 40 An FCS Technician must be present If a malfunction is believed to be attributable to the firing post the FCS Technician shall test the firing post with the test set 41 missile malfunctions should be reported in accordance with CFAO 71 4 Ammunition Accident Incident Defect and Malfunction Report DND 410 42 Guidance wire should be collected after each range exercise 43 It is imperative that the
82. recharging check the EPGS for serviceability d review the EPGS Operator s Manual C 10 412 000 000 7 Miscellaneous a Equipment Cases Due to its sensitivity EPGS equipment must be transported in its own cases by wheeled vehicle There are two equipment cases for the complete EPGS see Figures 5 1 and 5 2 1 Weight x 2 1 Poids 2 unit s 2 Operator s Manual 2 Manuel de l op rateur 3 Missile Tube Assembly 3 Ensemble Tube Missile 4 Firing Post 4 Poste de tir 5 Tripod 5 Tr pied 6 Case No 1 6 Caisse n 1 Figure 5 1 Case No 1 174 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator 1 2 3 4 1 Instructor Module 6 1 Module instructeur 2 Battery Pack 2 Bloc batteries 3 Charger Converter 3 Chargeur convertisseur 4 Retroreflector Hub amp Base and 4 Moyeu et socle de r tror flecteur Clip On Straps et sangles avec crochets 5 Case No 2 5 Caisse 2 6 Cable Set 6 Jeu de c bles Figure 5 2 Case No 2 b Terminology Terms used by the EPGS Instructor Module are slightly different from that previously taught for Eryx and EVIGS concerning some components of the firing post The safety cover for the Eryx EVIGS is described as a safety flap for the EPGS and the safety catch for the Eryx EVIGS is described as a locking lever for the EPGS Every instructor monitor must be aware of the wording differences and terms for Eryx EVIGS must be used CONDUCT OF THE
83. safety catch is engaged and the thermal imager power switch is at STAND BY Repeat LOAD Repeat LOAD The rest of this sequence and those following is as taught unless Stated otherwise On the word of command TARGET followed by a target indication ACTION BY GUNNER ACTION BY LOADER Flip the thermal imager power Check backblast area and switch to ON and raise the report BACKBLAST lens cover AREA CLEAR Disengage the safety catch move the safety cover aside and put thumb on the trigger button Report ON On the word of command FIRE ACTION BY GUNNER ACTION BY LOADER Press the trigger button and hold it down 108 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager On the word of command UNLOAD ACTION BY GUNNER ACTION BY LOADER Close the safety cover engage the safety catch depress the missile locking lever and repeat UNLOAD Repeat UNLOAD Flip the thermal imager power Remove the empty missile switch to STAND BY and tube from the firing post close the lens cover and report CLEAR Repeat CLEAR and report ERYX READY 92 Confirm by questions and practice MAINTENANCE OF THE THERMAL IMAGER Explain 33 There is very little operator maintenance required for the thermal imager exterior surfaces should be inspected for dents and cracks The rubber cover on the toggle switch should be inspected for tears There are no repairs that the opera
84. set the ON OFF switch on the Charger Converter to ON Check that the Charger Converter power indicator is illuminated If the Battery Pack is used to power the FSS set the Battery Pack switch to On the IM keypad check that the power indicator is green and press the ON key If the supply voltage from the battery is too high or too low the IM will display a bilingual warning message indicating the status of the battery and that the EPGS will power off B GL 385 010 PT 001 205 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 27 Language Selection After a successful power on the FSS requests a choice of language English or French for IM message display during the session This only occurs the first time the IM is powered up following the power supply being switched on Select the required language using the up and down v keys then press the ENTER key 28 System Configuration Check After language selection the FSS performs a system configuration check This determines that all major components are fitted and have software version compatibility for correct operation If a connection or configuration error is detected a message is displayed indicating the source of the error and the corrective action to be taken 29 Confirm by questions and practice AUTOMATIC POWER ON BIT BUILT IN TEST Explain and demonstrate 30 The power on BIT is a semi automatic test procedure
85. set to BEGINNER unless otherwise stated under COMMENTS Tripods should be set up on a non slip surface 7 Miscellaneous On average four students per simulator complete ten engagements each during a 40 minute lesson More time must be allocated if more than four students are training on one simulator B GL 385 010 PT 001 151 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions Safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 Remind students that they must ensure that the weights fall into the baskets 9 Review Emphasize the correct points of aim for static moving targets 10 Introduction Explain The following missions are intended to develop prone gunnery skills To progress to firing from the kneeling position the gunner must pass the Prone Test detailed in Chapter 7 Annex B Appendix 1 CROSSING TARGETS LEFT TO RIGHT Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS disable WS WL disable wire pull no launch obscuration flip mission disable wire pull no launch obscuration disable wire pull flip mission disable wire pull disable wire pull 152 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator CROSSING TARGETS RIGHT TO LEFT Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK COMMENTS disable WS WL disable wire pull flip mission no launch o
86. shield along the missile missile grounds 33 Confirm by questions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND CONSIDERATIONS Explain demonstrate and practice 34 Due to the danger to troops from recoilless weapons safety must be emphasized during all phases of training To establish correct procedures all drills must be conducted as though live missiles were being fired 35 Safety Precautions The firing post and missile will be checked a before and after instruction b before cleaning during issue and return to stores d before and after a range practice and e whenever safety 1 doubt 36 On the command PREPARE FOR INSPECTION the gunner shall a ensure that there is no missile on the firing post b verify that missiles are of the correct type by 1 examining the markings on the missile tube or B GL 385 010 PT 001 27 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 37 28 2 checking that a hole is drilled through the tubes of dummy rounds and report ERYX CLEAR Backblast Explain The backblast danger area 1 composed of two zones see Figure 2 5 a b Danger zone restricted for all personnel Caution zone restricted for unprotected personnel hearing protection helmet and combat clothing are required To prevent any injury to personnel i e gunner loader and Assistant Range Safety Officer ARSO from any possible missile dysfunction related to the launch motor a ball
87. straps as follows a retroreflector head check that the prisms are not cracked or scratched b straps examine the straps for cuts chafing and damage to clip buckles and base assembly examine for corrosion cracks impact damage and distortion and check that the locking pip pin is straight 19 Outer Surfaces all items Examine for evidence of corrosion scratches cracks delamination impact damage distortion and contamination by oil and grease Check that all surface installed items latches indicators displays switches connectors etc are securely fixed and that all panel etchings identification and safety 200 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator labels are present and legible Refer to C 10 412 000 MB 000 Figures 2 1 to 2 7 for label locations 20 Cables Examine for evidence of cuts crush marks chafing cracks or perished insulation dirt oil and grease Check that the identification sleeve markings are legible and that the connectors inside receptors and pins are clean with no signs of damage misalignment corrosion moisture or foreign matter 21 Equipment Cases Check that the two cases and lids are clean and show no distortion or impact damage Check that the clasps are present and show no distortion Check that the rubber lid seals are present and complete from end to end 22 Confirm by questions FSS AND TSS SET UP PROCEDURES Explain and demo
88. surfaces of the engine and its surrounding compartment Since engine compartment temperatures can reach up to 100 C the surface of these compartments radiate highly visible IR signatures Personnel heaters will heat up the entire volume of the target and engine exhaust pipes and mufflers will also give off large IR signatures Since these sources of energy are very hot and intense features will appear diffuse and blob like in a thermal imager 21 A well trained gunner however can gain much information from these cues They are very hot and therefore can be detected at very long range From the engine and exhaust cues the gunner should be able to determine whether it is a front or rear engine and on what side of the vehicle the exhaust is located This could enable the gunner to determine the type of vehicle 22 Frictional Heat The moving parts of vehicles produce frictional heat This heat is less intense than the high temperatures resulting from engine combustion Frictional heat is generated only by a moving vehicle and will only be evident while it is moving or for a short time after stopping This heating usually provides sufficient temperatures and recognition cues at fairly long ranges but will appear at medium intensity in the thermal imager It is usually the transport systems that generate this frictional heat Tracks road wheels drive sprockets support rollers and shock absorbers are the features heated on tracked vehicles
89. system performs several significant functions during the period from trigger press to missile launch The entire sequence takes approximately one second 1 000 milliseconds TIME DURATION msec msec ACION Firing signal activated by trigger button Interlock unit ignition 5 Localization The Eryx weapon system uses two charge couple device CCD cameras to locate or localize the missile once in flight The weapon initially scans for the beacon using the wide field of view camera Once the weapon gains control of the missile and brings it close enough to the line of sight it toggles to the narrow field of view camera to minimize the possibility of enemy jamming see Figure 1 1 4 B GL 385 010 PT 001 General Information and Teaching Methods 4 230 mils MEL 115 mils 30 mils 15 mils T E Narrow Field of view Wide Field of view Figure 1 1 Fields of View ORGANIZATION OF INSTRUCTION 6 Lessons and simulator practice periods are best taught and practiced in the sequence presented in this manual which supports the proposed timetable in DP 1 to DP 3A training plans Each lesson corresponds to the Performance and Enabling Objectives PO EO used to instruct SRAAW H skills and knowledge on current courses d Gunnery training shall be conducted according to the progressive levels outlined in Chapter 7 Lessons 3 4 5 and 6 of Chapter 4 follow each other in order to ensure the progres
90. system status bar at the top of the screen 18 The Instructor ID Menu provides facilities to select add or remove instructors to from a list of available instructors stored in the IM memory Use the UP and DOWN direction keys to highlight 216 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator the required option Press ENTER to select the highlighted option or ESC to cancel the operation The SELECT INSTRUCTOR or REMOVE INSTRUCTOR options display the current list The ADD INSTRUCTOR option displays data entry fields for entering the instructor s surname initials service number and rank 19 The Gunner ID menu provides the same facilities as the Instructor ID menu and works exactly the same 20 The Mission Settings menu has facilities for setting up EPGS behaviour target characteristics and mission conduct for the next or future missions This includes listing the current system settings reversion to the built in default settings imposition of simulated weapon faults selection of firing position target aspect and target masking aim point marker display and selection of multiple targets a LIST ALL SETTINGS This displays the current system settings in the form of an information box b RESET DEFAULTS This restores the system default settings verified by an ARE YOU SURE PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE PRESS ESCAPE TO CANCEL request for confirmation Press ENTER to res
91. the missile once it has been guided to the line of sight thereby reducing the possibility of jamming and c sight window has a magnifying power of 3 and 3 sight protective plug b Main Assembly consisting of 16 B GL 385 010 PT 001 1 2 3 4 Lesson Plans Eryx firing post electronics FPE all electronics other than those of the SLG left hand handle used when firing from the shoulder maintenance cover can be removed to make the weapon inoperable and eye piece supports and shields the eye while looking through the sight Junction Assembly consisting of 1 2 3 4 5 Junction unit provides the mechanical and electrical connections between the missile and the firing post Missile indexing slots guide the missile tube in place by means of the missile tube guide pins Electrical connectors and cover provide the electrical and electronic connections between the missile and the firing post Missile locking lever secures and releases the missile tube from the firing post Safety cover a In the closed position physically protects the trigger button and prevents through a switch an electromagnetic field triggering the system b In the open position the safety cover closes the electrical ignition circuit from the trigger button to B GL 385 010 PT 001 17 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 6 7 5 9 18
92. to confirm correct operation consisting of set up prompts automatic electrical tests prompted manual actions and manual observations If the FSS 15 already powered up and start up procedures done properly select menu 15 and press ENTER to start The IM screen displays the initial set up requirements for the power on BIT and prompts the operator to continue Set up the starting requirements if they are not already done during the start up procedures Attach the wire pull cord to the front weight before continuing Press ENTER to continue On continuing observe the IM display Do not touch the keypad while the BIT is in progress Do not move the firing post or tripod and protect it from wind gusts while the BIT is in progress If the position sensors pass their self test they are calibrated as part of BIT The power on BIT is performed in three stages as follows a IM BIT These are dynamic tests of internal components of the IM require no operator intervention or observation and produce no visible output b Firing Post BIT During this sequence the firing post internal cooling fan should be audible This sequence comprises dynamic tests of internal and external firing post components and requires the 206 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator operator to do visual checks during the CRT test a box with a cross inside should be displayed for 5 seconds in the gunner s eyepie
93. to switch from Graph display to Video display for a mission without any recorded video the warning message NO MISSION VIDEO STORED 1 displayed over the GRAPH display for 5 seconds If Debrief mode is entered automatically following a mission then on exit from Debrief mode the MISSION SETTINGS menu 1 accessed and displayed Otherwise if Debrief mode is entered from any other menu by using menu 61 or menu 62 the IM system will return to this other menu after the debrief 39 Confirm by questions and practice SLEEP MODE Explain and demonstrate 40 While the FSS is powered on and in Menu mode the IM enters Sleep mode automatically after a period of 30 seconds has elapsed since the last keypad input from the coach In this state all major FSS functions are powered off to conserve battery power including the IM display The coach can press the key on the keypad to wake up the FSS 4 Confirm by questions and practice CONCLUSION 42 Conclude the lesson a Take questions from the class b Confirm all MTPs by questions and practice C Conduct safety precautions d Summarize the lesson and stress the following 1 What preliminary operations are required for the FSS to become operational 2 What are the sub menus of the IM menu system B GL 385 010 PT 001 224 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 228 3 When must the correct target aspect be selected on the target aspect su
94. to view This will highlight or select it You can select more than one result up to 10 to open by holding down the CTRL key From the File Menu select the Open Selected Mission Detail s option This will open the detailed result windows for all of the mission result s highlighted in the table b Method 2 1 2 In the Mission Results Table select the mission s you wish to open by clicking on it Holding the CTRL key on the keyboard will allow you to select more missions When you have selected all the missions to view a detailed view with the CTRL key still pressed double click on one of the highlighted missions This will open all the selected missions in multiple Detailed Mission Result Windows B GL 385 010 PT 001 285 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 48 View Edit Comments Explain and demonstrate You add comments or edit existing comments to any mission result in the Mission Result Table These comments will be added to and printed with any mission result To add comments or edit existing comments follow the steps listed below 49 CONCLUSION 50 286 Select a mission result s from the table Open the result in a Detailed Mission Result Window to open on the file Menu select the Open Selected Mission Detail s option Maximize the Detailed Window and select the VIEW EDIT COMMENTS button The View Edit Comments dialog b
95. tripod according to the coach s assessment of the student s progress Obviously the gunner must be used to tracking without tripod prior to commencing the kneeling test 438 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy APPENDIX 1 TO ANNEX B PRONE TEST SN RANK NAME INIT DATE 1 All missions are fired at the Beginner level of the Mission Parameters window 2 A passing grade is assigned if at least 8 10 graphs pass the minimum standards m MISSION TARGET COMMENTS GRAPHS PASS FAIL PASS FAIL B GL 385 010 PT 001 439 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy APPENDIX 2 TO ANNEX B KNEELING TEST SN RANK NAME INIT DATE 1 missions are fired at the Intermediate Level of the Mission Parameters window 2 A passing grade is assigned if at least 7 10 graphs pass the minimum standards DISK GRAPHS PASS FAIL XLR without tripod 14 XRL without tripod T XIR 019 T 72 165 XRL without tripod with tripod with tripod with tripod 03 8 TARGET RANGE COMMENTS without tripod 028 72 165 ORL flip msn with tripod B GL 385 010 PT 001 44 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy APPENDIX 3 TO ANNEX B THERMAL IMAGER MIRABEL TEST 11111 SN RANK NAME INIT DATE 1 All missions are fired at the Advanced Level of the Mission Parameters window and
96. up to 600 metres The instructor should commit a specific terminology to memory and avoid using jargon or odd expressions The Intrest trainer comes with a useful set of terminology Even if an instructor knows his subject by heart without the use of a demonstration board and without using the six principles of instruction the lesson will be nothing more than a simple lecture without much interest Training aids are as varied as they are numerous and an instructor is limited only by imagination e g a scale models Miltra b various publications such as Janes 35 mm slides d film video e Internet and f the Intrest training system Forecast the next lesson f Pack kit 386 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX A MAIN POINTS OF LESSON 7 POWERPOINT PRESENTATION PREPARE A LESSON ON AFV AC IDENTIFICATION TEACHING POINTS 1 AFV AC identification standards 2 Teaching methods 3 Training aids LFCO 21 13 Training responsibilities Definitions used in identification training Test composition Responsibilities for identification and performance objectives applicable to various military groups and designated positions B GL 385 010 PT 001 387 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy IDENTIFICATION STANDARDS FOR THE INFANTRY 1 There are 3 identification levels for AFV 2 There are 2 identification levels for AC
97. weapon system operates in the same manner during the day as during darkness or periods of reduced visibility The infrared beacon on the rear of the missile operates in a wavelength from 8 to 12 um micron that is visible to the wide and narrow field of view thermal imager cameras on either side of the optics B GL 385 010 PT 001 97 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy BATTERY INFRARED LENS CONTROLS TOGGLE FASTENER Figure 3 1 The Mirabel Thermal Imager 14 Function of the Mirabel Thermal Imager See Figure 3 2 Infrared IR energy enters the front of the thermal imager through a large lens made of Germanium The IR energy then travels to the scanner unit where it is reflected off mirrors that oscillate both horizontally and vertically This energy is then projected onto an array of cooled detectors which sense the minute differences in IR energy The detectors resolve or convert these energy readings into an electronic signal which is then amplified This signal then goes to the video display unit where the electronic signal is displayed on a bank of light emitting diodes LEDs as an actual video picture This picture then passes through a series of lenses and mirrors enters the normal three power optics of the firing post and is magnified to the proper size in the eyepiece 98 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager gt Ow SCANNER UNIT ELECTRONIC POWER amp AMP
98. will be executed repeatedly 21 Confirm by questions and practice NOTE The remainder of the lesson plan consists of notes on the function of each window The instructor should walk the class through the sequence of operation and describe each window as detailed below SYSTEM MANAGEMENT 22 This set of windows consists of functions used at the start of an EVIGS training session B GL 385 010 PT 001 139 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy a System Parameters Displays the system time and date and allows the user to adjust them b Diagnostics Tests and calibrates the system at power up 1 Calibrate Positioning System Calibrates the three gyroscopes inside the missile tube These gyroscopes are used to determine the orientation of the firing post a Calibration MUST be completed at the start of every training session b There can be no movement in and around the system during calibration Vibrations induced by talking and walking can affect the calibration If this occurs a message indicating an error will appear directing that calibration be re attempted c Do not perform the cross coupling calibration This is only carried out after maintenance on the system 2 Test Trigger Button Tests the serviceability of the trigger button 3 Test WS WL Tests the weight shift weight loss system 4 Test Printer Tests the printer 23 Confirm by questions and practice 140 B GL 385 010 PT
99. 0 150 A 11 285 90 72 A 12 310 T 80 tet XLR 13 A 320 Cougar XLR 15 335 T 80 tet XLR 18 A 360 Coyote XLR 20 A 385 72 XLR 22 390 72 XRL 23 P 400 290 T 72 A 25 350 M113 XRL A G 28 A 455 Cougar XLR 20 A 490 250 Coyote ORL B GL 385 010 PT 001 171 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CHAPTER 5 LESSON PLANS ERYX PRECISION GUNNERY SIMULATOR EPGS LESSON 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EPGS SYSTEM INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach the components and particulars of the EPGS to ensure proper operation The user will be able to unpack the EPGS and describe each part of the system and their functions 2 Main Teaching Points a description of equipment b capabilities and limitations e operational mission sequence and d technical data 3 Time Two 40 minute lessons 4 Method Explanation demonstration and practice which is the best way to introduce a new system as it confirms ability through hands on practice 5 Stores a one EPGS system complete per section b one tripod per section and references 6 Preparation B GL 385 010 PT 001 173 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy a confirm that the two EPGS boxes are complete as per checklist and displayed in the classroom with covers on and ready to be used by the instructor b confirm that adequate space and power outlets are available for EPGS training and EPGS battery
100. 0 5m Figure 5 4 AVGP Cougar 300 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 5 LEOPARD MBT TARGET PROFILE AND MASKING LEVELS HIGH MED LOW mm Figure 5B 5 Leopard B GL 385 010 PT 001 301 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy COYOTE AND LAV III TARGET PROFILE AND MASKING LEVELS Figure 5B 6 LAV APC Coyote LAV III 302 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 5 BV 206 TAC TARGET PROFILE AND MASKING LEVELS MED 3 I 0 98m LOW 0 43m Figure 5B 7 TAC BV206 B GL 385 010 PT 001 303 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LSVW TARGET PROFILE AND MASKING LEVELS LOW LOW Figure 5B 8 LSVW 304 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CHAPTER 6 LESSON PLANS COACHING LESSON 1 TECHNICAL INFORMATION INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach the technical aspects of the Eryx weapon system to enable the instructor to train gunners more effectively 2 Main Teaching Points a point of aim b thrust stopping device warheads d EVIGS and EPGS 3 Time Two 40 minute lessons 4 Method Explanation and demonstration Stores a one Eryx weapon system b one dummy missile one simulator EVIGS EPGS d one missile cut away 6 Preparation The instructor should a check the weapon for serviceability B GL 3
101. 1 At the start of the Second World War the only weapons generally capable of defeating tanks were other tanks and artillery field guns Siting field guns well forward to cover likely tank approaches took them away from their primary role Specialized antitank weapons both one man infantry weapons and crew served antitank guns thus were developed throughout the war some of the most notable being the British 17 pounder and the American Bazooka 12 Following these developments came recoilless rifles 75 mm 106 mm guided missiles SS 11 and 3 Sagger and numerous one man weapons 3 2 Rocket RPG 7 and Carl Gustaf 13 Antitank tactics have also evolved greatly over the years Current doctrine dictates that we engage tanks in different range bands Long range anti armour weapons LRAAWSs such as TOW and AT 5 Spandrel are used to engage targets from 2 000 m to 5 000 m Medium range anti armour weapons MRAAWs such as MILAN and AT 4 Spigot engage from 500 m to 2 000 m Short range anti armour weapons SRAAWS such as Gustaf and RPG 18 engage at ranges up to 600 m 14 SRAAWs have various penetration capabilities and are divided into three categories heavy H medium and light L Examples of SRAAW H s are Eryx and Dragon SRAAW M s include the Panzerfaust and the RPG 16 and SRAAW L s include the B GL 385 010 PT 001 11 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy M 72 and the RPG 7 Only SRAAW
102. 85 010 PT 001 305 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy b place the simulator so that students can see the graphics on the screen and place the weapon and the cutaway front of the class 7 Special Considerations Much of the information in this lesson is technical and the material should be reviewed periodically to ensure comprehension The use of drawings or other visual aids will increase understanding Subjects like missile path launching and cruising phases target modelling and ecartometry fields are all linked together and often need to be explained with visual training aids CONDUCT OF TTHE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions Conduct safety precautions as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review Weapon Description and Weapon Operation in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 10 Introduction Explain The aim of this lesson is to describe some of the more technically complex aspects of the weapon system Knowledge of this material will better enable instructors to teach gunnery techniques to their students POINT OF AIM Explain and demonstrate using Annexes B C and D and aiming aids sliding 11 Missile Flight Performance Graphs that depict the distance and velocity of the Eryx missile after launch as a function of time are at Annex B to this chapter 12 Missile Flight Path The weight shift and weight loss due to missile launch creates a series of significant jerks which must be abs
103. 9 LESSON6 FIRE THERMAL IMAGER PRACTICES 160 Instructors NOIE ce qute een ovs satan tenet 160 161 162 Crossing Targets Left to 162 Crossing Targets Right to 2 2 162 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Oblique Targets Left to 22 163 Oblique Targets Right to 0 22 163 163 Em 163 EVIGS MISSION DESCRIPTIONS 165 ANNEX B EVIGS IR MISSION DESCRIPTIONS 169 CHAPTER5 LESSON PLANS ERYX PRECISION GUNNERY SIMULATOR EPGS LESSON 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EPGS SYSTEM 173 MIS MUCTOR m 173 Conduct oine tende 175 DE SCHDLUODS NE NN M CMM UE 176 Capabilities and Limitations s eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 188 Operational Mission Sequence csssssseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 189 Technical Data 194 195 LESSON2 PREPARE EPGS FOR 5 196 No S 196 Conductor the 55 198 1 E 198 FSS and TSS Set up 402 201 Start Up
104. A COMPUTER DRAWER CONNECTORS Figure 4 2 Instructor Case Assembly ICA 126 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator FRONT WEIGHT ASSEMBLY FIRING SIGHT ASSEMBLY d REAR WEIGHT ASSEMBLY GUNNER HANDLE TRIPOD ASSEMBLY MISSILE TUBE ASSEMBLY DIMENSIONS HEIGHT 48 3 em 19 in WIDTH 58 4 cm 23 DEPTH 129 5 cm 51 TOTAL WEIGHT 11 8 kg 26 lbs without Front ar Rear Weights 21 8 kg 48 lbs with Front and Rear Weights Figure 4 3 Missile Launch Assembly MLA WIRE FRICTION GUIDE ASSEMBLY ADJUSTING SCREW ACCESS PANEL WIREPULL BASE SOLENOID PLUNGER PULLEY HANDLE Figure 4 4 Wire Pull Assembly WPA Base 17 Assemble Set up requires no special tools and be completed in minutes To assemble the EVIGS see Figures 4 5 and 4 6 B GL 385 010 PT 001 127 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy a using the AO3050 9476206 cable connect the P4 MCA plug to the J4 receptacle on the MCA and the P2 ICA plug to the J2 receptacle on the ICA CAUTION No cable or component should ever be forced during assembly b place the printer the MCA using the AO3080 9476212 cable connect the P3 ICA plug to the J3 receptacle on the ICA and the D type plug to the rear of the printer place the keyboard in front of the ICA and plug its cables into the receptacles under the left monitor do not plug the keyboard into the front
105. B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator Stop Stop button to stop the transmission Exi Exit button to return to Mission Set Summary Screen without generating a new Mission Set 35 Step 3 While the mission results are being transmitted Step 3 of the download Wizard pictured below is displayed Note the status of the download is displayed in the middle of the information box At this point wait for the transmission of mission results to complete The buttons found on step of the Wizard are listed below 25 Download EPGS File Mission Help Results a Step 3 Receiving Mission EPGS to Please wait for transmission to complete Ld Downloading to Mission Results file C Program Files DONDE MAM v2 0 Alpha 10 ownloaded from Number of blocks received 12 Number of bytes received fel Elapsed download time 0 06 Log Erk CTS DCO OSA Error RxD TxD co o o oe L Log button to read the log file for download status 99 information Help button to open the context sensitive help for the active Window B GL 385 010 PT 001 275 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Stop button to stop the transmission Exit button to return to Mission Set Summary Screen without generating a new Mission Set 36 Step 4 This step of the Download from IM Wizard pictured below is displayed when the transmis
106. B GL 385 010 PT 001 103 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy A Batteries 2 B Case battery assembly C Battery box adapter D Battery connectors assembly E Battery box cover F Battery adapter and power cable Figure 3 6 Mirabel Power Source MPS Parts A Mirabel Thermal Imager B Battery adapter C Power cable D Connector 3 pin and receptacle E Switch rocker type F Case battery assembly Figure 3 7 MPS Connection 104 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager 23 Confirm by questions and practice OPERATING THE THERMAL IMAGER Explain demonstrate and practice 24 On Off Standby Switch power switch is three position toggle switch located on top of the thermal imager near the back see Figure 3 8 25 Turning on the Thermal Imager Once a battery has been placed in the battery housing flip the toggle switch to the STANDBY position This will start the pump which circulates coolant through the thermal imager It will not be possible to get a thermal picture until the unit has cooled down In normal operating temperatures of 20 C 5 this initial cooling down process will take approximately 5 minutes In much hotter or colder weather it will take longer up to approximately 9 minutes at 31 C or 51 Once the initial cooling process is accomplished the sound of the pump will noticeably decrease The switch can now be flipped to the position and
107. BLE AND PACK UP Explain demonstrate and practice 26 Prior to disassembly the video disk must be removed from the player to avoid damage This must be done while the system 1s operating This operation can be done from the Main Window by selecting Mission Setup then Select Mission s and Change Video Disk 27 The EVIGS is disassembled in the exact opposite order to assembly Care must be taken to ensure that no component or connection is forced into the case and that the cables are not kinked when packed up 28 EVIGS should be maintained in the same manner as any other computer system Care must be taken to avoid scratching screens and optical surfaces 134 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator 29 Every EVIGS comes complete with an Operator s Manual This manual should be consulted whenever in doubt of any procedure 30 Confirm by questions and practice CONCLUSION 31 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm all main teaching points by questions and practice conduct safety precautions d summarize the lesson and stress that 1 the EVIGS should never be used outside a classroom or any dry enclosed place used as a classroom 2 the correct sequences for power up and power down must always be followed and 3 no component or cable should ever be forced during assembly or disassembly e forecast the next lesson and f
108. Coaching 17 Emphasize The gunner should be given the opportunity to dry track the target prior to firing to get a feel for target speed and range He must identify his engagement arcs and be comfortable with his fire position 18 Over Coaching Emphasize The instructor must be careful to avoid overwhelming the gunner with too much information just prior to firing Above all else the gunner must be calm and confident No coaching is better than over coaching 19 Confirm by questions COACHING AFTER FIRING Explain 20 Most gunners will be very excited after firing an Eryx missile After only a few minutes they will likely not be able to recall much of what happened To maximize the gunner s recollection of the engagement the instructor should ask the following questions a did he observe any launch obscuration from the missile or smoke b did he experience any heat flash from the flight motor was the noise level as high as he expected d did he feel the wire pull e was he distracted by the missile in flight and f was there anything specific about the engagement that he did not expect 2 Eryx Through Sight Video Camera System ETSVCS Explain and demonstrate ETSVCS see Chapter 6 Lesson 5 is an excellent debrief tool and should always be used on the range The gunner should be shown the footage of his engagement as soon as possible after it occurred In the case of a missed target the cause should
109. Confirm by questions FIRE CONTROL Explain 15 Fire control 1 essential not only to ensure that the enemy 1 destroyed but also to prevent fratricide This is increasingly more important due to the appearance on the battlefield of thermal imagers and other night observation devices since positive identification of enemy versus friendly vehicles is much more difficult with such equipment Overcoming these difficulties can be accomplished by good understanding of the tactical situation and prompt passage of information gained from all surveillance and target acquisition systems 16 While Eryx siting should be co ordinated at the highest level possible fire control should be delegated down to the lowest level 1 e the soldier with the weapon 17 Confirm by questions ERYX DEFENSIVE TASKS Taught at DP 1 from paragraph 19 to 21 inclusive Explain 18 Within the defensive battle Eryx can have the following tasks a As Part of a Covering Force Eryx is not suitable for employment as part of a covering force in open terrain If however the terrain is mixed or close country and the enemy armoured threat is small Eryx may be used as part of a covering force The team should have good covered withdrawal routes and be able to disengage easily B GL 385 010 PT 001 83 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 19 84 b Provide Direct Anti Armour Fire into a KZ Eryx can provide the main tank killing asset for a sub
110. DB 7 IN DEBRIEF MODE SWITCHES og BETWEEN GRAPHIC DISPLAY OBFUSCATION DURATION pes SELECT ET TARGET TYPE SELECT POINT MARKER DISPLAY H TARGET MARKING SELECT QUICK ACCESS TO OTHER MENUS m ESCAPE Figure 5 12 Controls and Indicators Instructor Module Keypad 14 While entering or editing data the LEFT and RIGHT direction keys are used to move forward or backward through the data field without modifying the data No means have been provided to delete or insert new characters into a data field New characters overwrite existing characters The SHIFT key used with 0 enters a space character While entering or editing data the SHIFT key can be held down continuously while entering a full data field The maximum number of characters which can be entered a given data 214 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator field is determined by the width of the data field as displayed on the IM Display 15 Main Menu Explain and demonstrate The main menu provides access to sub menus which allow management of the firing system input of the instructor s and gunner s ID set up and management of training missions and maintenance of the firing system All menus and menu options in the menu system have unique names They also have unique numbers which allow selection by numeric input on the keypad as an alternative to using the highlight
111. EADY Check backblast area and report BACKBLAST AREA CLEAR The coach gives the order FIRE Press the trigger button and hold it down The coach gives the order WEAPON FAILS TO FIRE Report MISFIRE KEEP TRIGGER PRESSED and continue to track the target Repeat MISFIRE Check to ensure that the missile is loaded properly Recheck back blast and report BACK BLAST AREA CLEAR 432 B GL 385 010 PT 001 ACTION GUNNER Release the trigger button close the safety cover engage the safety catch disengage the safety catch open the safety cover and press the trigger button Annex A to Chapter 7 ACTION BY LOADER 5 coach gives the order WEAPON FAILS TO FIRE Report MISFIRE Keep weapon pointed downrange for one minute The trigger must be pressed throughout the one minute duration Release trigger button close the safety cover and engage the safety catch Report SAFETY ON Leave the weapon to the left and wait 30 minutes Repeat MISFIRE Repeat SAFETY ON Leave weapon to the right and wait 30 minutes 6 The coach gives the order 30 MINUTES HAVE PASSED Confirm that the safety catch is engaged and press the missile locking lever Order UNLOAD Repeat CLEAR Replace the sight protective plug and report ERYX READY Repeat UNLOAD Remove the missile from the firing post and report CLEAR
112. ENDIX 1 PRONE TEST 439 APPENDIX 2 KNEELING TEST 44 APPENDIX3 THERMAL IMAGER MIRABEL TEST 443 ANNEX C EPGS TRAINING STANDARDS Tranne Eod sae 445 AC COS doce cae bod 446 ES LA OO 446 Planning Considerations 447 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy APPENDIX 1 EPGS TRACKING EXERCISES Gunner Tramite BXOECISG anea 449 Instructor Training Exercise seen 449 APPENDIX 2 EPGS MISSION RESULTS 45 ANNEX D GUIDELINES FOR ERYX TRAINING PLAN FROM DP 1 TO DP 453 APPENDIX1 ERYX TRAINING POLICY OUTLINE 461 APPENDIX2 TO ANNEX D ERYX THERMAL AFV RECOGNITION IDENTIFICATION VBC THERMIQUE Fiche d valuation Evaluation Sheet 467 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LIST OF FIGURES Foie IST Fields Of VIe 5 251 Parts on metit 15 Figure 2 2 Parts of the Firing Post Front 19 Figure 2 3 Parts of the Firing Post Rear 20 Figure 2 4 Parts or the 22 Figure 2 5 Backblast Danger 20 Figure 2 6 Extended Caution Zone for HEAT Missile
113. FAIL CHEC PASS R USSITE Pass mark is 24 30 La note de passage est de 24 30 Instructor s remarks Remarques de l instructeur 468 B GL 385 010 PT 001
114. FIRMATION OF STAGE 2 PO EO 403 01A REF A LFCO 21 13 PREPARE A LESSON ON AFV AC IDENTIFICATION TEACHING POINTS 1 AFV AC identification standards 2 Teaching methods 3 Training aids 394 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 6 TRAINING AIDS Scale models Miltra Various publications Jane s etc 35 mm slides Films video etc Internet Intrest training system TRAINING AIDS Scale models Miltra Advantages a may be viewed with the C7 sight binoculars and the TOW optical sight can be taught anywhere Several may be taught in a single lesson all sides are shown the most important details are shown a great deal of participation can be generated B GL 385 010 PT 001 395 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy TRAINING AIDS 1 Scale models Miltra Disadvantages a thermal training cannot be conducted b thenumber of AFVs available is limited c scale models are quite expensive TRAINING AIDS Slides Advantages thermal training can be conducted they are inexpensive they are available in large quantities and all sides of the AFVs and AC can be shown all aircrafts are available 396 B GL 385 010 PT 001 1 Annex to Chapter 6 TRAINING AIDS Slides Disadvantages a the environment must be suitable b many AFVs and AC are shown at unrealistic distances and views compared to battlefield situations TRAINING AIDS Intrest reco
115. In order to achieve the greatest number of hits the point of aim is located on the lowest visible part of the target for engagements at a range of 100 metres or less 18 Elevation The missile generally flies slightly above the line of sight throughout its flight depending on the smoothness of the tracking For this reason it is important to ignore the turret of an armoured vehicle and avoid using the area where the turret joins the hull when selecting the point of aim unless only the turret is visible Selecting a point of aim that is too high on a vehicle has a small chance of resulting in a missile that flies over the target Choosing a point that is too low will result in missiles grounding out The point of aim is in reality the mean point of impact for a large number of missiles fired at a target Most missiles will strike in a small circle B GL 385 010 PT 001 307 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy around this point A few missiles will strike in a larger circle around the small one Following the established point of aim will ensure that very few missiles will strike the ground in front of the target or miss high 19 Annex C shows that if the gunner aims at the bottom of the target the missile will always be on target for elevation for targets that are 2 5 metres high except possibly at 50 metres 1 2 seconds and at 125 metres 1 8 seconds 20 Azimuth For static targets the missile will always be on line f
116. LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions If any weapons are used in class safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review Nil Start the lesson with the EPGS packed up with covers on all cases and the Eryx tripod in the appropriate case B GL 385 010 PT 001 175 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 10 Introduction Explain The EPGS is a laser based weapon effects system comprising a Firing sub system FSS a Target sub system TSS an Eryx SRAAW H extended tripod and two equipment cases for all EPGS components The EPGS accurately simulates all the effects produced by firing a missile while requiring the gunner to follow the correct firing sequence The major purpose of the EPGS is to give Eryx gunners experience engaging targets in conditions similar to those that would be found in combat The accurate simulation of crew drill procedures launch effects missile dynamics and weight shift and weight loss characteristics in the EPGS will ensure that the skills and experience gained earlier training can be carried forward into much more varied and challenging single and multiple target training scenarios DESCRIPTION Explain and demonstrate 11 Firing Sub system FSS The FSS is the main functional part of the EPGS system The FSS contains four major components Gunner Module GM Instructor Module IM Battery Pack and Charger Converter The FSS also includes a cable se
117. LIFICATION CARD INFRARED DETECTOR UNIT gt gt VISIBLE ELECTRONIC SIGNAL Figure 3 2 Schematic of the Mirabel Thermal Imager 15 Confirm by questions INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF THE THERMAL IMAGER Explain demonstrate and practice 16 Installing the Thermal Imager See Figure 3 3 Place the thermal imager on top of the firing post tilted to the right approximately 45 degrees Line up the hinge pins on the sight with the hinges on the firing post B GL 385 010 PT 001 99 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy HINGE PIN Figure 3 3 Lining up the Hinge Pins with the Hinges 17 Slide the pins back into the hinges while rotating the thermal imager down until the positioning ball has come into contact with the recess on the firing post and the toggle fastener has locked over the stop see Figure 3 4 Figure 3 4 Locking the Thermal Imager onto the Firing Post 18 Removing the Thermal Imager To remove the thermal imager from the firing post simply lift up on the blade spring of the toggle fastener rotate the thermal imager up to the right and slide it forward to remove the hinge pins from the hinges 19 Confirm by questions and practice 100 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager POWER SOURCES Explain demonstrate and practice 20 The Mirabel Thermal Imager can be powered from non rechargeable lithium Li batteries two contacts at the base of the
118. Ld National D fense B GL 385 010 PT 001 Defence nationale WEAPONS VOLUME 10 ERYX SHORT RANGE ANTI ARMOUR WEAPON HEAV Y ENGLISH This publication becomes active on receipt WARNING ALTHOUGH NOT CLASSIFIED THIS PUBLICATION OR ANY PART OF IT MAY BE EXEMPT FROM DISCLOSURE TO THE PUBLIC UNDER THE ACCESS TO INFORMATION ACT ALL ELEMENTS OF INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MUST BE CLOSELY SCRUTINIZED TO ASCERTAIN WHETHER OR NOT THE PUBLICATION OR ANY PART OF IT MAY BE RELEASED Issued on the authority of the Chief of the Land Staff Canada Ld National D fense B GL 385 010 PT 001 Defence nationale WEAPONS VOLUME 10 ERYX SHORT RANGE ANTI ARMOUR WEAPON HEAVY ENGLISH This publication becomes active on receipt WARNING ALTHOUGH NOT CLASSIFIED THIS PUBLICATION OR ANY PART OF IT MAY BE EXEMPT FROM DISCLOSURE TO THE PUBLIC UNDER THE ACCESS TO INFORMATION ACT ALL ELEMENTS OF INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MUST BE CLOSELY SCRUTINIZED TO ASCERTAIN WHETHER OR NOT THE PUBLICATION OR ANY PART OF IT MAY BE RELEASED Issued on the authority of the Chief of the Land Staff OPI Infantry School DAD 4 2003 06 30 Canada Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy WEAPON SECURITY The security of small arms and small arms ammunition is your responsibility Ensure your weapon s and ammunition are secured protected in accordance with current orders and instructions Eryx Short Range Ant
119. M version Data Set Ready DSR means the remote end is connected and active This signal can be checked to determine when transmitting is possible Note that this is PDP in the new EMRM version Error Usually indicates the need for an adjustment to the Port Settings so they match the IM transmission settings Try another transmission first The error can also be caused by line interference which is electromagnetic in nature make sure no cables are crossing over or in close proximity to the RS 232 data cable If the RS 232 data cable is physically too long signal loss over excessive distance may occur and could in fact cause an error RxD eceive Data Lights up when the data transfer is in progress and mission results are being received NOTE There will be some flicker meaning the RxD item will flash on and off frequently This just means the data is being transmitted If the Rxd item does not light up for a long period of time it could indicate that the transmission has been interrupted If this light does stay off please wait for the procedure to time out A Transmission Interrupted message will be displayed For more information on adjusting the time setting see the Download Properties topic TxD Transmit Data Currently this is an inactive item since no data 15 sent out to the IM from the Download from IM Wizard Note If this item does light up it could indicate conflicting usage of the port from anoth
120. Mission Results Print button prints the contents of the Mission Results File Cancel button closes the Mission Results File Viewer 41 Communications Log File Viewer Communications Log File Viewer pictured below can be opened by clicking the L button from all steps of the Download from IM Wizard or by choosing the LOG option from the Download from IM Wizard Menu Bar This viewer gives you a report of the communication activities for the most recent EMRM session 280 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator EHRH Mission Results Communications Log File Aug 2000 14 01 30 Mission Results received File c tmpstufftataz88 EMRM 5 Blocks 1233 Bytes 77636 Elapsed Time 0 41 T Empty Fie Print e Cancel Communications Log File Viewer Empty File button clears the information out of lat the Communications Log File The file will still exist but will be blank Print button prints the contents of the Communications Log File Cancel button closes the Communications Log 9 Cancel ies File Viewer 42 Download from IM Error Messages In order for the EMRM to download mission results from the IM the Port Settings must be configured the very first time you try to download as seen earlier The following error message may appear B GL 385 010 PT 001 281 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy There was a failure
121. Mission Results Table in a detailed format This window uses two series of buttons ESEPGS Mission Results Manager 23 APR 2001 17 10 26 Edt Missions Jools Windows Help MISSION RESULTS score a IDENTIFICATION GUNNER INSTRUCTOR DATE B Print 1 17 Missions in F LSvw Ky Fro 215m 28knvh Hone X C Program Fes DNO EMRM v20 Alpha 1408 ENGLISH Detailed Mission Results Window a Detailed Mission Results Window Button Description s Close This Mission Detailed Mission Results Window Buttons B GL 385 010 PT 001 263 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Co View Edit Comments View Edit Comments Button Opens the Comments dialog box where you can enter and save comments about the current mission View Edit Comments Instructor Name Ma D Smith New Comments Nice shot PTE Doe Lets Iry some more like this with Shoulder fing position and longer range targets Next tine in the held we also work on your tracking of moving targets Instructor Maj D Smith Date 23 JUL 2001 14 23 Nice shot PTE Doe Lets try some more like this with Shoulder firing position and longer range targets Next time in the field we also work on yow tracking of moving targets The Comments Dialog Box PiP eul Print Result Button Opens the Print i Manager
122. OBL oos 60 LESSON4 PERFORM SRAAW H HANDLING DRILLS 62 ei TC 62 Conduct of the Lessons T desto nens 63 Hold Aim and EI ide 64 HALO Clete Lr 71 LE T2 73 T3 LESSON 5 SITING THE ERYX DURING COMBAT OPERATIONS E Instructors NOE E 77 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Condust or TNE 78 uD Tne Fea 01 om re DM 80 ss ass a Um eon 82 Eire C s iode eit Ro Ducis rbd av ord 83 Eryx Defensive 83 Eryx Offensive TASKS 90 Safety Considerations oio oS REO een 91 roe IM 92 CHAPTER3 LESSON PLANS MIRABEL THERMAL IMAGER LESSON 1 OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE MIRABEL THERMAL IMAGER itor 95 95 Conduct orte Lessolo inna 96 Characteristics and Description 44222 22 977 Installation and Removal of the Thermal Imager 99 POW EE SOUCO 101 Operating the Thermal 105 Firing with the Thermal 106 Maintainence of the Thermal I
123. PS and h cleaning supplies 6 Preparation The instructor should a check the weapons for serviceability and b ensure that the batteries are fully charged 7 Miscellaneous This lecture should be given outside setting where actual vehicles and other background objects can be viewed with the thermal imager CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions Conduct safety precautions as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review Nil 10 Introduction Explain The Mirabel Thermal Imager is a passive electro optical instrument that uses thermal imaging technology It is mounted on top of the firing post to allow the gunner to engage targets in conditions of darkness and reduced visibility see Figure 3 1 96 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager CHARACTERISTICS AND DESCRIPTION Explain and demonstrate 11 Characteristics a weight of thermal imager with battery 3 4 kg b field of view 6 vertical x 8 horizontal magnification nil d operating temperature range 31 C to 51 C and e power requirement 15 volts 12 Description The Mirabel employs proven scanning thermal imaging technology with a cooled detector array It is simple in design to allow easy operation under all conditions 13 The Mirabel Thermal Imager unlike the TOW Thermal Sight is simply a viewing aid for the gunner and does not provide any additional assistance guiding the missile The
124. RM AM M QUE NEAN Age MR EE up um ND UE GRO GO DG GNO GN HERO GNO GE i Mo er i m 400 i i i 1 lt 4 lt r i 1 e i 3 LL i i i zi a i i i i i 1 i i 1 as Q E wi i i Ww oO i xke n c Ro vos Bs ms uU i i i H UM EEEE Bao e haana A MEN b ak MEE ni i e 1 1 i i e e e e e e e e e e a e FONVY 4 200 4 s w 33 5 50 1 0 4 5 1 5 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 58 4 0 1 0 0 5 407 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX D TRAJECTORY OF A MISSILE ON A VERTICAL PLAN TRAJECTORY OF A MISSILE ON A VERTICAL PLAN 100 missiles fired from tripod against fixed target TRAJECTORY OF A MISSILE ON A VERTICAL PLAN 100 missiles fired from tripod against crossing target from left to right at 67 MRAD s B GL 385 010 PT 001 409 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX E TRAJECTORY OF A MISSILE ON A HORIZONTAL PLAN TRAJECTORY OF A MISSILE ON A HORIZONTAL PLAN 100 missiles fired against
125. Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX A DISPOSITION OF THE RETROREFLECTOR ASSEMBLY ON TARGET VEHICLES TM RETROREFLECTOR ASSEMBLY 160 cm 63 in 3x LONG l1 r mmn U a EN ORO RO NO K ONES i LEA CL au Figure 5A 1 APC M113A2 B GL 385 010 PT 001 289 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 130 cm RETROREFLECTOR ASSEMBLY 15 in 4x LONG STRAPS Ne WOOD PANEL 61 x 96 cm 24 x 38 in WOOD PANEL INSERTED BETWEEN THE ROLL CAGE AND CANVAS SOFT TOP 61 x 96 cm 24 x 38 in Figure 5A 2 ILTIS 290 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 5 RETROREFLECTOR ASSEMBLY 1 SHORT STRAP 4 x LONG STRAPS TURRET CENTRE LINE COMMANDER S SIGHT LONG STRAPS TIED TO HANDLES s ON THE TURRET FRONT F SHORT STRAF WITH UNDER THE REAR OF THE COMMANDER S SIGHT COVER LONG STRAPS TIED TO HANDLES ON THE TURRET FRONT Figure 5 3 Grizzly B GL 385 010 PT 001 291 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 96 cm RETROREFLECTOR ASSEMBLY 2 x SHORT STRAPS LONG STRAP Figure 5A 4 AVGP Cougar 202 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 5 RETROREFLECTOR ASSEMBLY 198 cm 78 in 1x LONG STRAP 2 SHORT STRAPS OX XXX XX P TURRET CENTRE LINE E vL idl Figure 5 5 Leopard b
126. TION This displays the choice of firing positions TRIPOD or SHOULDER Highlight the required selection then press ENTER to select it or ESC to cancel TARGET ASPECT A target aspect is the gunner s view of a stationary target This displays a choice of eight different target aspects including FRONTAL VIEW default side views oblique views and rear view Highlight the required selection then press ENTER to select it or ESC to cancel When firing at a stationary target the correct target aspect must be selected otherwise the PPA will not be correctly positioned TARGET MASKING This displays a choice of target masking levels including default low medium and high Highlight the required selection then press ENTER to select it or ESC to cancel The target masking level can be selected directly via the hot key This cycles through the available masking levels displayed on the system configuration bar top of the screen If the target masking level selected is incorrect both the position of the PPA and the ground level will be incorrect AIM POINT MARKER This allows display or removal of the aim point marker a cross display icon which indicates the current PPA position in the gunner s sight field of view Highlight the required B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator selection ON or OFF then press ENTER t
127. Test after firing missile defect Essai apr s tir si d fectuosit missile Yes a Serial No b Firing posttested Non a Serial No b Firing posttested Oui Non de s rie Poste de tir prowv de s rie Poste de tir prouv Date of test Date de 5 dam 7 c Date of test Date de l essai 2 duy j C Firing post operational Poste de tir fonctionnel D Missile 1 Serial No de s rie 3 Training Exercice Y N Oui Non 2 Lot No lot 4 Active Actif SECTION 3 FIRING CONDITIONS CONDITIONS TIR Date D J M Y A B Time Heure C Location agetown Valcartier Petawawa Wainwright ther Autre Specify Pr ciser ENS ES CUN LLL Endoit C D Wind conditions in relation to gunner E Wind speed Irrelevant Light Strong Gusty Direction vent par rapport au tireur mils Vitesse vent influence L ger Fort Rafales F Temperature G Illumination None Flares H Brightness Irrelevant facing sun Low Very low Temp rature Eclairage Aucun Fus es clairantes Luminosit Sans influence Tireur face au soiell Falble Tr s falble J Precipitation Irrelevant Rain Snow Snow on ground Fog Mist C Other Pr cipitation Sans Influence Pluie Neige Neige au sol Brouillard Brume Autre SECTION 4 TARGET CIBLE Training Tank Frontal View Tank Side View Tank Angled View APC Frontal View APC Side View APC Angled View Other A Type ns
128. The AC connector assembly includes a 250 V 800 mA input protection fuse and a rotary switch to select the AC supply voltage 110 or 220 V Status section which includes four LEDs indicating the presence of the ETSVCS power supply output voltage a 5 V is required to power up the audio amplifier and the transcoder b 8 4 V for the VCR Monitor c 12 V for the camera system and B GL 385 010 PT 001 353 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy d the Batt Max LED when ON indicates that the battery charge cycle when plugged into an AC power source is completed 3 Selection section which includes ETSVCS ON OFF switch with an integrated locking mechanism three LEDs to indicate when on which power sources are available and a rotary switch to select the desired power source to operate the ETSVCS DC AC or Batt VOLTAGE SELECTOR ROTARY SWITCH 3A DC INFUT LINE 1 pe INPUT CONNECTOR 2 OUTPUT STATUS LEDs DC SELECTION LED 8 SELECTION LED SELECTION SECTION ON OFF SWITCH 11 POWER SELECTION ROTARY SWITCH Figure 6 9 ETSVCS Power Supply b Transcoder see Figure 6 10 is mounted underneath an interface panel The PAL NTSC transcoder is designed to operate with Cohu camera model 4980 PAL and Sony portable 8 mm LCD video recorder The system converts the real time PAL European standard video signal from the Cohu camera to an NTSC North American standard vi
129. To clean the tripod a remove all excess dirt from the exterior with a damp rag b remove all dirt from cracks and recesses with a paint brush and pay particular attention to ensure that dirt and debris are removed from the following 1 elevation unit 2 traverse assembly and 3 supporting platform 15 Confirm by practice 36 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS Explain 16 Operating Temperature The Eryx weapon system is designed to operate at temperatures from 31 C to 51 C This is not the ambient air temperature but the actual temperature of internal weapon components Beyond these limits weapon reliability is not guaranteed 17 Cold Weather Maintenance a all optical surfaces including the three ports must be kept clear of snow and ice as this obscuration can affect the ability of the SLG computer to guide the missile and of the gunner to track the target b if the eye piece fogs up care must be taken to avoid scratching the lens surface when cleaning it and snow and build up blocking the missile indexing slots alignment pin recess and electrical connectors must be removed 18 Hot Weather Maintenance Exposure of missiles and weapon system components to prolonged direct sunlight in hot weather must be avoided Any available material tarpaulins cloth leafy branches etc should be used to provide cover 19 High Humidity Maintenance a
130. UCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions Conduct safety precautions as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review instructor must review weapon system check out procedures 10 Introduction Considering the range of Eryx the gunner must be able to engage targets with minimum fuss no hesitation and as rapidly as possible under all battlefield conditions 11 addition weapon performance is greatly influenced by gunner s ability to adopt a stable firing position 48 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx MISSILE PREPARATION Explain and demonstrate 12 Video Clip Play video clip Lesson 3 Part 1 Missile Preparation 13 The high hit probability of Eryx is largely due to the sophistication of its missile Such a missile requires several containers and careful handling to prevent damage 14 Missiles are shipped in a logistic container pallet in groups of four Each round is encased an individual container and sealed in a metallic protective envelope to guard it against electromagnetic impulses 15 The missile is further sealed inside field packing consisting of the missile tube two end caps and a carrying strap 16 The following steps are taken to prepare a missile for firing a Open the door of the logistic container and use the handle to pull the individual container out of the pallet b Unscrew and release the air evacuation plug rotate the clamp lever inwar
131. URSE 300 301 Figure 5B 6 LAV APC Coyote and 3 302 Lieute DAC B V 206 303 LFieure 2B 5 LSV W E eee 304 Dee ede oed se eoo oss 310 Figure 6 2 Cruise Phase Minimum Standards 313 I ieure 0 5 322 Figure 6 4 Point of Aim Low Profile Target 322 Figure 6 5 Point of Aim Obscured 323 Figure 6 6 Point of Aim Oblique 22200 21 22 323 Figure 6 7 Overview of the ETSVCS Assembly in its mE 332 xxli Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Figure 6 8 ETSVCS 353 Figure 6 9 ETSVCS Power 354 0 10 6 355 1 CohmCaime 397 Figure 6 12 Cohu Camera Setting 359 xxiii Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND TEACHING METHODS AIM 1 This manual contains instructional material on the Eryx Short Range Anti Armour Weapon Heavy SRAAW H It provides information to be used by instructors for teaching the knowledge and skills required to achieve stan
132. YX Defence nationale SECTION 1 GUNNER TIREUR Gunner Information Information tireur 1 Service de matricule 2 Rank Grade 3 Nom 4 Unit Code Code de l unit B Experience Firing ERYX Exp rience au tir ERYX 1 No of firings 2 Noofhits 3 Noof misses due to gunner error 4 Dateoflastfiring M Y A N de tirs N de buts N de rat s attribuables au tireur Date du dernier tir C Firing Training last 30 days Instruction au tir 30 derniers jours 1 No of firings on EVIGS N de tirs sur STIVIE 2 No of firings on de tirs sur STPE D Gunner Position Condition tireur 1 Tripod Prone 2 Kneeling shoulder fired without support 3 Kneeling shoulder fired with support Tr pied couch genou sans appul genou avec 4 tanding shoulder fired without t 5 Standing shoulder fired with t 6 Enclosed B rnm ee nal Pone BE ie SECTION 2 ERYX WEAPON SYSTEM SYSTEME D ARME ERYX A Serial No 1 Firing post 2 Tripod if used to fire 3 Thermal sight if used to fire de s rie Poste de tir Tr pied si employ pour le tir Lunette thermique si employ e pour le tir B TEST SET MES 1 Test prior to firing Essai avant tir Yes 2
133. abricant Lot Mo Num ro du lot Year of manufacture Ann e de fabrication Figure 2 8 Logistic Container Markings Labels 40 Individual Container live missile Explain and demonstrate The markings on the live missile container are shown in Figure 2 9 42 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Brown band back blast Physical data B Yellow band explosive J Electrical igniters substance Black band anti tank K Storage transport ammunition limitations D Self propelled L Ammunition delivered ammunition primed E Shaped charge M Utilization limitations Type of explosive N Lot number hexolite G Cannot be parachuted NATO stock number H Control code number P Missile serial number Q Risk category Figure 2 9 Individual Container Markings 41 Individual Container practice missile markings the practice missile container are the same as for the live missile except for the blue strip indicating an inert warhead 42 Field Packing live missile The markings on the live missile tube are shown in Figure 2 10 B GL 385 010 PT 001 43 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy a hi amp E A Lot Number D Self Propelled Ammunition B Utilization Limit Temp E Serial Number C Storage and Transport Limit Temp Figure 2 10 Field Packing Markings 43 Field Packing practice missile The markings on the practice missile tube are the same as for the live missile ex
134. ags are changed to red and the order from the ARSO to prepare and load missiles on the firing point s is given The target operator commences target movement and the order to fire is given On completion of firing the OIC orders unload and the guidance wire is cut The relays are rotated until all gunners have completed the exercise All gunners bring back the Eryx Firing Report DND 2053 to the Ammo Point properly completed by the ARSO 30 Conclusion of Exercise On completion of the exercise the following must occur 340 B GL 385 010 PT 001 31 Lesson Plans Coaching weapons are cleaned and inspected targets are picked up guidance wire is collected clean up and inspection of the firing range the verbal ammunition declaration is given by all personnel on the range missile parts no container parts in my possession Range Control is notified that the range practice is completed troops leave the area and stores are returned range clearance certificate if applicable is completed and turned in Eryx Firing Reports DND 2053 Annex J and Ammunition Accident Incident Defect and Malfunction Report DND 410 are submittted the Eryx Firing Summary Message Annex K is sent to LFCHQ and SME Eryx INF SCH and Unit Employment Records are updated Confirm by questions ERYX RANGE PRACTICES Explain 32 33 Prior to firing an Eryx missile all gunners must have
135. al position resolution 5 metres apart up to 60 metres Angular target velocity 1 milliradians per second resolution Acquisition time maximum 1 5 seconds stationary Target range accuracy 1 metre 2 5 seconds moving Mission range 50 to 600 metres 29 Confirm by questions 194 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator CONCLUSION 30 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm all main teaching points by questions and practice e conduct safety precautions d summarize the lesson stressing the following 1 review what the FSS and TSS are including how they work together 2 review firing post functions and 3 review the operational mission sequence from target acquisition through launch flight and mission results e forecast the next lesson and f pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 195 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LESSON 2 PREPARE EPGS FOR USE INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach how to properly set up the EPGS The user will become familiar with basic procedures including inspection set up and testing in order to prepare the EPGS for operation 2 Main Teaching Points a inspection b Firing Sub system FSS and Target Sub system TSS set up start up procedures d automatic power on BIT and post operational procedures 3 Time Two 40 minute lessons 4 Method Explanation demonstration and practice
136. aluation This allows the instructor to create a customized end of lesson test in which the vehicles taught and other similar targets may be included To create a new test a Type Create a new test b Type the desired name of the test Select the AFVs B GL 385 010 PT 001 371 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy d Determine the parameters to be set e g static optical image moving optical static thermal exposure time stop time The total duration of the test is displayed and the instructor may add or remove targets depending on the time available e g about 3 minutes including correction for a 40 minute lesson NOTE During diskette creation do not forget to choose a default view in order to get good thermal images This new test will be added to the other existing tests and will be ready for use by clicking on EXECUTE TEST 23 Before starting a test the instructor should make sure that he has distributed the answer sheets After the test the answer sheets are exchanged between students and the instructor goes through the test in front of the class providing explanations as needed The test should be marked in class so that the students are immediately informed of their results 24 Normally 4 to 5 targets are viewed during a 40 minute lesson about 10 minutes per target being the suggested time 25 The lesson plan format given to the students 15 a blank format very similar to this lesson
137. an example of thresholding out the cooler features to get detail and thermal resolution in the hot features C Brightness Medium Contrast Medium to High This setting works well in heavy fog or heavy dust B GL 385 010 PT 001 119 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy when very little can be seen with the thermal imager This setting will increase the visual noise in the scene but also increases the apparent sensitivity of the thermal imager The image appears very grainy and 15 difficult to interpret However under these adverse atmospheric conditions this is the best picture possible This setting is also good for searching along a tree line in very wet conditions It will also help with longer range targets and targets with few resolvable features such as a front end view of rear engine vehicle A higher contrast setting will highlight the vehicle s overall silhouette but not give much detail At the very least it helps the target stand out from background and aids in target detection FRATRICIDE Explain 35 Fratricide is the very serious problem of friendly units being engaged by their own side Fratricide has been a problem throughout warfare but the Gulf War brought to light the dangers associated with fighting on a high technology battlefield with greater reliance on night vision devices during periods of reduced visibility GULF WAR FRATRICIDE CASUALTIES US Forces 24 killed 57 wounded 36 During O
138. ansfers all stored mission results which can take several hours it is essential that any unwanted mission results are deleted before starting the transfer The procedure to start data transfer if EMRM not available is as follows a On the IM Using the direction keys select SYSTEM MANAGEMENT Press ENTER The system management dialogue box will appear b On the PC View the HyperTerminal directory then set up and run the Microsoft HyperTerminal application Before the HyperTerminal application can connect to the IM a HyperTerminal configuration file file name ht e g EPGS ht has to be created If a configuration file already exists click on the configuration file icon and move to sub paragraph f d To create a configuration file run HyperTerminal Hypertrm exe 1 e double click the HyperTerminal application icon to launch it Enter a descriptive file name e g EPGS ht select one of the icons displayed in the connection description box then click the OK box B GL 385 010 PT 001 233 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 234 In the Connect to window select the PC serial port to be used 1 COM 1 or COM 2 from the Connect using box then click the box Set Port settings to Bits per second 19 200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control Hardware then click the box On the HyperTerminal menu bar selec
139. aphs are green This part is based on the gunner s deviation from the correct point of aim in metres 39 The graphs show the deviation between the central crosshairs and the correct point of aim from launch to impact The fact that the gunner aims off 10 mrads below the central cross hairs using the pre aim arrow means that the graphs should start 10 mrads above the zero line 40 The gunner can only deviate a certain amount from the correct point of aim and still maintain control of the missile These limits are inscribed on the graphs in blue The gunner s curves must be completely inside the blue lines B GL 385 010 PT 001 325 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 41 Confirm by questions and practice 42 Curve Shape The gunner s curves must be as smooth as possible At launch there will be a characteristic zig zag in the curves due to weight shift and weight loss The jerks in the firing post cannot be eliminated but they can be minimized The gunner must have a stable fire position and a firm grip on the weapon At the end of the launch phase the gunner should have completely absorbed the launch and the crosshairs should be on the correct point of aim 43 During the cruise phase the gunner must minimize jerky movements when tracking The curve should be without any sharp spikes especially at the end of the track The missile reacts immediately to changes in the point of aim and severe corrections can cause the miss
140. atricide 2 Main Teaching Points a infrared theory b temperature differences and thermal images sources of infrared energy d effect of weather and obscurants image controls and f fratricide 3 Time Two 40 minute periods 4 Method Explanation and demonstration Stores a one Eryx per two gunners and B GL 385 010 PT 001 111 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy b one thermal imager per two gunners 6 Preparation The instructor should a check the weapons for serviceability and b ensure that the batteries are fully charged 7 Miscellaneous This lesson should be given outside in a setting where actual vehicles and other background objects can be viewed with the thermal imager CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions Conduct safety precautions as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review The instructor must review the characteristics of the Mirabel Thermal Imager 10 Introduction Explain The use of thermal imagers on the modern battlefield is increasing constantly The Mirabel Thermal Imager gives the Eryx gunner a vast increase in his ability to detect and engage targets in all conditions Understanding how thermal imagers operate how they are affected by environmental conditions and how to maximize the performance of the thermal imager in all conditions will make the Eryx gunner better able to perform his duties as a tank killer INFRARED THEORY Explain
141. atus information Help button to open the context sensitive help for the active Window Start button to get the EMRM ready to receive results from the EPGS and to initiate Step 2 of the Wizard Exit button click to avoid downloading and close the session B GL 385 010 PT 001 273 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 34 Step 2 After clicking the START button on the first step of the Wizard Step 2 pictured below is displayed The is now ready to receive mission results from the IM At this point you now have 60 seconds to proceed to the EPGS IM and make the following selections select System Management and then Save Results to PC The buttons found on step 2 of the Wizard are listed below Notice that the RxD receive indicator on the Communications Status Bar will blink on and off when Step 3 begins to show the transmission in progress The number of blocks and bytes received and download time will also increase in value as the transmission takes place Download from EPGS File Mission Help a Step 2 Ready ta Receive Ready to receive Mission Results from Proceed to the EPGS Instruction Module and make the following selections SYSTEM MANAGEMENT then SAVE RESULTS TO PC NOTE You must start the transmission from EPGS within 60 seconds this system will assume transmission was incomplete CTS DCO DSA Error RxD 0 DTRATS O OG O OO Ow 274
142. ax low max left max right 44 The formula creates a score out of ten Five points are derived from the realignment time and launch phase and five points are derived from the cruise phase 45 If a gunner gets a zero score in one of the criteria his maximum possible score is automatically out of 5 This ensures that if a gunner fails one criterion he cannot pass the mission if he did well in the other eight See Annex G for some examples of score calculation 46 Tracking Graphs Explain and demonstrate with graphics on screen The tracking graphs present the gunner s motion during both the launch and cruise phase in red and green respectively The transition from launch to cruise phase occurs at 2 4 seconds and is characteristically discontinuous 4T For the launch phase the angular deviation from the correct point of aim is shown in milliradians For the cruise phase the deviation from the correct point of aim is shown in metres 48 The graphs will never have a continuous transition from launch to cruise phase because the lines depict different quantities The launch phase measurement is angular and independent of target range The cruise phase measurement is in metres and is dependant on target range see Annex 49 Confirm by questions 314 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching CONCLUSION 50 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm all main teaching points by questions a
143. b 2 Slides 1 Lesson Plans Coaching a they may be viewed with the C7 sight field glasses and the Eryx optical sight b can be taught anywhere with a minimum of preparation several vehicles may be taught in single lesson d all sides of an AFV are shown e the most important details of the AFV as seen by the unaided eye on the battlefield are represented and f a great deal of participation can be generated Disadvantages a thermal training cannot be conducted b the number of AFVs available is limited and c the scale models are quite expensive Advantages a thermal training can be conducted b they are inexpensive c they are available in large quantities and all sides of the AFVs and AC are shown and B GL 385 010 PT 001 383 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy d all AFVs are available 2 Disadvantages a the environment must be suitable class room power supply projector screen etc and b many of the AFVs and AC are shown at unrealistic distances and views relative to a battlefield setting Intrest Trainer 1 Advantages a thermal training can be conducted b all AFVs are available new items be added d all sides of an AFV are shown e there are many advantages for the instructor games photos videos optical thermal comparisons target construction modified test etc f the student can prog
144. b In the Selector Dialog box open the folder location containing the desired Mission Set file Select the you want to open click the button 46 Saving Mission Results as a New Mission Set File Explain and demonstrate Once you have finished working with a set of mission results you can then save those mission results to a new database file This could typically be done after performing a filtering operation or to rename an existing mission set file The procedure for saving mission results to a database file is listed below a on the File Menu select the Save Mission Set As option b a standard Save as dialog box will appear From this dialog box you can specify a name and location for the database file and 5 when you have entered a filename and selected a location click the button and the database file will be saved 284 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator NOTE Any changes made to the mission set will be automatically saved on closing the mission set or on exiting the application 47 Opening a Mission Result in the Detailed Mission Results Window Explain and demonstrate There are two ways to open a mission result in a new Detailed Mission Results Window a Method 1 1 2 3 Click the Mission Set Summary Window to make it active In the Mission Results Table right click on the mission result you wish
145. b menu 4 What are the five fields of the Mission status bar 5 Name and show hot keys 6 What are the two kinds of settings in Mission mode 7 What are the two displays in Debrief mode Forecast the next lesson Pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator LESSON 4 EPGS MISSION DATA TRANSFERS FROM THE INSTRUCTOR MODULE TO A PC AND DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach how to prepare EPGS and for data transfer and the process for managing EPGS mission data The user will be able to make the transfer convert data between the IM and PC and produce a printed report 2 Main Teaching Points a data transfer procedure using HyperTerminal and a spreadsheet 1 unit file transfers to PC 2 unit file development using a spreadsheet 3 unit file transfers from PC to IM or b mission results data transfer using the EMRM EPGS Mission Results Manager 1 characteristics 2 start up window 3 mission set summary window 4 detailed mission results window 5 EMRM functions 6 download mission results into EMRM database 2 Time Two 40 minute theory lessons two 40 minute practical lessons following EPGS training B GL 385 010 PT 001 229 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 4 Method Explanation demonstration and practice are the best way to introduce a new system as it confirms ability through hands on practice Th
146. be isolated The following should be checked on the video B GL 385 010 PT 001 347 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy a Did the gunner pre aim with the pre aim arrow b Was there excessive launch obscuration Did the gunner re aim with the crosshairs d Did he use the e Was his tracking smooth and consistent f Were there any last moment jerks in the gunner s tracking that could have caused the missile to dodge the target g Was the missile flight path erratic in such a way as to indicate a malfunction h Did the target make any sudden jerks 22 After every missed target the firing post should be checked on the test set by an FCS Technician to verify its serviceability 23 Gunnery Performance Explain Eryx has been proven to be capable of 90 accuracy from the tripod and 70 from the shoulder even against moving targets Poor performance on the range may indicate that gunners require additional training In instances where gunners are not achieving the predicted performance levels the range should be placed on a check fire until the reason for the poor performance has been determined 24 ETSVCS footage should be reviewed to see if there is a common gunner fault and refresher training on the EPGS or EVIGS should be conducted 25 Eryx missiles are very expensive and in limited supply Carrying on with an unsuccessful range not only wastes missiles but also erodes gunner self confidence
147. bscuration disable wire pull no launch obscuration disable wire pull flip mission disable wire pull flip mission flip mission enable aim point B GL 385 010 PT 001 153 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy OBLIQUE TARGETS LEFT TO RIGHT Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS disable wire pull OBLIQUE TARGETS RIGHT LEFT Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS disable wire pull flip mission disable wire pull flip mission disable wire pull flip mission 31 1 034 flip mission 32 1 051 flip mission 154 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator REVIEW TARGETS Practice and coaching if needed PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS TS 36 1 034 flip mission CONCLUSION 11 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm the main teaching points by questions summarize the lessons and stress that the point of aim for moving targets is at the bottom and 1 4 forward d forecast the next lesson and pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 155 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LESSON 5 FIRE KNEELING PRACTICES INSTRUCTORS NOTES 1 Aim To develop fundamental tracking skills from the kneeling position with and without tripod 2 Main Teaching Points Engage a static targets b advancing targets C c
148. ce and the obscuration lamp test obscuration effect should be visible in the gunner s eyepiece Obviously during this sequence the firing post must be immobile and protected from wind gusts Missile Tube BIT This sequence comprises dynamic tests of internal and external components which require operator intervention and observation During this sequence the following message 15 displayed RAISE LOCKING LEVER SAFETY CATCH PRESS THE TRIGGER AND HOLD TRIGGER DOWN FOR TWO SECONDS Perform these actions within 20 seconds This causes the sequence to continue with the weight loss and wire pull assemblies tests NOTE 1 If the safety catch and trigger button are not operated or if their operation is not detected by the BIT within 20 seconds possibly due to a failure of the safety catch or trigger button the firing system finishes the sequence without dropping the weights or operating the wire pull The MTA indicates the end of the test by playing the missile launch and flight sound effects through the speaker NOTE 2 If the safety catch and trigger button have been operated within 20 seconds of being prompted and the MTA indicates the end of the test by playing the missile launch and flight sound effects from the speaker without the weights dropping or the wire pull being felt then the BIT has failed since this implies there is a fault with the trigger B GL 385 010 PT 001 207 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapo
149. cept for the blue strip indicating an inert warhead 44 Confirm by questions DESTRUCTION OF THE WEAPON AND MISSILES Explain 45 In situations where capture by the enemy is imminent the destruction of the weapon and missiles may be ordered by the Commanding Officer 46 Weapon system components should be destroyed in the following order of priority a missiles b firing post thermal imager 44 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx d tripod 47 Due to the built in safety features it is highly unlikely that missile warheads or motors will function independently However cover must still be taken to provide protection from blast and fragmentation Means that can be used to destroy the components include a demolition b burning aimed fire and d physical damage 48 When time is short each component can be rendered inoperable as follows a missile cut the copper cable running the length of the missile tube b firing post smash the SLG computer through the optical ports C thermal imager smash the front lens and d tripod break the traverse mechanism 49 Confirm by questions CONCLUSION 50 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b play video clip Lesson 2 Part 3 Review of Lesson 2 B GL 385 010 PT 001 45 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 46 confirm all main teaching points by questions practice conduct
150. ch soldier is to be tested as the gunner and the loader 2 The test will be conducted in the prone position using the tripod 3 This checklist will be used to record omissions in the drills by the gunner or the loader 4 Every point of the checklist designated with an asterisk means that safety is involved Thus the omission of one or another of those points constitutes an automatic fail D The execution of a wrong drill under a specific word of command will also constitute an automatic fail 6 The three first steps of TI installation must be successful otherwise that portion of the test will constitute a fail Name of gunner Name of loader PASS FAIL PASS FAIL Thecoach gives the order LOAD ACTION BY GUNNER ACTION BY LOADER Verify that the safety catch is 7 engaged Repeats LOAD Repeats LOAD Remove the field packing and inspect the following missile tube cone guide pins B GL 385 010 PT 001 43 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ACTION BY GUNNER Repeats READY 2 coach gives TARGET followed by a target indication Repeat TARGET Remove the sight protective plug Disengage the safety catch move the safety cover aside and put thumb on the trigger button ACTION BY LOADER electrical connectors alignment pin copper ribbon 3 wires at rear of tube nozzles and beacon Load the missile onto the firing post Reports R
151. cking on the mission name Mission Synopsis Describes a mission if it is selected with a single click Mission s Selected Identifies the series of selected missions Missions can be deleted by double clicking on the mission name Add Mission s Adds a selected mission to the series Delete Mission s Deletes a selected mission from the series Change Video Disk Exits to the Video Disk Selected window Flip Mission Video Causes the simulator to run a mirror image of the mission scene so that targets cross in the opposite direction Mission Parameters Specifies the conditions under which the series of missions are to be fired 1 Quick Selection Sets the parameters to the levels used for firing the EVIGS gunnery tests 2 Kill Zone Size Shrinks the size of the target as shown in the diagram displayed to the left B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator 3 Launch Obscuration Sets the duration and intensity of launch obscuration 4 Light Level Sets the light level to simulate low light conditions The High setting corresponds to full daylight 5 Fog Sets fog density 6 Precipitation Sets rain or snow conditions 25 Confirm by questions and practice MISSION CONTROL 26 This window 15 used to execute a series of selected missions a Time Remaining Shows the time remaining in the mission video b Mission History Displays a synopsis of w
152. confirm that adequate space and power outlets are available for EVIGS training check the EVIGS for serviceability d review the EVIGS Operator s Manual C 10 399 000 MB 001 dated 97 11 07 7 Miscellaneous Due to its sensitivity to the environment the EVIGS cannot be operated outside of controlled classroom conditions CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions If any weapons are used in class safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review Nil Start the lesson with the EVIGS packed up and with covers on all cases 10 Introduction The aim of gunnery training is to produce an effective gunner who 15 able to hit the target Given the high cost of missiles however basic gunnery training with live missiles is not economically feasible Simulator training has proven to be an effective means to develop fundamental gunnery skills Live fire can then be done as the final stage of training Simulator training does not therefore replace live fire it simply increases the training value of each missile 11 EVIGS is indoor gunnery simulator It uses video computer generated imagery to replicate the sight picture for the Eryx gunner In addition phenomena such as weight shift and weight loss are simulated by an external apparatus which develops the psychomotor skills necessary for live fire gunnery UNPACK AND ASSEMBLE Explain demonstrate and pract
153. counterweight on the firing post leading to barely any weight shift and weight loss The gunner must remember these differences when using the tripod and thermal imager and do effective manual compensation following the departure of the missile d Mil Scale located at the top of the large crosshairs The horizontal scale is indicated every 5 mils and numbered every 10 mils The vertical scale is indicated every 5 mils but is not numbered It is useful for measuring gaps and estimating range 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 Figure 2 16 Eryx Reticule Pattern 66 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Range is equal to 600 m Engagement permitted Figure 2 17 Determining Engagement Range 16 Determining the Preffered Point of Aim Explain Due to the unique flight characteristics of Eryx 1 its initial high and to the left flight path which prevents accidental grounding out care must be taken to choose the Preffered Point of Aim PPA to maximize the chance of a hit 17 Regardless of obscuration cover or oblique movement the point of aim is always based on the apparent width traversing speed and range of the target Vehicle speed 15 not its actual ground speed but rather its angular speed 1 e how many mils it traverses each second A vehicle traversing your field of view at a given speed will appear to be moving much slower the further the range is In order to locate your point of aim ignore the turret and div
154. criteria for success 15 to attack with superior numbers with as much support from other arms such as artillery and armor as possible The number of Eryx weapon systems employed in any attack would likely be less than what is available in order to preserve the number of riflemen who provide the main element of an attacking force Eryx teams would mostly revert to their primary job as a rifle team in their sections 22 General Tasks In offensive operations Eryx can have the following general tasks a Form part of a Firebase Eryx can be used to augment the overall firepower of the firebase or provide the bulk of the anti armor and anti bunker firepower The firebase must necessarily be within 600 metres of the objective b Security or Cut off Eryx can be used to help secure the line of departure the flanks of the assault force or the firebase as well as cut off enemy vehicles attempting to reinforce or flee the objective e Form part of the Assault Element Eryx can accompany the assault element onto the objective to provide pinpoint anti armor or anti bunker fire Whether Eryx 1s required or not on the assault is a decision that must be made by the commander following an assessment of the likely opposition versus what is available for anti armor support 90 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx d Support Breaching Operations e Strengthen the Consolidation After a successful assault Eryx will be the main weapon that
155. crossing target from left to right at 67 MRAD s a a TRAJECTORY OF A MISSILE ON A HORIZONTAL PLAN 100 missiles fired against crossing target from right to left at 67 MRAD s B GL 385 010 PT 001 All Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX F OPERATION OF EXPLOSIVE REACTIVE ARMOUR HEAT WARHEAD JET MAIN ARMOUR ERA is detonated Plates present new material B GL 385 010 PT 001 413 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX G SCORE CRITERIA TABLE XEN OSINAD XEN WSR XEN XEN ISTA XEN BEES 415 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy EXAMPLES OF EVIGS SCORE CALCULATIONS Example 1 Hit Response time Launch max left Launch max right Launch max high Launch max low Cruise max left Cruise max right Cruise max high Cruise max low 1 20s 7 20 mrad 5 28 mrad 8 12 mrad 9 33 mrad 4 1 20 m 6 0 87 9 0 66 8 0 30 10 Note 0 5 7 5 8 9 4 0 5 4 9 8 10 0 5 XN 10080 0 5 X 4320 0 5 X 6 32 0 5 X 8 10 3 16 4 05 7 2 success Example 2 no hit Response time Launch max left Launch max right Launch ma
156. cteristics oie eee esee uuo iens ko 12 Weapon sen rs 13 Weapon Opera OMe ados audent mente adus obe 23 Safety Precautions and 24 CO MONITOR o cst ae posted Ies E 32 LESSON2 MAINTAIN THE 33 Instructor NOUS 33 Condueror ihe 34 Care ande leanne 35 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Environmental Considerations 44 37 NBC Decontamination 38 39 Weapon System Check out Procedure 40 Missile Markings and Identification 4 Destruction of the Weapon and Missiles 44 45 LESSON PREPARE THE SRAAW H FOR FIRING 47 Instructor NOTOS t enema 47 Conductor uos 48 Missile Prepatation a E 49 The Prone i iet oma tubes cron Ves iude 50 I oad and Unload odds scat 51 The Kneeling and Standing Positions sss 54 One man Load and 58 Distounted eO RE UIS E 59 SI EPI T a 60 COnclis
157. ctice Chap 4 on EVIGS will Lesson 5 also be conducted at the same time Coaching test on EVIGS will also be conducted at the same time Chap 7 Annex B Appendix 2 Chap 6 Lessons 6 Using exercises in Chapter 4 Lessons 4 and 5 coaching practices will be conducted during prone and kneeling practices as concurrent activity Chap 6 Lesson 2 457 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy REMARKS TIME 04 Coach using the Including a Chap 6 outdoor simulator tutorial on how to Lesson 2 5 7 raining training area and the two Annex C practical periods of EO 05 05 Conduct EPGS Two practical Chap 5 mission management periods will be allowed following EPGS training Lesson 4 Chap 6 Lesson 4 Coaching during live Theory one firing 40 minute period but practice and assessment during the conduct of the range 07 Operate the ETSVCS Chap 6 Lesson 5 Participate in the Theory one conduct of an Eryx 40 minute period ti range practice briefing one 40 minute period Conduct live firing range ten 40 minute periods 458 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Chap 6 Lesson 3 Annex D to REI 7 OBJECTIVE ECTIVE REMARKS TIME REF EAE 305 02 Course package Chap 6 and written test Lesson 1 Chap 6 during prone and Annex A kneeling test Eryx Coach Test on During live firing Chap 6 Live Firing with ETSVCS Annex A
158. d and remove the clamp and cover Use handle of the protective envelope to pull the missile from the container d Keep the missile in the protective envelope during transportation in vehicles When the missile is dismounted tear off the protective envelope 17 Missile packaging should be inspected for damage and oxidization If in doubt about safety or reliability advise an Ammunition Technician and quarantine the suspect missile 18 The weight of Eryx missile packaging 1 as follows a logistic container with four missiles 122 kg B GL 385 010 PT 001 49 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy b empty logistic container 34 individual container with missile 22 kg d empty individual container 8 7 kg 19 Confirm by questions and practice THE PRONE POSITION Explain demonstrate and practice 20 The choice of fire position is determined by the tactical situation and is dictated largely by the ground and the skill level of the gunner Prior to adopting a fire position the gunner must take the following into account a the backblast area must be clear b the line of sight from the weapon to the target must be clear the firing post cannot be canted more than 10 degrees horizontally and d targets at ranges in excess of 300 metres should be engaged using the tripod for increased stability Since it provides most stability to the gunner the prone positi
159. d from the mission set TOOLS MENU FUNCTIONS Statistic Will calculate a percentage of missions Passed and or calculations Failed based on the missions selected in the Mission Results Table Opens a Mission Sort Dialog Box where the missions in the Mission Results Table can be sorted by using specified key fields from the table Filter Opens the Filter Dialog Box where missions in the table can be selected according to specified criteria View Edit Opens the View Edit Comments Dialog Box where Comments you can enter and save comments about a particular Mission Result NOTE The View Edit Comments menu item does not apply to Mission Set Summary it is only for the Detail Mission Results Window form 246 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator WINDOWS MENU FUNCTIONS Tile Vertically Tiles all of the open EMRM Windows vertically on the screen Tile Horizontally Tiles all of the open EMRM Windows horizontally on the screen Cascade Cascades all of the open EMRM Windows on the screen Arrange All Arranges the icons of minimized forms i e if some of the Mission Set Summary Mission Detail Import EPGS Results forms are minimized within the application Arrange All will bring the minimized forms together Minimizes the active EMRM Window Minimize All Minimizes all of the open EMRM Windows on the screen Opens a sub menu containing a list of the open EMRM windows
160. d not necessarily directly behind the missile tube 43 Hearing Conservation The firing of Eryx missiles without hearing protection can cause minor damage members of the detachment should wear hearing protection All must wear hearing protection when firing in confined spaces B GL 385 010 PT 001 31 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 44 Confirm by questions and practice CONCLUSION 45 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b play video clip Lesson 1 Part 4 Review of Lesson 1 confirm all main teaching points by questions practice d conduct safety precautions e summarize the lesson and stress that 1 understanding the weapon s characteristics 15 essential for its effective use 2 all gunners must know the names and functions of main components and 3 safety is everyone s responsibility f forecast the next lesson and g pack kit 22 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx LESSON 2 MAINTAIN THE SRAAW H INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach a detailed Eryx maintenance procedures and b the importance of maintenance for weapon reliability 2 Main Teaching Points a care and cleaning b weapon system check out procedure missile markings and identification and d destruction of weapon and missiles 3 Time One 40 minute lesson 4 Method Explanation 2 Stores a one Eryx per three gunners b one dummy missile per weapon one individua
161. d speed will cross a gunner s field of view much slower than a flank target The more the vehicle is turned head on to the gunner the slower it will be moving for the purpose of aiming Generally the gunner should aim forward if the target is closer than 200 metres and moving faster than 30 km h This corresponds to 15 km h at 100 metres and 7 5 km h at 50 metres 25 Annex D shows missiles being fired at a target moving with an angular speed of 67 mrad sec At this crossing speed the graphs show that on average the missile trails the point of aim by over 3 metres Assuming that a target is 7 metres long most missiles would miss For such extreme cases and only for them the point of aim 15 designated full forward 24 Confirm by questions THRUST STOPPING DEVICE Explain and demonstrate with the missile cutaway 25 The thrust stopping device TSD eliminates the possibility of rogue missiles It is a pyrotechnic device that opens a hole in the combustion chamber of the flight motor The hole releases the internal pressure of the motor rendering it inoperable Since Eryx uses the thrust of the motor to provide lift the missile grounds virtually instantaneously 26 The TSD can be triggered by either the firing post or the missile see Figure 6 1 It is fired a when the firing post 1 loses track of the missile over 6 consecutive scans 120 milliseconds or 2 detects an abnormal pitch or rotation speed of the missil
162. dards set for all trade qualification levels or development periods DP FORMAT 2 The information in chapters 2 3 4 5 and 6 is presented in lesson plan format including main teaching points The manual is organized as follows a Chapter 1 general information and teaching methods b Chapter 2 basic skills and information required by gunners to fire the SRAAW H Chapter 3 basic skills and information required by gunners to use the Mirabel Thermal imager d Chapter 4 basic skills and information required by gunners to train on the Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator EVIGS and during the conduct of training on optical and thermal tracking in order to prepare them for tracking tests e Chapter 5 basic skills and information required by gunners to train on the Eryx Precision Gunnery Simulator EPGS and during the conduct of training on optical and thermal tracking f Chapter 6 advanced skills and information required by instructors to conduct technical training to assume coach functions to be employed as a B GL 385 010 PT 001 1 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Range Safety Officer RSO to conduct EPGS training to teach thermal Armoured Fighting Vehicle AFV Recognition Level 1 and 2 and to prepare gunners to fire live ammunition and g Chapter 7 definition of gunnery training standards TECHNICAL DATA 3 Physical Characteristics SRAAW H has the followin
163. deo signal in order to allow its recording and playback on the Sony VCR It also provides the 354 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching capability for flipping the image up down and left right mirror image The mode switch has two positions RECORD and REPLAY The record position is used to record with the ETSVCS Sony VCR and the replay position is used to play back recorded video from the VCR to an external monitor or an external television Since the optical fixture can be mounted any orientation the two rotation switches are provided to flip and reverse the video image to match the actual scene LEFT RIGHT ROTATION UP DOWN ROTATION RECORD REPLAY MODE OFF OFF REPLAY AUDIO OUTPUT LIR G D VIDEO OUTPUT Figure 6 10 Transcoder Cohu camera see Figure 6 11 has three major parts the camera control unit CCU camera head and 50 foot cable The CCU is mounted underneath an interface panel The camera head camera optics forms part of the optical fixture The 50 foot cable couples the camera head to the CCU Two BNC connectors for video and audio see Figure 6 10 are provided on the interface panel for audio video playback on an external television d Microphone can be used to announce the gunner s name target range and direction The microphone has a holding clip so that it can be attached to the user s clothes When not in use the microphone clips into the foam next
164. dialog box where you can print the information from the active Detailed Mission Result Window Print Manager e EPETTJEEELEI 1 commenta have Deen entered Mey wi be dGapwyed here A hels Print Preview Window 264 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator E cee Close This Mission Button Closes the active Detailed Mission Results Window The window can also be closed using the close button X on the Windows title bar b Detailed Window Navigation Buttons The navigation buttons pictured below found on the Detailed Mission Results Window are used to navigate through the data in the Mission Results Table These navigation buttons function with a slight difference in the Mission Summary Window First Record Button Jumps to the mission first record in the table Previous Record Button Jumps to the previous mission in the table Next Record Button Jumps to the next mission in the table Last Record Button Jumps to the last mission in the table Refresh Mission Set Button Refreshes the mission set Flag Mission for Deletion Button Adds a red line to Flag for deletion record will be deleted on Close Un flag Mission for Deletion Button Removes the red line to Un Flag record will not be deleted on Close B GL 385 010 PT 001 265 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 27 The following information is co
165. dified 13 Alphabetic data entry is achieved by selecting the data field to be edited using the direction keys and pressing to highlight it The highlight will show the first character entry position in the data field normally the left hand position For each character to be entered find the numeric key which has the character one of three assigned to it Press 5 and the numeric key repeatedly This causes the three alphabetic characters to be selected cyclically When the required character is selected press the RIGHT direction key to accept the character and move on the next position When all required characters are entered in the field press ENTER to accept the complete entry or press 5 to abandon the entry leaving the data field unmodified B GL 385 010 PT 001 213 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy HEHHE HHHH ajajaja 1 PAUSE REW STOP PLAY HHRHH E ni E E jut DISPLY BACKLIGHT CONTROL BRIGHTNESS DVR TRANSPORT KEYS POWER AND GENERAL CONTROL KEYS ED EHE HELP PAUSE CURSOR DIRECTION CONTROLS REWIND POWER POWER OFF s POWER INDICATOR GREEN POWER APPLIED AVAILABLE RED FUSE BLOWN FLASHING GREEH POWER SUPPLY PROBLEM FAST FORWARD RECORD 1 DISPLAY SCREEN 1 KEYPAD DEDICATED HOT KEYS DELETE LAST MISSION GUNNER SELECT
166. dual training 1 Weekly testing on Intrest for thermal AFV Recognition Level 1 and 2 must recognize successfully 24 out of 30 items IAW Chapter 7 Annex E 2 Weekly supervised EVIGS training a Conduct supervised training AW Chapter 4 Lessons 4 to 6 intermediate tracking table kneeling with a minimum score of 7 10 IAW Chapter 7 Annex B Appendix 2 advanced tracking table thermal with a minimum score of 7 10 IAW Chapter 7 Annex B Appendix 3 3 Monthly supervised EPGS training a supervised EPGS training IAW Chapter 7 Annex C and Appendix 1 of this annex Eryx detachment training including the section leader 1 Monthly training on detachment drills and fire control IAW Chapter 2 Lessons 2 to 5 this could be done the same day as monthly supervised EPGS training as follows 462 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Continuous Training Appendix of Annex D to Chapter 7 PREREQUISITES STANDARDS TO ACHIEVE deploy from the section vehicle and dismounted including the use of Eryx rucksacks thermal imager and Mirabel external power source weapon system set up procedures including the thermal imager christen the ground and prepare a range card firing orders and fire control safe handling drills and misfire drills movement towards new positions 2 Tactical training of the section platoon and company semi annual or IAW the unit training calendar Using EPGS 15 p
167. e like a duck s bill etc In the case of slides or films avoid showing any national identification or other revealing details such as the faces of the crew for example aspects of the AFV should be shown e g one side view one frontal view and one three quarter view 29 Close up photos slides or film in which AFVs are literally elued to the lens may be used briefly at the beginning of the presentation of a new subject but should be avoided later For example details such as the shell casing ejection hatch on the T 62 are unimportant at the normal engagement range we would seek for Eryx 24 A logical teaching sequence is followed for AFV recognition On the battlefield it is quite likely that it will be the AFV turret that we will observe first from our position To maintain consistency the instructor should use the high to low method working from the turret roof down to the suspension 25 The instructor should commit a specific terminology to memory and avoid using jargon or odd expressions The Intrest trainer comes with a useful set of terminology 26 The instructor must not teach while seated in front of the class This position may be very comfortable but does not allow using and applying the principles of instruction The instructor should also make sure that his class size training area and training aids are correct and sufficient 2 Even if an instructor knows his subject by heart without the
168. e C conduct safety precautions d summarize the lesson and stress that 1 one instructor is able to handle 10 students 2 instructor function this contains 15 different windows 3 group training 4 eroup evaluation 5 during the creation of a diskette key disk do not forget to choose a default view in order to get good thermal images and B GL 385 010 PT 001 373 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 6 normally 4 to 5 targets are viewed during a 40 minute lesson 10 minutes per target being the suggested time e forecast the next lesson and f pack kit 374 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching LESSON 7 TRAINING CONDUCT WITH THE INTREST TRAINER INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach standards and principles for Intrest training in order to guide the instructor preparing an AFV Recognition lesson 2 Main Teaching Points a AFV identification standards b teaching methods and e training aids 3 Time One 40 minute lesson 4 Method Explanation 5 Stores a one multimedia projector per section b one screen per section and references 6 Preparation a review LFCO 21 13 b prepare evaluation guides terminology lists and answer sheets see Chapter 7 Annex E and prepare copies of LFCO 21 13 7 Miscellaneous The main points of this lesson are summarized in a Powerpoint presentation included in this manual B GL 385 010 PT 001 375 Eryx Short Range A
169. e or b when the missile 1 does not receive guidance orders from the firing post wire break or B GL 385 010 PT 001 309 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 2 detects a break in the wire ribbon running the length of the missile missile struck the ground ZT To guarantee the safety of the gunner the activation of the TSD is inhibited during the first 20 metres 720 milliseconds of flight in all cases except if the gunner grounds the missile 28 In addition if localization is lost the firing post will only fire the TSD during the first two seconds of flight After two seconds the missile is allowed to carry on ballistically 1x 0 1x 720ms 1x 25 Loss of Msl Firing post Abnormal pitch or rotation Wire break or safety cover Pig SS SSS SS SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS released Missile 4 il Msl struck i the ground 2 Figure 6 1 TSD Firing Criteria 29 Confirm by questions WARHEADS Explain and demonstrate with Annex E 30 Explosive Reactive Armour ERA ERA is an add on that increases the effective rating of armoured fighting vehicles AFVs against high explosive anti tank HEAT warheads It is a system 310 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching where two thin plates of armour are sandwiched betw
170. e remembered is that both simulators are tracking devices and are used mainly to assess tracking performance Thus on both EVIGS and EPGS a gunner on about half his missions can simultaneously experience a miss on the target and successful tracking A live missile firing 1s the only way to know if a missile really hit or missed the target 36 As simulators EVIGS and EPGS measure and record the movements of the weapon made by the gunner during an engagement B GL 385 010 PT 001 311 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy In the case of the EPGS being laser assisted measuring 1s more precise if the TSS is properly fitted on the target vehicle if the right target is selected the IM and if the correct angle of engagement is used This information is presented in the Mission Debrief window EVIGS and Debrief Mode EPGS in the form of tracking graphs 37 As defined in Chapter 7 to pass a series of ten test missions on the EVIGS a gunner must track within minimum standards eight missions in the prone position and seven missions in the kneeling position and with the thermal imager There is no such test or specific evaluation criteria for the EPGS The major purpose of the EPGS 1 to give Eryx gunners experience in engaging targets in conditions similar to those that would be found in combat The accurate simulation of crew drill procedures launch effects missile dynamics and weight shift and weight loss characteristics
171. e 5 5 is a sealed unit which contains a regulated power supply The Charger Converter receives a 110 V AC power supply via the detachable AC power cable and converts it to a 27 6 V DC power source for the following a output from the DC outlet connector to the IM via the DC power cable for normal EPGS operation from an AC power source or 182 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator b output from the DC outlet connector to the Battery Pack using the DC power cable for Battery Pack recharging 16 The Charger Converter is fitted with an ON OFF switch and POWER ON indicator It also has protection fuses which protect the AC input rated at 3 A and the DC outlet rated at 6 25 A WARNING DISCONNECT SEE MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SUPPLY BEFORE REMOVING LID SELECTION VOIR LE MANUEL AVERTISSEMENT D NTRETIEN POUR LA D BRANCHER L ALIMENTATION S LECTION DE LA TENSION LECTRIQUE AVANT DE RETIRER LE COUVERCLE LB wt 9 VOLTAGE SET TO 110V AC VOLTAGE R GLE 110V AC 2 Power ON indicator LED 1 27 6V DC Outlet DC Protection Fuse 6 25A Power ON OFF Switch AC Protection 3A AC Power inlet Connector Figure 5 5 Charger Converter B GL 385 010 PT 001 183 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 17 Cable Set The cable set see Figure 5 6 consists of three cables as follows a the IM GM cable for conn
172. e Eryx integrated training video one Eryx missile cut away and one and slides Preparation The instructor should check the weapons for serviceability check the OHP VCR and television for serviceability ensure that the video is set at the start of Lesson 1 and review information on other anti armour weapons and related tactics Miscellaneous Consider that The video section on Introduction will take 3 minutes The video section on Missile Description will take 2 minutes The video section on Weapon Operation will take 2 minutes Eryx is a complex weapon system with several technically sophisticated components Emphasis should be placed on the main components and their operation Paragraphs marked with an asterisk need only be taught at QL 4 DP 2A B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions The instructor must complete safety precautions on all weapons prior to the beginning of the class see paragraphs 36 to 38 9 Review Nil 10 Introduction Explain In 1916 the tank made its first appearance on the battlefield Shortly thereafter weapons appeared to counter them Since those first tanks were constructed of quite thin armoured plating relatively little damage was required to put them out of action The Germans used a 13 mm Mauser antitank rifle against early tanks and later a 37 mm artillery piece 1
173. e Eryx to be protected by the ground e g hills crests or embankments relative to the enemy s direction of advance since this will protect the position from observation and direct fire Effective Range of Weapons The effective range of the Eryx is from 50 to 600 metres In order to achieve maximum standoff Eryx should be sited with fields of fire that extend to its maximum range To accomplish this site the Eryx on reverse slopes and from defilade positions where possible Site Weapons in Pairs Eryx has a slow rate of fire and because of this it should be sited so that two weapons cover the same sector of the KZ This will ensure continuous anti armour fire in the KZ Flexibility Reconnoitre and prepare alternate positions in order to deploy Eryx wherever the armoured threat appears Mobility With good covered routes Eryx can be deployed to concentrate fire in another area Pre prepared positions and ammunition stashes will assist in this Co ordination Eryx siting should be co ordinated at the highest level possible generally the sub unit commander company He must ensure that his subordinates know and understand his plan and B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx intent The siting of Eryx and all anti armour weapons must be co ordinated with all other supporting plans Boundaries must not inhibit the employment of the Eryx The sub unit commander should make every attempt to site each Eryx personally 14
174. e Intrest trainer per section b one laptop multimedia projector per section and C references 6 Preparation a confirm that the Intrest trainer is operational and ready for use b confirm adequate space and power B GL 385 010 PT 001 363 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy review the Intrest User s Manual 10 441 000 MB 001 d prepare a training diskette e prepare blank lesson plans f prepare copies of the introduction and start up instructions and g prepare copies of the instructor s evaluation guide and terminology T Miscellaneous The following must also be taught also during this lesson a even when disconnected from the power source there 1 still high voltage inside the trainer b to prevent eye fatigue and muscle pain use of the equipment should be limited to a maximum of 30 minutes the trainer must not be exposed to magnetic fields and d since it contains many delicate electronic components the trainer must be transported with care or simply left permanently set up in a classroom CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions If any weapons are used in class or outside safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review Nil 364 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching 10 Introduction During Eryx gunner training at the unit the instructor will be required to teach lessons on thermal AFV Reco
175. e Start pr Wamdow os o amas 230 Mission Set Summary Window 243 Detailed Mission Results Window 2 2 2 263 ver dr anne eod 269 Downloading Results from the EPGS Instructor Module 270 CONC 286 DISPOSITION OF THE RETROREFLECTOR ASSEMBLY ON TARGET VEHICLES 289 ANNEX B TARGET PROFILE AND MASKING LEVELS 297 CHAPTER6 LESSON PLANS COACHING LESSON 1 TECHNICAL INFORMATION 305 XV B GL 385 010 PT 001 305 Conductor the Lesson nanna 306 BD 306 309 EN 310 EVIGS EPOS 311 Nue Dc ect CAR 315 LESSON 2 COACHING THROUGH SIMULATION CEN TGS 316 MAS CROC LOT INOUE Sia 316 Conduct oine i 318 General Coaching enen 319 Coaching Before FU ii 320 Coachne ANGT ENID Bod qnit 324 Common Gunner 326 CONCUSSION 329 LESSON3 CONDUCT RANGE PRACTICES 331
176. e debriefing session begins automatically This is indicated by the display of tracking error graphs in azimuth and elevation and the analysis that it provides B GL 385 010 PT 001 225 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 35 Graph Display Graph display shows tracking error graphs in azimuth and elevation for the selected mission Tracking errors during the launch phase and flight phase are indicated milliradians and metres respectively relative to the PPA The graphs display the transition point between launch and flight phases and the limits of acceptable tracking errors given by the score matrixes A time marker is provided in the form of a vertical line which can be moved along the time axis of the graphs using the LEFT and RIGHT direction keys Graph display is exited by pressing either ESC to return to Menu mode or the GRAPH VIDEO hot key to switch to video display mode The and keys can be used to move backward and forward through the available mission graph displays If the coach enters the debrief mode directly after a PURGE ALL STORED RESULTS the warning message DEBRIEF INVALID NO MISSION STORED PRESS ESCAPE TO CONTINUE is displayed over an uncompleted graph display until the ESC key is pressed 36 Video Display By pressing the GRAPH VIDEO hot key at any moment during Graph display the IM can be switched to Video display which shows the v
177. e modified for Leopard C2 B GL 385 010 PT 001 293 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 178 cm RETROREFLECTOR ASSEMBLY 70 in 2x SHORT STRAPS Ee e m NE and 1x LONG STRAP TURRET CENTRE LINE Figure 5A 6 LAV APC Coyote and LAV III 294 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex A to Chapter 5 BV 206 TAC TARGET PROFILE AND MASKING LEVELS 0 98 m 0 43 0 98 0 43 Figure 5 7 BV206 B GL 385 010 PT 001 295 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ATTACH THE HOOK OF THE SHORT STRAP UNDER THE GUTTER gt 33 Cm 13 ABOVE WINDSCREEN x FC T Figure 5A 8 LSVW 206 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX B TARGET PROFILE AND MASKING LEVELS M113A2 TARGET PROFILE AND MASKING LEVELS LOW OOO LOW Figure 5 1 APC M113 B GL 385 010 PT 001 297 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ILTIS TARGET PROFILE AND MASKING LEVELS i j f K _ LOW 0 37 m Figure 5B 2 ILTIS 208 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 5 GRIZZLY TARGET PROFILE AND MASKING LEVELS HIGH MED LOW Figure 5B 3 AVGP Grizzly B GL 385 010 PT 001 299 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy COUGAR TARGET PROFILE AND MASKING LEVELS HIGH 1 85 m MED 1 17 m LOW
178. e remembered however that one training criteria 1 to assess the gunner s capacity to react quickly and effectively Effective training must also cover advancing crossing and oblique targets at every distance within maximum range with and without the thermal imager 4 the gunner course the student will fire 40 missions see Appendix 1 On the instructor course the student will fire 20 missions see Appendix 1 primarily to practice data transfer and managing results between the IM and the computer The EPGS mission results form see Appendix 2 will be attached to the student course file This form replaces the EMRM results printout see Chapter 5 Lesson 4 when this software is not available In this case the instructor uses this form to compile results shown on the IM screen after each mission 5 At this stage of their training students should not fail more than 20 of their missions regardless of their fire position If the fail rate is higher supplementary training will be conducted on EVIGS PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 6 The following general considerations must be included in planning a typical EPGS exercise a at least one frontal approach b two to three lateral approaches usable from left to right and right to left two to three oblique approaches usable from left to right and right to left d every approach will be used at different but constant speeds not exceeding 50 km h every approach m
179. e right hand end of the trench and a tripod platform dug down in front of the trench instead of an elbow rest Trench dimensions are shown in Figure 2 22 B GL 385 010 PT 001 b FIRE MSL STORAGE Lesson Plans Eryx TRIPOD PLATFORM 2 4 4 1 6 _ 112 5 2 Figure 2 22 Eryx Trench Measurements Stages of Construction The Eryx trench is constructed using the same materials as the two person battle trench and follows the same stages of construction The addition of proper overhead protection OHP for the fire trench is important and should be done if at all possible The Eryx crew may have to engage targets when indirect fire 1 still coming down on a position and OHP will increase their survivability in this environment Construction is done in the following stages 1 2 Stage 1 Fire Trench fire trench is excavated 1 6 m long 0 75 m wide and 1 4 m deep or to armpit depth Dig a platform along the front edge of the fire trench to accommodate the tripod to a depth that allows the opening of the missile tube to remain above ground level Stage 2 Shelter and Missile Bay OHP See Figure 2 23 Revet the fire trench The trench is then developed further by first enlarging the left hand end as the shelter bay It should be 2 4 m long and 1 4 deep It is then revetted and covered with 0 5 m of packed soil The left hand end is then enlarged as the
180. eai 205 Automatic Power on BIT Built in Test 206 Post operational Procedures 209 asec sic 209 LESSON 3 OPERATION OF THE 211 211 Conduct ot 212 IM Menu System and 222222 213 X1V Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Status Displays and Hot 221 Mission Mode sabeis nn 223 enc mom 225 DISC e 227 totus dose 221 LESSON4 EPGS MISSION DATA TRANSFERS FROM THE INSTRUCTOR MODULE TO A PC AND DATA PROCESSING tee donnees panis 229 m 229 Conductorthe LESSON 232 Data Transfer Procedure with Hyperterminal anda Spreadsheet o a 295 Uit Pale DG auos ioo aa 235 Unit File Development Using a Spreadsheet 236 Unit File Transfers from PC to IM 236 Mission Results Data Transfers Using the EMRM EPGS Mission Results 44 237 Characters iC 238 Ti
181. echnical information with narrator and supplementary information is displayed in the left window In the supplementary information anecdotes similar vehicles and variants of the target are shown If the narration is not being used the instructor can present his target make it pivot vary the distance and use a thermal image Alternative representations may be used such as 1 Include photos if available 370 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching 2 Show optical or thermal IGO animations a choice of static and mobile targets could be viewed 3 Show 3 D images 4 Show videos if available 5 Add a sighting device The sighting device provides a choice of static and mobile targets realistically observed via the device selected d KRF Comparisons These allow the instructor to compare the target in question with another that resembles it The narrator provides information displayed in the left window Lesson Test This is primarily used to confirm stage It shows a certain number of prepared images where the optical thermal or thermal optical option may be selected The student chooses between current target different target or not sure debriefing allows errors to be reviewed image by image Note the instructor should do reviews during loading f Target Construction This is highly recommended and allows the instructor to promote participation during a stage 22 Group Ev
182. ecting the IM and the GM b the AC power cable for connecting a 110 V AC power source to the Charger Converter and the DC power cable usable in five applications as follows 1 connecting the 24 V Battery Pack to the IM 2 connecting a 24 V vehicle supply to the IM via TCCCS connector 3 connecting a 24 V vehicle supply to the Battery Pack for recharging 4 connecting the Charger Converter to the IM or 5 connecting the Charger Converter to the 24 V Battery Pack for charging 184 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator STK 61 50 99 146 8331 IM GM Cable PT PC 42100956 MFR U7976 STK 61 50 99 148 2352 DC Power Cable PT PC 42100957 MFR U7976 b 3 STK 6150 99 671 5093 v 110V AC POWER CABLE PT PC 42100958 MFR U7976 1 IM GM Cable 2 DC Power Cable 3 AC Power Cable Figure 5 6 Cable Set 18 Battery Pack The Battery Pack see Figure 5 7 is a sealed unit containing an assembly of dry gel lead acid batteries connected in series to provide a portable 24 V DC power source for the firing system Two connectors are provided on the Battery Pack B GL 385 010 PT 001 185 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 19 186 a DC outlet for connecting the Battery Pack to the IM using the DC power cable for battery operation and Charging input for connecting the Charger Converter or vehicle
183. ed at ranges over 150 metres The following steps must be taken when firing from the standing position a adopt a standard standing fire position with the left leg forward and the body weight evenly distributed over both legs 56 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx b bring the loaded firing post to the right shoulder and grasp it in the same manner as for the kneeling position hunch the body slightly forward to make as compact a position as possible and d consider all possibilities to find additional support for the body Figure 2 13 Standing Position 29 Video Clip Play video clip Lesson 3 Part 2 Fire Positions 30 Confirm by practice B GL 385 010 PT 001 57 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ONE MAN LOAD AND UNLOAD Explain demonstrate and practice 31 If the weapon is mounted on the tripod one gunner can perform all load and unload drills If the weapon is being fired from the shoulder the drill is modified 32 Load From the kneeling position and on the order LOAD the Eryx gunner must perform the following a b 1 1 33 Unload the following a b 58 verify that the safety catch 1 engaged place the firing post on the ground to the right of the left foot remove the missile tube from the field packing inspect the missile bring the missile to the right shoulder with the connectors facing down hold the missile with an all arou
184. eeling gunnery skills To progress to live fire gunners must pass the Kneeling Test detailed in Chapter 7 Annex B Appendix 2 STATIC TARGETS Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS disable wire pull freeze mission no launch obscuration disable wire pull freeze mission no launch obscuration 3 1 004 freeze mission no launch obscuration disable wire pull no launch obscuration B GL 385 010 PT 001 157 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CROSSING TARGETS LEFT TO RIGHT Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS disable WS WL flip mission disable WS WL disable WS WL flip mission flip mission CROSSING TARGETS RIGHT TO LEFT Practice and coaching disable WS WL disable WS WL OBLIQUE TARGETS LEFT TO RIGHT Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS 008 disable WS WL 158 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator OBLIQUE TARGETS RIGHT TO LEFT Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS TS 23 1 028 flip mission CONCLUSION 11 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm the main teaching points by questions summarize the lesson and stress that the point of aim for moving targets is at the bottom and 1 4 forward d forecast the next lesson and pack kit
185. een B GL 385 010 PT 001 365 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy keypad d mouse e mouse pad f headphones g dongle h diskette 1 cables and connections 1 power connector for the laptop PC and power cable 2 power connector for the monitor blue power cable and audio video cable 3 keyboard connector orange and keyboard cable orange 4 printer port the dongle is connected to this 5 headphones connector green and headphones wire green 6 mouse connector purple and mouse cable purple and 7 cable to connect the projector and operator s manual 14 There is no particular sequence for connecting the cables and wires Nevertheless ensure that the computer and monitor power cables are plugged in last Pay particular attention to the pins of the electrical connectors Pushing the ON switches on the computer and the colour monitor starts up the unit There is a brief wait until the virus check has finished After this the trainer offers a selection of 366 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching languages The system menu will then provide three different options 1 opening the verification trainer session b daily operating check video animation sound test etc and e shut down the system 15 Confirm by questions OPENING THE SESSION CREATING THE TRAINING DISKETTE Explain demonstrate and practice 16 Opening a session From the
186. een an explosive When the HEAT jet begins to penetrate it detonates the explosive which in turn drives the plates away from each other 31 ERA does very little to disrupt the warhead as it fires or disrupt the jet as it penetrates Instead because ERA 1 always mounted at an angle to the axis of penetration the movement of the plates constantly presents new armour to the jet As depicted in Annex E the jet must continue to penetrate the plates as it moves through them To the jet the thin plates appear to be many times thicker than they really are 32 The HEAT warhead must use much of its penetration power on the ERA As a result it does not have enough left to penetrate the main armour Thus ERA increases the overall armour rating of the AFV 33 Tandem Warheads To counter ERA modern anti tank weapons such as Eryx are equipped with a tandem warhead The front warhead detonates any ERA A pyrotechnic delay creates enough delay between the firing of the two warheads to ensure that the way is clear for the main warhead to fire unencumbered into the main armour of the target 34 Confirm by questions EVIGS EPGS 35 Evaluation Criteria EVIGS does not accurately model the flight characteristics of the Eryx missile As such the coach cannot use hit or miss as a basis for assessing gunner performance For the EPGS although it models flight characteristics more precisely the coach also cannot use hit or miss criteria What must b
187. een with a built in speaker The VCR monitor allows recording and immediate video playback at normal speed and in slow motion The VCR 15 located under the ETSVCS sunshield The sunshield prevents direct sunlight from reaching the monitor in order to have good display visibility in high brightness conditions The VCR recording speed must be set to SP in order to obtain the best recording quality When storing the ETSVCS secure the VCR into place by inserting the triangular piece of foam over top of the monitor and tape compartment and collapse the sunshield Secure the sunshield into place by screwing down the two holding bolts B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching CAMERA COHU IRIS KNOB SELECTION MODE DAY and NIGHT CLAMP CLAMP SCREW EYECUP Figure 6 11 Cohu Camera 12 Confirm by questions and practice ETSVCS INSTALLATION AND START UP PROCEDURE Explain demonstrate and practice 13 The following installation and start up procedure must be adhered to in order to protect the equipment from serious damage and provide good quality recordings a Ensure that the ETSVCS ON OFF switch is set to b Remove the eyecup from the Eryx eyepiece and install the ETSVCS optical fixture for either a left or right eyed gunner as required see Figure 6 12 When changing from a left to a right eyed gunner or vice versa rotate the optical fixture 180 degrees in order to avoid injury which may
188. ehind the missile tube extends 30 degrees each side of the firing axis caution zone extends 93 metres past the danger zone for HEAT missiles The danger zone is restricted for all personnel The caution zone is restricted for unprotected personnel i e personnel in the zone must have hearing protection helmet and fragmentation vest 25 Confirm by questions CONCLUSION 26 Conclude the lesson a Take questions from the class b Confirm the MTPs by questions 1 fundamentals 2 siting considerations 3 fire control 4 defensive tasks 5 offensive tasks and 6 safety considerations Summarize the lesson 1 The Eryx missile system has the capability to destroy all known main battle tanks out to a distance of 600 metres This characteristic alone makes it extremely valuable within the rifle platoon As with 92 B GL 385 010 PT 001 2 3 Forecast Pack kit B Lesson Plans Eryx all weapons the weapon is only as good as the position it fires from Teams thus need to maximize all the characteristics of Eryx by properly siting it on the battlefield taking into account fundamentals and siting considerations and by employing proper fire control with well defined tasks and in a safe manner order to enable gunners to do their job and bring about mass destruction of the armoured threat Remember that the flight of the Eryx missile is characteristically high and to the left after launch I
189. elect a file to store Start the results in When this is done click the LE button A file name is automatically set up based on date Y M D and time H M S and default EPGS Results file extension e g 20011115 085742 EPGS RESULTS The default file name may be Stark used just click button or another valid name can be chosen The buttons and other functional items found in step 1 of the Wizard are listed below 212 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator Download from EPGS File Mission Help a Step 1 Begin Download EPGS to ou are about ta dawnload Mission Results from the EPGS Instruction Module through a communications link First select a file in which to store the Mission Results To start the download click Start and follow the instructions in the next step Otherwise click Exit to avoid downloading and close this session Log Erk CTS DCO DSA Error RxD TxD OG OO Os Step 1 Mission Results File Name Selection a default file name is automatically set up based on date and time and default EPGS Results file extension The default file name may be used just click Start or you can create a new file by typing the name directly into the input box of the selector If the file already exists you will be presented with a message box asking to overwrite the existing file Log button to read the log file for download st
190. embles the mission result data set This consists of the obscuration setting the target tracking data the fall of shot error coordinates and firing result The mission result data set is sent to the IM for storage the battery backed SRAM on the microcontroller in the IM Mission Results When the mission sequence is completed the IM automatically enters debriefing mode which the mission result and mission B GL 385 010 PT 001 193 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy analysis are displayed on the IM The firing result component of the mission result hit miss ground wire break etc 1s displayed as text on the IM Mission analysis can be displayed either as tracking error graphs or by video replay of the mission selectable by the instructor The results of up to 1500 training missions can be stored in memory and reviewed as tracking error graphs using the IM menus and prompts The video recordings of the last 3 training missions can also be stored in memory and reviewed using the IM menus and control keys 21 Confirm by questions TECHNICAL DATA Explain 28 The following table shows the main characteristics related to employing EPGS CHARACTERISTICS RANGE Temperature range Storage 20 to 40 C Operating 10 to 30 C Scanner field of view 160 milliradians Target angular position 0 2 milliradians resolution Target range resolution 30 metres up to 600 metres Target later
191. ement or external influences Vulnerability The gunner must maintain his point of aim throughout the missile s flight and is therefore vulnerable during an engagement Vulnerability can be considerably reduced by choosing a proper fire position 19 Confirm by questions WEAPON DESCRIPTION Explain and demonstrate 20 Knowledge of Eryx components is important for safe operation and maintenance of the system Eryx consists of four major components a tripod 6 1 kg b firing post 5 kg e missile in field packing 13 3 kg and d thermal imager 3 4 kg 2 Confirm by questions 225 Tripod The tripod is constructed of a lightweight alloy It supports the firing post when used in the prone position and consists of the following components see Figure 2 1 letters of following sub paragraphs also refer to letters in the figure a supporting platform supports and secures the firing post to the tripod B GL 385 010 PT 001 13 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy b 14 firing post locking lever locks the firing post to the supporting platform traverse handle lock locks the traverse handle in place traverse handle controls tracking in azimuth traverse assembly pivots 360 degrees elevation unit has a 10 degree range of motion elevation handle lock locks the elevation handle in place elevation handle controls tracking in elevation tripod legs 3 support the tripod
192. enerate further interest by having one team assess another to isolate strengths and weaknesses and 6 B GL 385 010 PT 001 General Information and Teaching Methods d must ensure that competitions are simple and realistic and that they exercise specific skills CLASSROOM DRILLS 11 Prior to the start of all lessons the instructor shall divide the class into teams of two or three as necessary Ideally there should be no more than ten students per instructor Each team and the instructor should have a weapon system B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CHAPTER 2 LESSON PLANS ERYX LESSON 1 DESCRIBE THE SRAAW H INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim teach a the role and characteristics of the Eryx to better understand its capabilities b weapon operation in order to improve gunner drills and Eryx safety precautions and considerations 2 Main Teaching Points a role and characteristics b weapon description weapon operation d safety precautions and considerations 3 Time Two 40 minute lessons at 1 without missile and weapon operation One 40 minute lesson is required to teach para 29 to 31 at DP 2A 4 Method Demonstration and practice 5 Stores a one Eryx including Mirabel Thermal Imager per two gunners B GL 385 010 PT 001 9 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 10 b one dummy missile per weapon one VCR and one television on
193. eport BACKBLAST lens cover AREA CLEAR Disengage the safety catch move the safety cover aside and put thumb on the trigger button Report ON 10 The coach gives the order FIRE Press the trigger button and hold it down 11 The coach gives the order UNLOAD Close the safety cover engage 5 the safety catch depress the missile locking lever and repeat UNLOAD Repeat UNLOAD Flip the thermal imager power Remove the empty missile switch to STANDBY tube from the firing post close the lens cover and report CLEAR Repeat CLEAR and report ERYX READY B GL 385 010 PT 001 435 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX B EVIGS GUNNERY STANDARDS RESULTS REMARKS 2 1 NOTES 2 3 AND 4 Familiarization Taught during DP 1 to all soldiers Introduction to firing at static targets Practices conducted IAW Chapter 4 Lesson 3 as follows exercise 1 x 5 then proceed with exercise 2 3 and 4 5 x each No test Taught during DP 2A to Eryx gunners Qualification for prone firing with tripod Practices must be conducted IAW Chapter 4 Lesson 4 as follows 5 crossing target missions advancing target mission 4 oblique target missions and review targets for a total of 14 missions x 5 repetitions for a total of 70 Test found in Appendix 1 to this Annex Taught during DP 2A to Eryx gunners Qualifica
194. er application or a hardware problem on the local machine DTR Data Terminal Ready Lights up when the RS 232 line is ready to receive from the IM Note this is DTP in the new EMRM version RTS Request to Send For hardware flow control A line condition on the port to signal the IM to send data Note this is DDE in the new EMRM version B GL 385 010 PT 001 279 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 40 Mission Results File Viewer The Mission Results File Viewer pictured below can be opened by clicking the Results button from Step 4 of the Download from EPGS Wizard or by choosing the MISSION and VIEW MOST RECENT RESULTS option from the Download from EPGS Wizard Menu Bar This viewer lets you see the most recent Mission Results of the most recent EMRM Mission Results c tmpstuff toto789 EMRM_ CS MSN _NOLDATE TIME SCORE PASS FAIL 31 11 N071333 11 08 21 0 FAIL ID SURNAME SERVICE NUMBERINITIALS RANK GNR B LUCHER KS8332554 JR INS FROSTE 7910943105 CAPT TARGET SOUND WS PULL LAUNCH OSBC LAUNCH MOTOR FAIL FLIGHT MOTOR FAIL WIRE BREAK TARGET ASPECT TARGET MASKING RING POINT LAY RECCE ON OFF OFF NONE RANDOM RANDOM AANDOM LEFT VIEW NONE TRIPODLON TARGET RANGE TARGET SPEED TARGET BESRING MISSION RESULT FALL OF SHOT AZIMIITH FALL OF SHOT ELEVATION MIN ELAPSED TIME 107 0 2006000 30 028655 5RMD 0 0 00 38 SAMPLE NO AZIMUTH ERROR ELEVATION ERROR
195. er troops and weapons in the area Security 1 all around defence from front to rear and the flanks and 2 must account for the defence of rear elements echelons by designating secondary arcs and prepared to tasks d Full Integration of all Weapons 1 Eryx fire must be co ordinated with other weapons systems to ensure each systems characteristics are maximized while keeping their limitations in mind and 2 Eryx must be co ordinated with all resources e g obstacles and minefields since this will greatly increase the effects of firepower Concentration of Force 1 employ enough fire power at the right place at the right time 2 to be accomplished by Eryx deployment on the battle field or inclusion in tank hunting teams as well as 3 targeting specific enemy vehicles to destroy his cohesion such as command vehicles engineer vehicles etc 12 Confirm by questions B GL 385 010 PT 001 81 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy SITING CONSIDERATIONS Explain 13 In addition to these Eryx fundamentals there are several considerations that a commander must apply when siting Eryx positions on the ground 82 Enfilade Eryx should be sited to fire over a narrow arc on the flanks of enemy armour Even though the Eryx warhead can penetrate a main battle tank from the front this should be avoided when possible as the armour is thicker in the front Defilade Site th
196. ercentage of passed and failed missions The missions in the table can be filtered and exported to a new or existing mission result database file Detailed Results The EMRM can also display up to ten Detailed Mission Result Windows simultaneously By opening the mission result s in a Detailed Mission Results Window the user can view detailed information about a particular mission including 1 identification of the Gunner Instructor and Date Time of the mission 2 mission score result and pass fail indicators B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator 3 gunner s azimuth and elevation tracking errors plotted on a standard grid and 4 icons graphical representations for simulation and mission parameters Adding Comments The Detailed Mission Results Window provides the instructor with a dialog box where comments about that mission can be entered and saved f Printing Results The Detailed Mission Results Window also provides the instructor with a dialog box where print options can be selected to print the detailed mission result 21 EMRM application uses three windows The Start Up Window the Mission Set Summary Window and the Detailed Mission Results Window THE START UP WINDOW Explain and demonstrate Mission Results Hanaga Start Up Window 22 This Start Up Window 1s the first screen presented by the EMRM application As the first screen the
197. ere are two training aids available distinct but having the same functions a Use of the HyperTerminal application and a spreadsheet normally already installed in the computer b Use of the EPGS Mission Results Manager software available on a CD ROM format that can be loaded on a computer The EMRM assumes both HyperTerminal and spreadsheet functions and in addition provides numerous other management applications see paragraph 19 and following 5 Stores a one IM with Charger Converter and related power cables 2 b one RS232 cable cross over serial port with 9 pins Null Modem type of which both ends are female one per section with HyperTerminal and spreadsheet or the EMRM CD ROM version 2 0 dated 30 Nov 01 per section d one projector multimedia with screen one extension cord with a fused power cable f references 6 Preparation a confirm that the IM is mounted and ready to operate b confirm adequate space and power 230 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator check if previously recorded missions are available in IM memory d if EMRM is used make sure that the software is properly loaded on the PC make sure that the multimedia projector is properly connected to the PC and that the image format 1 set up f leave the RS232 cable unplugged and at reach for the demonstration and g review the EPGS Operator s Manual C 10
198. ered cord winder and clutch mechanism built into the front of the MTA One end of the wire pull cord is attached to the front weight During the missile flight phase of a mission the motor applies a controlled pull to the dropped front weight via the wire pull cord giving the gunner a sensation similar to that of the pull of the guidance wire of the missile in flight The gunner must resist the movement as though resisting the pull from the guidance wire 8 Sounds of the missile launch motor and flight motor are generated electronically by the microcontroller in the MTA The sounds are amplified by circuits in the MTA and reproduced by a speaker built into the side wall of the MTA Firing Post The EPGS Firing Post item 10 replicates the functions of the Eryx weapon firing post The gunner s eyepiece trigger button safety cover and safety catch are in the same physical B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator locations The EPGS firing post has a sealed enclosure which contains the following 1 Optical sight system with graticule 2 Computer system for mission control 3 Infra red scanner for target acquisition and tracking 4 Cathode ray tube CRT for display of missile flare simulation in the gunner s sight view 5 Position sensors for sensing azimuth and elevation movements of the firing post during target acquisition tracking and engagement 6 Cant sensor
199. eur SOUS HORS TENSION Poign e de transport Indicateur DEL MISE SOUS TENSION Sortie 27 6 V c c Fusible de protection c c 6 25 A Interrupteur SOUS HORS TENSION Fusible de protection c a 3 A Connecteur d entr e de courant alternatif Vis de ventilation Figure 5 11 Controls and Indicators Battery Pack and Charger Converter 204 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator 24 Confirm by questions START UP PROCEDURES Explain and demonstrate 25 Pre start Checks Prior to switching on the FSS carry out the following checks a Ensure the safety cover on the firing post is down over the trigger button and that the safety catch is down to secure the safety cover in place If an AC power supply is to be used to power the firing system check the Charger Converter AC voltage label to confirm it 1 set correctly for the AC power supply to be used Do not connect the AC power source until this is done Check that the power output ON OFF switch on the power source to be used Battery Pack Charger Converter or 24 V DC vehicle is set to the OFF position Check that the cables are connected correctly and that each cable connection is secure If the GM is to be fired from the tripod check that the firing post tracks smoothly in azimuth and elevation with ample slack on the IM GM cable 26 Power on Power the FSS on as follows a If AC power is to be used to power the FSS
200. exported to the PC for manipulation using spreadsheet application software a Start HyperTerminal as detailed in sub paragraph 11 5 b Then follow the same procedures as used for Mission results data transfer except this time select IM menu 18 SAVE UNIT FILE TO While the data 15 being transferred the IM displays the message SAVING UNIT FILE TO PC and a bar display which periodically updates to indicate data transfer progress On completion the IM displays the result of the load operation Pressing ENTER clears the display and returns to the previous menu The PC displays the unit file If the IM screen displays either NO PC DETECTED CHECK CABLES PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE or PC NOT READY TO RECEIVE PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE or the PC does not display the unit file check cable connections reset the PC configuration settings to their factory settings via the RESET DEFAULTS option at menu 52 and repeat the procedure If it still does not work return the unit to the approved maintenance authority 14 Confirm by questions and practice B GL 385 010 PT 001 235 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy UNIT FILE DEVELOPMENT USING A SPREADSHEET Explain 15 In addition to adding instructors and gunners through the IM keypad instructor lists and gunner lists can be generated in a spreadsheet and exported to the IM UNIT FILE TRANSFERS FROM PC TO IM Explain demons
201. eze mission no launch obscuration 2 1 001 disable wire pull freeze mission no launch obscuration 3 1 003 disable wire pull freeze mission no launch obscuration 4 1 019 disable wire pull freeze mission CONCLUSION 13 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm the MTP by questions summarize the lesson stress that the point of aim for static targets is at the bottom centre B GL 385 010 PT 001 149 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy d forecast the next lesson and e pack kit 150 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator LESSON 4 FIRE PRONE PRACTICES INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To develop fundamental tracking skills from the tripod in prone position 2 Main Teaching Points Engage a crossing targets b advancing targets and C oblique targets 3 Time Eighteen 40 minute lessons 4 Method Each practice consists of firing five repetitions of the same mission in accordance with criteria detailed at Chapter 7 Annex B total of 70 engagements Students are to rotate after firing five repetitions each A debrief is to be given following every repetition series can be repeated to practice weak areas 5 Stores One EVIGS per four gunners 6 Preparation The instructor should start all the EVIGS and run several missions on each to ensure that the simulators are serviceable Mission parameters are to be
202. fety 2 location of medical assistance and safety vehicle and 3 the nature of the exercise the sequence of events and any administrative instructions and obtain permission to fire from range control if required 28 Confirm by questions 29 Conduct of Exercise The following is a generalized sequence of events for an Eryx firing exercise The procedure can be adapted to suit any range practice a Supervisory personnel ammunition party communicators target operators FCS Technician and sentries take up their positions Some of the sentries may have to be in position quite early as their posts may be a considerable distance from the firing point B GL 385 010 PT 001 339 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy b The gunners are brought to an assembly area The sequence of gunners is determined The range briefing is issued The first relay is sent to the ammo point where missiles are issued During the conduct of the practice only three relays will be in possession of missiles one on the firing point one waiting to go on the firing point waiting zone and one in the process of drawing missiles ammo point Each relay 15 sent to the waiting zone where it 1 inspected by the waiting zone ARSO As soon as the inspection is completed the ARSO will advise the OIC RSO The OIC will then give the order to proceed with the firing and relays will proceed to the firing point s as directed The fl
203. firing from the tripod the gunner must adjust his fire position to engage targets outside this arc and refrain from firing when contorted 14 Confirm by questions and practice 15 Aiming and Reticule Pattern Explain The optical sight see Figure 2 16 has a field of view of 230 mils 3 power magnification and an eye shield to provide proper eye relief and comfort to the gunner It also has a reticule which includes the following a Large Crosshairs 100 x 100 mils b Central Crosshairs twice the thickness of the large crosshairs measuring 11 x 4 mils This corresponds approximately to a tank 6 6 metres long x 2 4 metres high at a range of 600 metres If a tank target appears larger than the central crosshairs it is closer than 600 metres and can be engaged If the target appears smaller than the central crosshairs it 1 beyond 600 metres range and cannot be engaged see Figure 2 17 Pre Aim Arrow located 10 mils below the centre of the crosshairs used to aim and track prior to missile launch Weight shift and weight loss at launch automatically causes the centre of the crosshairs to align on to the point of aim However when the weapon system is used on the tripod this alignment movement will be less important 4 to 5 mils because of the stability gained with the tripod Also B GL 385 010 PT 001 65 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy firing with the Thermal Imager Mirabel on the tripod will add more
204. for sensing cant angles of the firing post during target acquisition tracking and engagement 7 Switch sensors for sensing the safety catch the trigger button and thermal imager if fitted 8 Miniature video camera monochrome for collecting the gunner s sight view during target acquisition tracking and engagement 9 The optical sight system contains an optical telescope with X3 magnification AII training mission sequences are controlled by the computer in the Firing Post This computer has the executive control software and missile flight equation for modelling the Eryx missile in flight target tracking assessing the Preferred Point of Aim PPA during a mission and determining mission results B GL 385 010 PT 001 179 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 13 180 10 A 28 V DC power source is provided for the complete GM from the IM via the IM GM cable This cable is connected to the Firing Post connector This cable also carries the data link between the IM and GM and the video camera signal to the IM Instructor Module IM The IM see Figure 5 4 is a single unit which has the following main parts a Power supply assembly provides electrical power to the FSS and accepts power from a single 24 V DC battery pack vehicle or charger IM internal power distribution can be inhibited by the IM software to allow power saving sleep mode during idle periods Microcontroller the centra
205. g Report DND 2053 see Annex J 55 Novice gunners be extremely intimidated by the Eryx because of its technological complexity and destructive capability Before live fire the instructor should make every effort to instill confidence and determination in the gunner 56 Confirm by questions and practice CONCLUSION 57 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class B GL 385 010 PT 001 329 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 330 b confirm all main teaching points by questions and practice conduct safety precautions summarize the lesson and stress that 1 unsupervised EVIGS EPGS training will not develop gunnery skills in untrained soldiers 2 the coach must be an expert on all aspects of Eryx gunnery and 3 every EVIGS EPGS mission must be debriefed forecast the next lesson and pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching LESSON 3 CONDUCT RANGE PRACTICES INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach a the correct procedure for conducting an Eryx live fire practice and b the importance of safety on the range 2 Main Teaching Points a responsibilities of the range staff b conduct of a range and Eryx range practices 3 Time One 40 minute lesson 4 Method Explanation demonstration and participation in the conduct of a live firing range 5 Stores Demonstration Eryx range and equipment 6 Preparation The instructor should review
206. g characteristics a b diameter of the missile 137 4 mm diameter of the main warhead 136 mm weight 1 firing post S kg 2 tripod 6 1 kg 3 missile in field packing 13 3 kg and 4 thermal imager 3 4 kg guidance semi automatic command to line of sight SACLOS tracking optical steering thrust vector control applied at the missile s centre of mass guidance wire two insulated copper wires surrounded by a Kevlar jacket range 1 minimum 50 m B GL 385 010 PT 001 General Information and Teaching Methods 2 maximum 600 m missile velocity 1 at launch 18 m sec and 2 at 600 m 245 m sec rate of fire 3 to 4 missiles per minute operating conditions 1 temperature 31 C to 51 C and 2 firing restrictions a 10 degrees in yaw and b 45 degrees in pitch flight time 1 to 50 m 1 2 sec 2 to 100 m 1 6 sec 3 to 300 m 3 0 sec and 4 to 600 m 4 3 sec missile roll speed at launch revolution 5 5 rotations sec flight motor ignition 160 milliseconds after ignition of the launch motor 0 5 m from the missile tube battery life once activated 8 sec mass of front warhead 83 g mass of main warhead 3 5 kg and B GL 385 010 PT 001 3 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy r maximum rate of missile angular correction 100 mrad sec 1 mrad 1 mil 4 Missile Initiation The Eryx weapon
207. g is a list of items that can be accessed from the menu bar of the Mission Set Summary Window 5 Mission Results Manager Mission Set Summary File Edit Missions Tools Windows Help Mission Results Manager Menu Bar B GL 385 010 PT 001 243 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy FILE MENU FUNCTIONS Open Mission Opens an existing Mission Set file and populates the Set Mission Results Table with mission results records from that Mission Set Contains a sub list of files previously opened Selecting one of these items will open that mission set Close Current Closes the current open mission set that is populating Mission Set the Mission Results Table prompting to save any unsaved information Open Selected Opens the currently selected items in the Mission Mission Details Results Table into Detailed Mission Result Windows Close all Mission Closes all Detailed Mission Result Windows If no Details detailed windows are currently opened this option will be disabled New Mission Set Creates a new Mission Set file The Save As dialog box will appear and you can name the new empty mission set Save Mission Set as Saves the current mission set as a new project file or saves mission results that are currently selected in the Mission Results Table or a set of filtered results to a new project Append Mission Set to Appends adds mission results that
208. gnition Level 1 and 2 It is thus very important that the Eryx instructor knows how to assemble the Intrest trainer open a session and create a diskette and then conduct group training and group evaluation during Eryx gunner qualification in accordance with LFCOs 21 13 and 23 16 GENERAL INFORMATION AND ASSEMBLY OF THE TRAINER Explain demonstrate and practice 11 General The Intrest reconnaissance trainer fills a need for AFV and AC identification in the Canadian Forces Held by most combat units it allows soldiers of all ranks from various types of units to identify optical and thermal images of vehicles and aircraft at Levels 1 2 and 3 and at the specialist level It is produced in the United Kingdom and comes with terminology and voiceover narration in French or English It contains a selection of about 192 targets that may be grouped depending on the standards for the level desired One instructor is able to handle 10 students 12 The program consists of 4 multifunction stages a the lesson b repetition evaluation and d games 13 Assembly of the Trainer The Intrest software can be installed in any current laptop or PC and viewing can be done through a normal monitor or with a multimedia projector and screen The instructor should already be familiar with the equipment used to support this training 1 a laptop or PC with Intrest software installed b colour monitor and or multimedia projector with scr
209. gure 3 10 The Diurnal Cycle 24 Sometimes the radiated temperature of the target reaches the same temperature as the surrounding grass and leaves making it blend in with the background However usually in sunny day cycles the target does not reach night time background temperature before the sun rises once again to restore the heat cycle As the sun rises the cool background warms up rapidly to exceed the target temperature This point where the background temperature passes the target temperature is called diurnal crossover and it happens in the morning and afternoon When the morning crossover occurs the background appears brighter than the target in the thermal imager display giving the target negative contrast The opposite occurs in the afternoon giving the target positive contrast in the thermal imager The time of day when these crossovers occur depends on various factors such as the time of year temperature weather and cloud cover The gunner should be aware that the same target will look very different in the thermal imager display at different times of the day or night 28 Confirm by questions EFFECTS OF WEATHER AND OBSCURANTS ON THERMAL IMAGERY Explain 29 Falling Precipitation Since IR energy does not transmit well through air filled with water droplets falling precipitation including rain fog and snow tends to reduce the transmission of IR energy from a target vehicle to the thermal imager If the precipitation
210. h the right hand and pull the weapon firmly into the body and tuck the elbows into the body to increase stability Figure 2 12a Kneeling Unsupported Position 27 The following steps must be taken when adopting the kneeling supported position with tripod see Figure 2 12b a carry out the steps detailed at paragraph 21 sub paragraphs a to e adopt a standard kneeling position and place the left leg in front of the rear left leg of the tripod aligned with the centre of arc place the right leg between the two rear legs of the tripod and force the right knee outward to form a right angle to the centre of arc B GL 385 010 PT 001 55 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy d the right foot can be used as a seat for rest however during tracking the buttock must be raised in order to avoid jerking during tracking and to allow free rotating movement of the chest right shoulder against the launching tube body weight transferred to firing post handles elbows down during tracking f ensure that the field of fire 1s free of obstacles and g place either the left or right eye on the eye piece Figure 2 12b Kneeling Supported Position with Tripod 28 Standing Position All options must be considered prior to adopting this position see Figure 2 13 as it requires advanced training and skill to successfully engage a target while standing Firing from the standing position should not be attempt
211. hat occurred in the mission C Enable Aim Point Disable Aim Point Activates or deactivates a fluorescent point of aim on the target to assist novice gunners On missions with multiple targets the operator can select which target is to be engaged by disabling and enabling targets When re enabled the next target is selected d Missile Malfunction Calls up a sub window to select a simulated malfunction to occur on the mission being fired 1 Launch Motor Failure Simulates a launch motor failure 2 Main Motor Failure Simulates a main motor failure B GL 385 010 PT 001 143 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 3 Wire Break Simulates a wire break at 350 metres 4 None Causes the next mission to fire normally Enable WS WL Disable WS WL Activates or deactivates the weight shift weight loss f Enable Wire Pull Disable Wire Pull Activates or deactivates the wire pull system g Start Mission End Mission Starts the next mission in the series or ends a mission being played without losing the debrief data h Freeze Mission Unfreeze Mission Freezes a mission so that static missions can be fired A mission cannot be frozen twice 1 Abort Stops the mission being fired and does not save the debrief data j Repeat Last Mission Replays the last mission fired k Change Mission Allows the operator to choose which mission to fire next from the selection of missions The sequence will then s
212. have been filtered in the Mission Results Table to an existing Mission Set Append Selected Appends adds mission results that are currently Missions to selected in the Mission Results Table to an existing Mission Set Delete Mission Will remove the files of a selected Mission Set completely erase the Mission Set from the system Print Setup Opens a Printer Setup dialog box where you can specify a Printer and Printer Options Print Mission s Displays a Print Preview of mission results that are currently selected in the Mission Results Table It can then be sent to the printer for a hard copy Print all Displays a Print Preview of all the mission results in Missions the Mission Set This complete report can then be sent to the printer for a hard copy 244 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator FILE MENU FUNCTIONS Export Will allow the user to Export Unit Information to CSV file format This CSV file can then be Uploaded to the EPGS Instructor Module IM NOTE This option is actually not available in this version of the EMRM Opens a sub list of items that enable you to import results from various sources Import from Mission Set Add missions from another EMRM Mission Set file into the currently open Mission Set Import EPGS Results Import missions from an EPGS Results File into an EMRM Mission Set Download from EPGS Download EPGS Results f
213. he ground B GL 385 010 PT 001 321 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Otherwise the PPA simulated in the firing post will be wrong and will lead automatically to a miss even if the gunner was aiming correctly The coach must also take into consideration that the virtual image that the EPGS firing post has of a target vehicle is always uni dimensional However if a target vehicle is using a steep slope 30 degrees this target will become tri dimensional and cause the virtual image and PPA to be lower than the target This too will lead to a miss even if the gunner was aiming correctly 29 The gunner must take up his point of aim with the pre aim arrow The weight shift and weight loss at launch will cause a realignment of the weapon so that the central crosshairs will be on the point of aim after the missile 1s airborne i E naa amp gS 1 T7 fe ERY 21 E 1 1 i m Figure 6 4 Point of Aim Low Profile Target 222 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching Figure 6 6 Point of Aim Oblique Target 30 Target Engagement The coach must ensure that the gunner adheres to the following sequence a estimate the distance to the target b pre aim the weapon with the pre aim arrow track the target to get a feel for its motion d breathe normally B GL 385 010 PT 001 323 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy e tense the body and press the trigger b
214. hich is taken into service and catalogued hand loading small arms ammunition in accordance with CFAO 50 18 or other cases when specifically authorized by NDHQ Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy FOREWORD 1 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti Armour Weapon Heavy is issued on the authority of the Chief of the Land Staff 2 It is effective upon receipt and supercedes B GL 317 020 PT 001 interim 3 Unless otherwise noted masculine pronouns contained herein refer to both genders 4 Suggestions for changes shall be forwarded through normal channels to the Infantry School Attention Chief Standards Officer vii Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy TABLE OF CONTENTS WARNING MISUSE OF WEAPONS AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVES 111 W OS a a iii Ammunition and Explosives eese iii FOREWORD itidem dea orto VII CHAPTER1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND TEACHING METHODS E 1 ec CLE 1 OCMC al dumb e annt 2 Organization of 04200000 5 PRACTICE Periodo ets 6 7 2 LESSON PLANS LESSON 1 DESCRIBE THE 9 jase te cig ete DN ut ERE 9 Conductor the 11 Role and Chara
215. ht loss at launch the gunner must have a stable fire position From the tripod the coach must ensure that the gunner a in prone position keeps both elbows off the ground and places as much body weight as possible forward onto the handles in kneeling position keeps both elbows slightly raised in order to place as much body weight as possible forward onto the handles and lifts the right shoulder and applies pressure to the side of the missile tube throughout tracking From the shoulder the coach must ensure that the gunner a hunches his shoulders and tucks both elbows tightly to the body to make as compact a position as possible and applies inward pressure to the firing post with both hands Video Clip Play video clip Coaching Points Confirm by questions and practice Point of Aim The coach must ensure that the gunner uses the preferred point of aim PPA for the target being engaged The aim point is always based on the visible mass of the target and depends on the target angular speed and distance refer to Chapter 2 Lesson 4 paragraphs 16 to 19 Figures 6 1 to 6 4 of this lesson and 10 412 000 000 Figure 5 1 The point of aim is the same for Eryx EVIGS and EPGS However both simulators have certain limitations which must be understood by the coach For the EPGS in particular the masking level must be confirmed and the right level selected if needed by the coach to reflect the reality on t
216. i armour Weapon Heavy WARNING MISUSE OF WEAPONS AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVES PURPOSE 1 This order outlines the Canadian Forces policy governing the use or misuse of Weapons ammunition and explosives WEAPONS 2 Firing or attempting to fire locally manufactured weapons obsolete service or foreign weapons or weapons used for display ceremonial or trophy purposes in museums messes parade grounds armouries or similar areas is prohibited except when specifically authorized by NDHQ 3 Attention 15 also drawn to the following references concerning offences connected with the use or misuse of weapons a National Defence Act Section 117 b Criminal Code of Canada Sections 82 to 106 and amp 103 59 AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVES 4 Tampering with or use of service and commercial ammunition or explosives for other than their designed purpose is prohibited 5 Except as prescribed in paragraph 6 the modification breakdown or sectioning of live ammunition for experimental instructional or any other purpose or manufacture of explosives 15 forbidden This prohibition includes a unauthorized interchange of fuses or primers or both iii B GL 385 010 PT 001 1V b experiments with blank ammunition to alter the powder charge or to introduce any other substance into the cartridge case or into the weapon with the approved cartridge experiments involving the use of altered propelling charges or bur
217. ice 12 Unpacking The EVIGS comes in three self contained cases with two weight catching baskets The three cases are as follows 124 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator a Main Case Assembly MCA 104 kg see Figure 4 1 b Instructor Case Assembly ICA 137 kg see Figure 4 2 and Gunner Case Assembly GCA 69 kg see Figures 4 3 and 4 4 13 Due to the weight of the cases extreme care must be taken when moving them to avoid injury Four personnel should be used at all times to move each case 14 Prior to unpacking the system must be at room temperature Condensation may form on the electronic components and damage them if the system is colder than room temperature when unsealed 15 unpack the EVIGS ensure that the cases are upright a b place the ICA on the table place the MCA next to the table d press the pressure release valve on the MCA and ICA remove the front rear covers of the and ICA and place them aside and f open the GCA and place it to the side of the MCA 16 Confirm by questions and practice B GL 385 010 PT 001 125 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy MCA EQUIPMENT DRAWER ASSEMBLY MCA LASER DISK PLAYER ASSEMBLY MCA DOS COMPUTER MCA UNIX COMPUTER Figure 4 1 Main Case Assembly MCA ICA ICA CONTROL OBSERVATION MONITOR MONITOR ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY KEYBOARD KEYBOARD IC
218. icle different areas can appear darker or brighter than others depending on various factors such as whether the vehicle has been running has fired its weapons or has personnel heaters on These constantly changing recognition cues can cause problems in target identification for the gunner LT Confirm by questions SOURCES OF INFRARED ENERGY Explain 18 The four principal sources of infrared energy as follows a solar heating b fuel combustion friction d thermal reflection 19 Solar Heat Solar heating effects occur mostly on the exterior of the body or hull of targets This type of heating highlights the target outline and overall shape of external features The outline of these features can provide helpful recognition cues to the gunner The shape cues are usually similar to the overall visible appearance of the target Unfortunately solar heating as a heat source for these cues is highly variable and the cues can be somewhat unreliable Variations can be caused by surface reflections weather atmospheric factors and solar heating changes during the course of the day As well the ability 114 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager of an object to absorb sunlight will cause variations Generally dark coloured objects absorb IR energy better than light coloured objects 20 Fuel Combustion Heat Fuel combustion heat originates in operating engines This heat is then conducted to the
219. ide the hull or apparent width of the vehicle in the case of an oblique target in half horizontally and divide each half again see Figure 2 18 The point B GL 385 010 PT 001 67 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy of aim will be A for a stationary or slow moving target 1 4 forward for a faster moving target C for a stationary or slow moving target 100 metres or closer or D 4 forward for a faster moving target 100 metres or closer A vehicle advancing toward your position is treated as a stationary vehicle as it has no angular speed left or right 1 i Y pr y i 16 2 1 tI I I Figure 2 18 Point of Aim 18 For low profile and hull down partially obscured targets point of aim is still based on the visible mass of the hull To reduce errors due to the thickness of the crosshairs the bottom of the crosshairs should be placed at the base of the target see Figures 2 19 and 2 20 Essentially it is better to aim low than high Ei Figure 2 19 Point of Aim Low Profile Target 68 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Figure 2 21 Point of Aim Oblique Target 19 Target Speed Explain Determining whether a target is moving slowly or quickly is a matter of judgement for the gunner A ru
220. ideo image of the gunner s TSV recorded throughout the mission The video picture 15 frozen paused at the frame which corresponds to the time marker line on the graphs but can be played forward at normal speed or run fast forward or backward While the video is paused the LEFT and RIGHT direction keys allow scrolling through the video frame by frame Slow motion playback can be achieved by holding down either the FAST FORWARD or REWIND transport keys Recorded video is stored for the last three missions If the AIM POINT MARKER had not been selected during these missions the PPA can be re injected in the debrief mode by pressing the AIM POINT MARKER key This function 1 only available if the missions have been recorded with MULTIPLE TARGETS set to 1 37 At any moment during display the GRAPH VIDEO hot key can be pressed to return to Graph display Repeated pressing of the GRAPH VIDEO key causes the IM display to switch between Video display and Graph display The video debrief session can be exited by pressing ESC If fast forward 1 pressed at the end of the current video recording the debrief video switches to the start of the next available video recording If rewind is pressed at the start of the current video recording the debrief video switches to the start of the previous available video recording 226 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator 38 If the coach tries
221. ift 1 seen as a shift of the crosshairs down of only approximately 6 mils d Forecast the next lesson Pack kit 164 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX A EVIGS MISSION DESCRIPTIONS 1 This Annex details the characteristics of every EVIGS mission stored on disk 001 for Eryx Instructors to use to develop a training plan for refresher or advancement training 2 The evaluation of each mission is based on the following criteria a G Good These missions are effective for gunnery training and can be used for evaluation because the point of aim is correct and the target motion 15 consistent b A Acceptable These missions can be used for refresher training but should not be used for evaluation because the target 15 erratic and the point of aim is questionable P Poor These missions are unsatisfactory for training because of poor visibility erratic target motion or incorrect point of aim Use of these missions should be avoided 3 The target action is described using more of the following abbreviations a RL right to left b LR left to right X crossing d A advancing R retiring and f O oblique B GL 385 010 PT 001 165 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy wes pm 2 G 15 Tetboara 3 G 25 4 G 300 LII M RM 50 STATIC TGT Very short msn
222. ile Wire Break represents a break in the wire for the current simulation 1 Mission Parameters Group Mission Parameters Group pictured below contains graphical representations icons of the actual mission parameter values found in a mission result record When a single mission result is selected in the Mission Result Table icons representing the values for the mission parameters of that mission become visible in the Mission Parameters Group Box This graphic representation makes it easy fora user to view specific details about the mission parameters for the selected mission result B GL 385 010 PT 001 259 Eryx Short Range Anti armour n nid MISSION PARAMETER The Mission Parameters Group Box A complete list of mission parameter icons 15 described below Please note that only one icon from each set will be visible in the Mission Parameters Group Box at a time For example if the firing position parameter is Shoulder for a selected mission only the icon representing Shoulder will be visible ICON TITLE TEXT DESCRIPTION LABEL Fire Posn Shoulder Position represents 5 shoulder firing position for the current simulation Fire Posn Tripod Firing Position represents a tripod firing position for the current simulation Leopard Target represents the target Leopard for the current simulation Target Target represents the target M113 for the current simulation Target Cougar Ta
223. ile to fly erratically Most misses can be attributed to last second jerks just before the missile reaches the target 44 Score The EVIGS and EPGS calculate a score based how far the gunner s point of aim has deviated from the correct point of aim during the launch and cruise phases To achieve a passing grade the curves must not exceed the limits as marked in blue and the score must be generally higher than 6 This criterion 1 presented in the Mission Result window of the EVIGS and in the Mission status bar right end corner for the EPGS 45 The instructor should use the replay graphs and score to debrief the gunner and assess his performance 46 Confirm by questions and practice COMMON GUNNER FAULTS Explain 47 Gunner faults can be divided into three categories launch phase cruise phase and live fire errors 48 Erratic Launch Phase This is usually caused by improper fire position a Prone Ensure that the gunner 1 keeps his elbows off the ground 326 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching 2 has his weight forward onto the handles and 3 locks his shoulder against the missile tube b Kneeling Without Tripod Ensure that the gunner 1 has his right knee perpendicular to the firing axis 2 has his left foot forward of his left knee 3 squats down on his right foot and 4 keeps his elbows tucked in to his body Kneeling with Tripod Ensure that the gunner 1 has his right
224. ink two rocket motors and tandem warheads Unlike TOW and Milan however Eryx is a comparatively light weapon designed to engage at short range with thrust vector control 14 These weight range and control characteristics profoundly affect the training approach necessary to develop gunnery skills Simple repetition of uncoached simulator missions will not develop the skills necessary for effective gunnery The required skills are exact and can only be learned through comprehensive and highly supervised training Accordingly the EVIGS EPGS coach must be highly conversant with all Eryx gunnery techniques See Annex A to this chapter for the ERYX coach test form GENERAL COACHING POINTS Explain 15 Definition A coach is a person who can inspire confidence and determination with gentle prompting and constructive correction 16 Qualities of a Coach A good coach is a patient b enthusiastic and alert 17 Above all else the coach must have expert knowledge on both the Eryx weapon system and the EVIGS EPGS simulators The coach must be able to answer questions on Eryx gunnery without doubt or hesitation B GL 385 010 PT 001 319 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 18 Eryx gunnery techniques were developed directly from analysis of the weapon s characteristics Consequently a comprehensive understanding of weapon operation will greatly enhance the ability of a coach 19 The Eryx weapon system has three uni
225. ion b What level should be taught Thermal AFV Recognition Level 1 and 2 C How much time does the instructor have Fourteen 40 minute lessons on the Eryx gunner qualification d What environment and training aids are available Normally the Intrest trainer models and slides as available in unit resources 20 Once the student knowledge level has been identified by a review or a test the instructor checks what the standard to be achieved is by consulting the course plan or by contacting the person in charge of the students To maintain progress the training is modified or a class may be split if the level of knowledge among students is too disparate However this possibility is very unlikely on the Eryx gunner course 2 The time available will govern the nature of the training session For the Eryx gunner course teaching five AFVs per 40 minute lesson is suggested Therefore in order to teach thermal AFV Recognition Level 1 and 2 the time allowed will be divided as follow AFV Recognition Thermal Signature Level Number of 40 min Lessons Total AFVs o a3 3 e 380 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching 22 It is best to teach AFVs consecutively with their variants Particular attention paid to certain details ballistic skirts cupola dorsal fins etc will allow some people to absorb the material quickly Comparisons using humour may also pique the interest of some students such as for exampl
226. ion set appending to existing mission set f Mission Results Table Basic Functionality Sorting Adjusting Column Width Search g advanced Sorting of mission results h filtering mission results 1 generating statistics j generating reports B GL 385 010 PT 001 269 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy k saving Mission Results as a new mission set 1 opening a mission result in the Detailed Mission Results Window m View Edit Comments n print detailed results and print results at once for each Detailed Mission Results Window 30 This lesson will focus on tasks b c a k 1 and m of paragraph 29 in that order The instructor must however become familiar with the other tasks which can be viewed in the user s manual on the EMRM CD ROM DOWNLOADING RESULTS FROM THE EPGS INSTRUCTOR MODULE Explain and demonstrate 31 In order to work with a new set of mission results you must first download these results from the EPGS IM Ensure that the RS232 Data Cable for connection to the IM 1 attached correctly and the upload menu is displayed on the IM Once the RS232 Data Cable is in place you can follow the step by step procedure listed below using the Mission Results Download Assistant Wizard 270 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator Download from EPGS File Mission Help a Step 1 Begin Download EPGS5 to You are about
227. ission Debrief window after every EVIGS mission or Debrief Mode automatically after every EPGS mission These are the main sources of feedback on gunner performance available to the coach From EVIGS Mission Debrief and EPGS Debrief Mode the coach can analyze gunner tracking by replaying the mission or by displaying 324 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching graphs which depict the gunner s actual point of aim in relation to the PPA NOTE The instructor should have the EVIGS Mission Debrief or EPGS Debrief Mode on screen as a demonstration 36 The mission replay feature can be an extremely valuable tool for coaching The instructor can use it to playback the mission in real time or frame by frame to point out gunner faults on the display monitor As such the gunner can see his errors for himself 37 The graph depicts the gunner s point of aim in relation to the correct point of aim as a function of mission time The instructor can analyze the curves and determine exactly where errors were made and how severely the errors would have affected the missile s flight 38 The zero line of the debrief graphs corresponds to the correct point of aim on the target The curves have two parts a Launch Phase For the first 2 4 seconds the graphs are red This part is calculated based on the gunner s angular deviation from the correct point of aim in milliradians mrads b Cruise Phase For the remainder of the mission the gr
228. ission Parameters group boxes at the bottom of the screen When two or more results are selected in the table the icons will not be displayed b Selected missions can be saved as a new project or appended to another project file or a report can be printed Selected mission results up to ten can be simultaneously opened in ten separate Detailed Mission Result Windows In order to do this hold down the CTRL key and select the required missions The last mission you select should be double clicked You can also open multiple mission results in detailed windows by choosing the Open Selected Mission Detail s option in the File Menu Sorting Missions Using the table mission results can also be sorted according to the column headings For example if you wish to sort the missions by gunner s name click on the Name header in the table The records will automatically be sorted click once for ascending again for descending You can also perform an advance sort on the mission results by choosing the Advanced Sort option in the Tools Menu For more information also see the Sorting the Mission Summaries tutorial Finding Mission s Located on top of each header the table are input fields When you type a character or character string the record pointer will advance jump to and highlight to the next record in B GL 385 010 PT 001 231 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 232 the tab
229. istic protective device will be added on the rear part of the missile tube Now in production this device will soon be in service Until this device is issued only the kneeling and standing position are authorized for live firing and personnel shall be within the 45 degree arc on either side of the tube see Figure 2 5 Safety distances related to the training practice TP missile are 12 5 metres on either side of the missile tube and 25 metres behind Safety distances related to the HEAT missile are 150 metres on either side of the missile tube and 100 metres behind B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx LOCATION OF GUNNER S HEAD N LOCATION OF ARSO S HEAD 125m ZONE 3 LOCATION OF LOADER S HEAD DANGER AREA IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE ZONE 2 ZONE 1 DANGER AREA IN THE VERTICAL PLANE Figure 2 5 Backblast Danger Area 38 Downrange Hazard Explain The arc of fire extends at an angle of 400 373 mils on either side of the firing axis This area must be clear of friendly troops However the engagement of a target with a HEAT missile at 150 metres or less will endanger the gunner For this reason the gunner must adopt a suitable firing position In peace time an anti fragmentation wall 61 cm high by 61 cm thick built up with sand bags or a trench shall be used when shooting HEAT missiles During peacetime targets closer than 150 metres shall not be engaged with HEAT missiles
230. ith each line having three numbers For example the first line could be 1 0 34 with a comma separating each number value with the following meaning 1 First Value Time point 1 EPGS generates a time point every 20 milliseconds and this should increment by 1 for each successive line 2 Second Value Azimuth 0 pixels This will be scaled to the appropriate milliradians or metres values on the Azimuth chart with a positive negative value meaning ahead or behind the PPA 3 Third Value Elevation 34 pixels This will be scaled to the appropriate milliradians or metres values on the Elevation chart 256 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator Azimuth Elevation Check Box Azimuth Elevation Values Azimuth Elevation Values 5 Simulation Parameters Group pictured below contains graphical representations icons of the actual simulation values found in a mission result record When a single mission result is selected in the Mission Result Table icons representing the values for the simulation parameters of that mission become visible in the Simulation Parameters Group Box This graphic representation makes it easy for user to view specific details about the simulation parameters for the selected mission result SIMULATION PARAMETERS The Simulation Parameters Group Box B GL 385 010 PT 001 231 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy h A complete list
231. king and e the importance of the sight picture and points of aim Main Teaching Points a hold aim and fire b TARGET and MISFIRE Time Two 40 minute lessons Method Demonstration and practice Stores a one Eryx per two gunners b one dummy missile per weapon one classroom target per weapon d one VCR and one television e one Eryx integrated training video and f one OHP and slides B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx 6 Preparation The instructor should a check the weapons for serviceability b place the classroom targets 6 metres from the weapons e check the OHP VCR and television for serviceability and d ensure that the video is set at the start of Lesson 4 7 Miscellaneous Consider that a practice must include one and two man drills b the video section on Aiming will take 2 minutes and the video section Firing will take 2 minutes CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions Conduct safety precautions as detailed in Chapter2 Lesson 1 9 Review instructor must review the following topics missile preparation fire positions and LOAD and UNLOAD drills 10 Introduction Explain Since Eryx is a short range weapon the time available for target acquisition and engagement is severely limited Once handling drills become second nature to a gunner targets can be engaged quickly and confidently thereby greatly i
232. l computer in the IM handles IM inputs and outputs keypad actions data transfers to from the GM data transfers to from a personal computer It has a battery backed Static Random Access Memory SRAM for storing up to 100 Gunner Identities and up to 1 500 mission results Digital Video Recorder DVR stores video images in compressed form of the last three missions recorded each of up to 20 seconds duration Used for the gunner debrief the DVR allows replay at normal speed fast forward reverse motion paused or frame by frame as required Display Video signals from GM camera Microcontroller or DVR are displayed on the IM If required the video output displayed on the IM can also be connected via the external video output connector to external PAL European standard video equipment for display or recording Keypad is a membrane type with an electro luminescent sub layer to give back illumination of the keypad annotation when used at night or in poor B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator light conditions Control of all FSS functions is achieved via the keypad RS232 Data Connection Mission data held in the Microcontroller SRAM can be downloaded to a PC via this connector This allows the PC to be used for detailed analysis and or long term storage of the data The RS232 connector can also be used for the transfer of Gunner and Instructor details between the IM and PC Video signal
233. l container and missile protective envelope per weapon d one VCR and one television one Eryx integrated training video f one metal label from a logistic container B GL 385 010 PT 001 33 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy g rags and wash basin for each weapon h one paint brush per weapon 1 one bottle of general purpose detergent one bottle of glycerol plumber s alcohol local purchase k one package of lens cleaning paper 1 bottle of lens cleaning liquid and m 20 litres of clean water 6 Preparation The instructor should a check the weapons for serviceability b check the VCR and television for serviceability and ensure that the video 1 at the start of Lesson 2 7 Miscellaneous Consider the following a the video section on the Test Set will take 2 minutes b the video section on Environmental Considerations will take 3 minutes and students should be seated semi circle CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions Conduct safety precautions as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 34 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx 9 Review The instructor must review main weapon components and phases of weapon operation 10 Introduction Explain Preventive maintenance ensures weapon serviceability and increases the weapon s operational life Particular care must be taken to avoid rough and careless handling of the missile which
234. l in all infantry units in sufficient numbers to enable them to bring to bear accurate anti armour fire power in conjunction with other weapon systems to defeat the worst case anti armour threat Eryx 15 the responsibility of the company or combat team commander since its maximum range does not allow it to influence the battle at higher level However its employment must be co ordinated by the battalion or battle group commander in his anti armour plan to ensure effective target engagement Eryx can also be used during offensive operations e g during a deliberate attack as part of the firebase to provide flank protection or to cut off withdrawing enemy or ambush their reinforcements FUNDAMENTALS Explain 11 When siting the Eryx are several fundamentals that must be considered a Depth 1 Must not only extend from front to rear but also flank to flank 2 Alternate positions with primary and secondary arcs must be reconnoitred and if possible prepared in advance 3 Depth of fire must also be considered within the Killing Zone KZ This can be accomplished by siting other longer range weapon systems such as tanks and TOW in offset positions covering the same area as the Eryx b Mutual Support 1 Eryx weapons should cover one another and 80 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx 2 Eryx fire positions should also be protected from dismounted infantry by providing mutual support from oth
235. le of thumb is that if it is difficult to stay on the point of aim centred on the visible mass aiming 4 forward is required It is probably necessary to aim forward for most targets except when they are near maximum range Oblique targets will appear to cross the field of view slower than flank targets The angular speed at which a target can be said to be fast moving is 17 milliradians second A milliradian mrad is almost equal to a mil which is a more familiar measure The following vehicle speeds correspond to 17 mrads sec at various ranges B GL 385 010 PT 001 69 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy a b f 50 metres 3 km h 100 metres 6 km h 200 metres 12 km h 300 metres 18 km h 400 metres 24 km h and 600 metres 37 km h 20 Video Clip Play video clip Lesson 4 Part 1 Aiming 21 Confirm by questions and practice 22 Fire Explain demonstrate and practice Once given the order FIRE the gunner must a estimate the distance to the target b pre aim the weapon with the pre aim arrow track the target to get a feel for its motion d breathe regularly tense the body and press the trigger button f hold the trigger button down throughout the missile flight g relax the body after launch h re aim with the crosshairs and 1 track the target at the point of aim until impact 23 The natural movement of the firing post during launch causes the sight pict
236. le that matches what you typed For example if you want to find the first record in the mission set that has a gunner s last name Smith type the name Smith in the input filed above the header in the table Use the Search Next button to find subsequent records for the Name column that begin with Smith as long as Smith 15 still entered in the Name input field You can also use the Set Bookmark button to remember the currently selected mission When you click the Go to Bookmark button the record pointer will return to and highlight the book marked mission file NOTE The bookmark currently works for only one mission file at a time 4 5 Search Next Button Incremental search exists in EMRM to allow for searching of mission rows based on a column field The incremental search fields are in the boxes above the grid just above the column headings Entering text will locate the first mission matching the entered incremental search text Once an incremental search term is entered the Search Next will locate the next instance of the search term in the mission set if there are any further instances Table Organization The headers in the table can be resized by placing your mouse pointer between two columns The cursor will change to a splitter and you can drag to resize the column For more information B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator
237. lease trigger button close the safety cover and engage the safety catch Report SAFETY ON Repeat SAFETY ON Put the weapon down left hand handle on the ground or left on the tripod then walk away to the left and wait 30 minutes Confirm that the safety catch is engaged and depress the missile locking lever Order UNLOAD Walk away to the right and wait 30 minutes Repeat UNLOAD unload 74 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx GUNNER LOADER the missile and report CLEAR Repeat CLEAR replace the sight protective plug and report ERYX READY Carry the missile to a safe area or dud pit Alert the chain of command to the misfire 38 If a misfire occurs the firing post should be checked with a test set If the firing post is declared serviceable and a second malfunction occurs the missile lot must be quarantined 39 Confirm by questions and practice CONCLUSION 40 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm all main teaching points by questions and practice conduct safety precautions d summarize the lesson and stress that 1 proper handling drills are crucial to reduce engagement time and ensure safety 2 a steady fire position is essential for effective tracking 3 the gunner must pre aim with the arrow and re aim with the crosshairs and 4 the gunner must never fly the missile B GL 385 010 PT 001 75
238. ly AC selection LED should turn ON After 5 minutes if the battery max status LED is not ON position the ETSVCS power supply selection rotary switch to BATT If the battery LED is ON the battery is partially charged if the LED is not ON the battery is discharged A charge cycle could take up to 6 5 hours for a completely discharged battery Switch the power supply power selection rotary switch to AC When the charge cycle is completed the battery max status LED will go ON f To switch the power supply back to battery turn the power selection rotary switch to BATT the battery max status LED light should turn off and the power supply battery selection LED should turn on g Switch power supply ON OFF switch OFF 360 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching h Battery check and charging procedure is completed 16 Confirm by questions and practice CONCLUSION 17 Conclude the lesson a Take questions from the class b Confirm all main teaching points by questions and practice Conduct safety precautions d Summarize the lesson and stress that 1 The ETSVCS uses a lead acid battery which must be fully recharged after use 2 Voltage selection 110 or 220 V must be completed prior to connecting an external power source Failure to comply will result in damage to the system 3 Always turn the iris knob day night selector on the camera smoothly to the end of its run fully clockwise o
239. mager 109 CONCIS lOl 110 LESSON2 DESCRIBE THERMAL IMAGER FUNDAMEN TALS zauan 111 LOM A 111 Conductor TG CESSO 112 latrare d 112 Temperature Differences and Thermal Images 113 sources of Infrared 114 Thermodynamics of the Infrared Battlefield 116 xi B GL 385 010 PT 001 Effects of Weather and Obscurants on Thermal Imagery 117 Image scam ee eas 119 NEC URNS 120 rere nn 121 4 LESSON PLANS ERYX VIDEO INTERACTIVE GUNNERY SIMULATOR EVIGS LESSON 1 ASSEMBLE AND DISASSEMBLE THE EVIGS 123 NOLES 123 124 Unpack and Assemble ett eii bt Ed beats 124 Power up and Power down sse 131 Disassermble and Pack up ia rei 134 C ONC SION a Ud S 135 LESSON 27 OPERATE THE 136 Ins tacto NOE 136 Cond ct or the Lesson gar eain a 137 General de ut 138 139 Mission RP 141 Mission 143 Mission IDG DIET LL 144 Emergency Power down and Hardware Initiated Re boot 146 OMCIUSI
240. mils A NBZ ROA ADD LOA ADG 3400 mils 400 mm 5900 mils CORNER OF E 500 m ROAD INTERSECTION WOODS 600 m LOCATION GR 12345678 DATE 151500Z OCT 01 METHOD M THODE MAP LRF MADE BY R DIG PAR CPL NASH GRID BEARING REMARKS COORD AZIMUTH REMARQUES ROAD EXITS WOODE 451 571 4800 mils 450m CREST OF omocrom 0 Sym bs i Figure 2 24 Example of a Range Card 88 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx RANGE CARD CROQUIS DE REPERAGE N LOA ADG ROA ADD LOCATION DATE METHOD M THODE MADE BY R DIG PAR LL GRID BEARING NEUE REMARKS No COORD AZIMUTH DISTANCE REMAQUES __ LEGEND L GENDE Figure 2 25 Blank Range Card B GL 385 010 PT 001 89 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 20 20 Confirm by questions ERYX OFFENSIVE TASKS Explain 27 Although the primary role for Eryx is as a defensive weapon it can be a very useful weapon in offensive operations Commanders must take into account the normal characteristics of the weapon and consider the limitations that may affect its employment in any operation In offensive operations where speed and violent action is a key factor in success the commander must take into account the size and weight of Eryx and the manpower it requires to deploy as a part of his estimate In both the hasty and deliberate attack part of the
241. missile storage bay It should be a further 1 2 m long 1 4 m deep B GL 385 010 PT 001 85 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy revetted and covered with 0 5 m of packed soil 4 E i EN A p api T 1 A E 7 th RT t m 5g F y i t 1 D nter ca M a ENT E EN M EC zi wh COM Vm EM nae Figure 2 23 Eryx Trench Stage 2 Rear View 3 Stage 3 Improvements Overhead cover OHC 15 added to the fire trench to protect the crew against indirect fire while firing It should be covered with at least 0 5 m of sandbags The rear must be left open to allow for ventilation of the back blast Grenade sumps communications and crawl trenches and completion of camouflage are done at this stage The Eryx Range Card See Figures 2 24 2 25 There is no significant difference preparing a range card for Eryx compared to a range card prepared by riflemen It may be prepared on a form or on a field message pad sheet It is important that the range card be done neatly and with only the necessary detail to prevent it from being cluttered Anyone else occupying that position should be able 86 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx to use it easily When preparing a range card include the following information 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5 9 Primary Secondary Arcs of Fire As assigned by your commander primary arcs are indicated by s
242. n Heavy d The full sequence completes itself before showing the detailed results On successful completion of the power on BIT the IM displays the main menu The status message should be displayed on the system status bar bottom of screen and normal operation may proceed NOTE 3 Power on BIT performs a dynamic check on the scanner and lasers but does not test their ability to scan locate and range find targets at operational ranges The start up procedure must include a dynamic check of the scanner and lasers using the TEST LASER function menu 14 under SYSTEM MANAGEMENT This will cause the GM to search for targets TSS on vehicle within the field of view If successful the IM displays the target s location range speed and direction of movement 31 It is very important that the BIT be initiated at least twice during the training session or after 80 engagements 32 After language selection configuration check BIT and TEST LASER check if appropriate the FSS becomes operational From this point FSS operation is controlled and monitored by the instructor using the IM display and keypad 33 Finally the EPGS provides the user with the ability to adjust the brightness of the missile and aim point marker display visible through the sight during a mission The system stores two separate brightness levels and automatically uses the correct brightness level depending upon whether or not the thermal image
243. n Freeze Mission Plays the mission in real time or freezes it when it is playing Previous Mission Presents the debrief data for the previous mission in the selected series B GL 385 010 PT 001 145 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy f Next Mission Presents the debrief data for the next mission in the selected series g Select Mission s Selects the missions to be debriefed from the last ten missions fired h Enable Aim Point Disable Aim Point Toggles the green aim marker on the mission scene for debriefs 29 Confirm by questions and practice EMERGENCY POWER DOWN AND HARDWARE INITIATED RE BOOT Explain 30 If the EVIGS locks up the image is missing information or there are unexpected effects attempt to go back to the Main Window and perform the power down procedure and restart 31 If unable to go back to the Main Window move the pointer to the grey background press and select Exit When the pointer no longer responds to the tracker ball check the hard disk indicator light of the ICA to determine if it is flashing If yes wait a minute or two before quitting the system If the hard disk indicator light is steadily lit or off wait one minute or two and proceed with the hardware initiated re boot 22 Hardware Initiated Re boot Before performing this operation ensure that there will be no power interruption until the re boot is complete 2 to 10 minutes If the power is interru
244. n a control point preferably a tower located at some vantage point which allows a good field of view of both the target area and the firing point If only one firing point is being used he will command it Gf qualified as an Eryx instructor If more than one is in simultaneous use the OIC will be centrally located and will name an assistant range safety officer ARSO qualified Eryx instructor to each firing point Submit the LFCHQ Eryx Firing Summary Message see Annex K and Eryx Firing Reports DND 2053 see Annex J B GL 385 010 PT 001 333 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 15 Range Safety Officer RSO The RSO is responsible to the CO for monitoring all aspects of safety associated with the exercise The position of RSO is not a position of command and ideally the RSO should not be involved with any tasks other than those relating to safety 16 The RSO must be qualified on every weapon being fired and be fully conversant with this manual Range Standing Orders and the applicable sections of B GL 381 001 TS 000 Operational Training and Training Safety 1 The RSO must be in position each time weapons are fired or demolitions are used In the event that the RSO and the OIC disagree on a point of safety the CO will make the final decision 18 The RSO is responsible to a ensure the safety of all personnel b implement the safety policy and observe the safety regulations contained in appropriate orders
245. ncreasing weapon effectiveness and gunner survivability B GL 385 010 PT 001 63 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy HOLD AIM AND FIRE Explain demonstrate and practice 11 Hold The key to a successful target engagement is gunner stability A stable gunner is less affected by weight shift and weight loss at launch and can track the target more smoothly Consequently firing without the tripod should be avoided in all circumstances except for emergency short range engagements 12 When using the tripod the gunner must a Keep both elbows off the ground and place as much body weight as possible forward onto the handles This extra weight on the traverse mechanism makes tracking much smoother b Lift the right shoulder and apply pressure to the side of the missile tube throughout tracking Start tracking with an extreme wrist rotation the elevation handle to avoid having to change grip during the missile flight d Only engage targets within a comfortable tracking arc The gunner must adjust his fire position to engage outside this arc and must not fire when contorted 13 When firing from the shoulder the gunner must a Hunch the shoulders and tuck both elbows tightly into the body to adopt as compact a position as possible 64 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx b Apply inward pressure to the firing post with both hands Only engage targets within a comfortable tracking arc As when
246. nd 4 thrust stopping device TSD and its control card d Main Warhead Assembly including 1 main warhead 2 pyrotechnic delay and 3 thermal shield e Rear Section Assembly including 1 launch motor 2 wire 3 beacon and 4 folding fins 29 Video Clip Play video clip Lesson 1 Part 2 Weapon Description This supplements paragraph 28 Figure 2 4 Parts of the Missile 22 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx WEAPON OPERATION Explain and demonstrate 30 The operation of the weapon consists of five phases as follows a Launch 1 Missile initiation is performed by the firing post when the gunner presses the trigger button The trigger button generates an electrical impulse to activate the weapon battery located in the junction unit This battery powers the firing post for the duration of the missile s flight 2 firing post activates the missile battery which in turn activates the SAD 3 missile beacon is activated and the firing post synchronizes itself to the flashing rate of the beacon This unique synchronization counters the possibility of downrange jamming 4 firing post activates the gyroscope and fires a pyrotechnic device that retracts the retaining pin in the interlock unit and closes the circuit from the missile battery to the igniter 5 Finally the igniter fires the launch motor 6 launch se
247. nd practice e conduct safety precautions d summarize the lesson and stress that the instructor should be an expert in all aspects of the weapon system including its technical characteristics e forecast the next lesson and pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 315 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LESSON 2 COACHING THROUGH SIMULATION EVIGS EPGS INSTRUCTOR NOTES 4 follows 316 Aim To teach a b the importance of detailed coaching for developing gunnery skills and all EVIGS EPGS coaching techniques Main Teaching Points general coaching points coaching before firing coaching after firing and common gunner faults two 40 minute lessons at PO 305 03 EVIGS and one 40 minute lesson at PO 305 04 EPGS Method Explanation demonstration and practices as PO 305 03 demonstration and practices will be done per Chapter 4 Lessons 4 and 5 PO 305 04 demonstration and practices will be done per exercise 2 of Chapter 7 Annex C Appendix 1 This PO will also be inserted in a tutorial on how to conduct EPGS training see Chapter 7 Annex D B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching 5 Stores The simulator used dictates the stores required as follows a EVIGS 1 one EVIGS per four gunners 2 one sturdy table per EVIGS 3 three chairs per EVIGS 4 TV and VCR and 5 aiming aids sliding b EPGS 1 suitable training area 2 target vehicle
248. nd procedures are followed ensure that appropriate control flags are displayed at all times give the order to fire on his firing point after receiving authorization from the OIC or the RSO both functions are often assumed by the same person observe the back blast danger area count the missiles fired and plot duds and score the firings and complete Eryx Firing Reports DND 2053 accordingly see Annex J Ammo Point The Ammo Point 15 responsible organize the ammo point and the salvage area under supervision of the range 2IC B GL 385 010 PT 001 335 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy b ensure missiles are protected from environmental hazards or dangerous handling issue missiles to the gunners field packing will be taken off at the very last moment prior to fire issue and collect Eryx Firing Reports DND 2053 Annex J The Ammo Point NCO will write lot and serial numbers on each DND 2053 prior to issuing them such that each missile will relate to one DND 2053 and one gunner and collect salvage 24 Confirm by questions CONDUCT OF A RANGE 25 Preliminary Activities Preliminary organization is key to the success of range training To obtain maximum results the OIC must conduct a reconnaissance make an estimate of the situation and prepare a plan that details specific tasks 26 336 Preliminary activities consist of Reconnaissance A detailed reconnaissance mus
249. nd grasp using the right arm with the left arm pick up the firing post by the left hand handle tilt the missile forward and slide the missile tube guide pins into the missile indexing Slots rotate the firing post upward and engage the missile locking lever remove the sight protective plug and report READY On the order UNLOAD the gunner must perform verify that the safety catch 1 engaged hold the missile tube by the right arm with an all around grasp depress the missile locking lever B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx d rotate the firing post downward and away from the missile tube and e discard the empty tube or replace the field packing on the unspent missile 34 Confirm by practice DISMOUNTED CARRY Explain and demonstrate 35 For short distances the firing post and the thermal imager can be hand carried or carried on the shoulder if the weapon is loaded 36 For longer distances the firing post and thermal imager each have a soft pouch that mounts on a fibre rucksack frame which 1 carried by the gunner see Figures 2 14 and 2 15 The loader has his own rucksack carrying 2 missiles The gunner can carry the tripod inside a pouch As each pouch is modular one or more soldiers can share the load A Soft pouch for the Thermal Imager Mirabel B Soft pouch for the Firing Post Compartments 4 for batteries 2 on either side of the Figure 2 14 Gunner s Rucksack
250. ng post back NOTE Instruction at the QL 3 DP 1 level should concentrate on the assembly names and their functions Only at the QL 4 DP 2A level should emphasis be placed on components until the firing post locking lever engages 27 Confirm by questions 20 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx 28 Missile The missile is housed in a launch tube made of graphite fibre and epoxy resin and weighs 12 5 kg Outside of its launch tube the missile is 137 4 mm in diameter Highly sophisticated the missile consists of five main assemblies see Figure 2 4 a Missile Tube Assembly including 1 missile tube 2 interlock unit secures the missile until launch with a retaining pin and 3 junction unit a weapon battery 12 volt b missile tube guide pins electrical connectors and cover and d missile alignment pin b Front Plate Assembly including 1 front warhead 2 missile battery 36 volt 3 safety and arming device SAD 4 decoder card 5 crush fuse part of the nose cone and 6 gyroscope C Flight Motor Assembly including 1 flight motor with centre channel B GL 385 010 PT 001 21 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Front Center Thermal Main Folding Warhead Channel Shield Warhead Fins CE 3 LE eS Ld DES A Crush Flight Interlock Pyrotechnic Fuse Motor Unit Delay 2 jet deflectors 3 ieniter a
251. ng with weight shift for better tracking 11 Introduction Explain The following missions are designed to develop tracking skills for firing with the thermal imager The test listed at Chapter 7 Annex B Appendix 3 must be passed to obtain the Eryx gunner qualification and is required prior to live firing with Mirabel by day or night B GL 385 010 PT 001 161 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ADVANCING TARGETS Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS PRACTICE 2 3 CROSSING TARGETS LEFT TO RIGHT Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS T 2A 19 T 2A 57 2 64 m CROSSING TARGETS RIGHT TO LEFT Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS NO NO gt CO m 62 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator OBLIQUE TARGETS LEFT TO RIGHT Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS OBLIQUE TARGETS RIGHT TO LEFT Practice and coaching CONCLUSION 12 Conclude the lesson a Take questions from the class b Confirm the main teaching points by questions Summarize the lesson and stress that the point of aim for moving targets is at the bottom and 1 4 forward but also that when firing with Mirabel B GL 385 010 PT 001 163 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy weight shift and weight loss is less important The end result is that the observable weight sh
252. nnaissance trainer Advantages a thermal training can be conducted all AFVs and aircraft are available new items can be added all sides of AFVs and AC are shown many advantages such as games videos comparisons target construction etc students can progress at their own speed the trainer is available in all units B GL 385 010 PT 001 397 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy TRAINING AIDS 1 Intrest trainer Disadvantages a theenvironment must be suitable b instructors may be tempted to forget the 6 principles of instruction c cost CONFIRMATION OF STAGE 3 398 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex A to Chapter 6 FINAL SUMMARY TEST To whom does AFV and AC Identification Level 1 apply To whom does the AFV Identification Level 3 apply The minimum identification standard is a success rate of What is the standard for using the optical sight Name one disadvantage of scale models B GL 385 010 PT 001 399 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy TEST ANSWERS To whom does the AFV and AC Identification Level 1 apply All LFC personnel To whom does the AFV Identification Level 3 apply To all members of the Recce and Anti Armour Platoon and to Mortar Fire Controllers The minimum identification standard is a success rate What is the standard for using the optical sight Up to 3500 metres Name one disadvantage of scale models No thermal training the n
253. nner presses the trigger button after the target has entered the arc of fire when ample tracking margins exist to either side time Tt in Figure 5 9 When the trigger button is pressed the simulated firing sequence is started Approximately 1 second after the trigger button is pressed time 16 in Figure 5 9 the GM computer does the following a instructs the MTA sound generator to simulate missile launch and flight motor noise 191 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 192 b operates the weight loss mechanism in the correct sequence to simulate physical reactions of the missile launch illuminates the obscuration lamp to simulate sight view obscuration caused by the smoke or flare of the missile flight motor d displays a simulation of the missile flight motor flare in the gunner s sight during the time of flight e two seconds after trigger press time Tt 2s in Figure 5 9 the GM computer commences physical wire pull simulation Time of Flight The target being tracked when the trigger button is pressed becomes the aimed at target Unless the aimed at target is lost during the mission this target 1 the target for which the PPA will be determined and continuously revised during tracking and tracking accuracy will be measured and hit miss determined irrespective of other EPGS targets within the scanner field of view Also the following actions will be taken by the GM 1 2
254. ns and familiarity with tactics techniques and procedures regarding Eryx employment B GL 385 010 PT 001 445 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy PLANNING FACTORS 25 Training effectiveness depends primarily on the following factors a meticulous choice of training sites that allow Eryx to be in an overwatch position and away from crowded dusty roads b the training area must allow various approaches for target vehicles on roads and off road within a range of at least 600 metres avoiding 30 degree angled slopes C capacities and limitations of the simulator must be respected see Chapter 5 Lesson 1 d abrupt and erratic movements by target vehicles must be avoided e speeds higher than 50 km h must be avoided optimal speed 30 35 km h f target vehicle drivers should be briefed on their timings routes vehicle orientation and specific movements g precise positioning of the TSS on target vehicles must be assured see C 10 412 000 M B 000 Annex B h EPGS must be used as taught in Chapter 5 Lesson 2 and 1 EPGS mission set up must be done as taught in Chapter 5 Lesson 3 EVALUATION 3 There is no standard for EGPS gunner training There is nothing standardized in a real combat situation and thus it would be 446 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 7 unrealistic to confine gunner training to a hypothetical standard when the simulator offers unlimited possibilities It must b
255. nstrate 23 The following describes the general set up and interconnection procedures applicable in all EPGS training scenarios a Place the firing post in the firing position according to the deployment rules and training requirement in either tripod or shoulder position When the GM is to be fired in the prone or kneeling position on the tripod open the tripod and place it in the firing position and mount the firing post on the tripod Ensure the firing post locking lever closes to secure the firing post b Ensure the safety cover on the firing post is down over the trigger button and that the safety catch is down to secure the safety cover in place Place the in the position required for trainee gunner supervision d Connect the IM GM cable between the firing post and the IM B GL 385 010 PT 001 201 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 202 Attach the MTA to the firing post The MTA is secured in the same manner as the real Eryx missile tube Ensure the missile locking lever closes to secure the MTA Connect the junction unit umbilical cable to the MTA connector Determine the power source to be used see Figures 5 4 5 10 and 5 11 1 If the Battery Pack is to be used ensure it 15 fully charged and set the ON OFF switch to OFF 2 If the FSS is to be powered from its Battery Pack or from a 24 V DC vehicle source connect the DC power cable from the Battery Pack
256. nt missions i e total of 20 engagements per student Students are to rotate after firing each mission i e five repetitions A debrief is to be given following every repetition of the mission 5 Stores One EVIGS per four gunners 6 Preparation The instructor should start all the EVIGS and run several missions on each to ensure that the simulators are serviceable 7 The tripods should be set up on a non slip surface 8 Miscellaneous On average four students per simulator can complete ten engagements each during a 40 minute lesson More time must be allocated if more than four students are training on one simulator 9 Missions must be allowed to run until the entire target is visible before the scene can be frozen CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 10 Safety Precautions Safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 Remind students that the weights must fall into the baskets 148 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator 11 Review Emphasize the correct point of aim for static targets 12 Introduction Explain The following missions are intended to introduce the gunner to the sensations produced by the Eryx Mission parameters are to be set to BEGINNER unless otherwise stated under COMMENTS STATIC TARGETS Practice and coaching PRACTICE DISK MISSION COMMENTS _ COMMENIS disable wire pull disable WS WL fre
257. ntained in the Detailed Mission Results Window a Identification of the Gunner Instructor and the Date and Time of the mission IDENTIFICATION GUNNER PTE ISM FRY 641911030 INSTAUCTOR KITSUM 11 097406 22000 15 07 46 The Identification Group b The Mission Results Group pictured below displays mission score result and pass fail indicators MISSION RESULTS score The Mission Results Group 266 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator ICON TITLE DESCRIPTION None Score Score The score achieved for the Display current mission result A score label between 1 to 10 is a pass a score of 0 only is a fail Result Hit Icon displayed if there is a target hit for the current mission result Result Miss Icon displayed if there is a target miss for the current mission result Result GROUND Ground Icon displayed if the missile hit ground before reaching the target for the current mission result Result Fault Icon displayed if there is a fault for the current mission result Result EXCURS Excursion Icon displayed if there is a missile excursion for the current mission result Status Pass Icon displayed if the mission is a pass score between to 10 for the current mission result Status Fail Icon displayed if the mission is fail score 0 for the current mission result Gunner s azimuth and elevation tracking errors pl
258. nti armour Weapon Heavy CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions If any weapons are used in class or outside safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review Nil 10 Introduction During Eryx gunner training at the unit the instructor will be required to teach lessons on thermal AFV Recognition Level 1 and 2 It is thus very important that the Eryx instructor knows how to conduct Eryx gunner qualification training in acordance with LFCOs 21 13 and 23 16 In order to reach this goal we will discuss AFV identification standards teaching methods and training aids This lesson is taught to allow the future instructor to conduct AFV lessons effectively properly using all available resources AFV IDENTIFICATION STANDARDS Explain 11 21 13 details the minimum standards for Armoured Fighting Vehicle AFV and Aircraft AC identification training within LFC This order provides certain information such as a Training Responsibility e g the LFC G3 Individual Training sets the minimum acceptable standards for AFV and AC identification in LFCO 21 13 b Identification Training Definitions certain terms are defined e g Identification Viewing Distance Level 3 Identification List Level 2 AC Identification List C Test Composition e g the Level 1 and AC test contains a list of tanks reconnaissance vehicles and armoured personnel
259. nti virus and update library Games Allows individual progress as group and provides fun as well f System Intro Using the narrator introduces the user to various facets of the trainer g View Records Allows for an overview of lessons completed those not completed scores and dates and times of lessons taken 18 For the main teaching points of this lesson only 3 of the 15 instructor functions will be discussed 1 a create a new training instructor student diskette b group training and group evaluation 19 Create a Training Instructor Student Diskette The following are the steps to create a new diskette a Complete the six identification boxes no more than nine characters in the password b Select one of the four levels shown 368 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching 6 Select a default view d Select student instructor Select curriculum lists the instructor restricts the student to certain targets This list is amended by the instructor as the student progresses in level The default lists are displayed in blue and the deactivated lists are shown red Since certain targets appear on more than one curriculum list there is a choice of viewing the duplicates or bypassing them f Selecting View current curriculum displays the list of targets by level which the instructor has selected for his students g Selecting Targets completed displays com
260. nuing with this lesson if the students are not experts in Eryx gunnery techniques CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 9 Safety Precautions Conduct safety precautions as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 10 Review All aspects of the Hold Aim and Fire section from Chapter 2 Lesson 4 must be firm in every students mind 11 Introduction Explain Gunner confidence in Eryx is directly attributable to success in firing live missiles Due to the limited number of missiles available for training experience garnered from each missile must be maximized The Eryx instructor must therefore be capable of conducting effective coaching on the range before and after firing COACHING BEFORE FIRING 12 The Human Factor Explain The coach must consider the following factors prior to coaching a gunner a Gunner Experience Novice Eryx gunners will be under a great deal of stress to hit the target Furthermore they may be somewhat apprehensive about firing such a potent weapon as Eryx Experience with other anti tank weapons including M 72 Carl Gustaf and TOW will alleviate some of this pressure b Gunner Confidence Self confidence and confidence in the weapon are essential for the gunner to engage a target effectively e EVIGS Performance Gunners may not believe that proficiency on the EVIGS is representative of B GL 385 010 PT 001 345 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy their abilities to fire the actual
261. o select it The AIM POINT MARKER can be toggled on off directly by hot key 1 MULTIPLE TARGETS 1 3 This allows selection of one two or three missions to be performed before debrief Highlight the required selection then press ENTER to select it 1 When the MULTIPLE TARGETS 1 3 option is exercised the GM imposes a 10 second reload delay period after each mission during which no subsequent mission may be started This delay simulates the time needed to reload the GM Mission status is displayed as RELOAD on the mission status on the bottom of the screen 2 During the reload delay DVR recording is halted but the TSV image continues to be displayed 3 The next engagement starts after the reload delay has elapsed and the mission status changes to REC When the safety catch 1 raised DVR recording restarts and the GM commences scanning for the next target The mission status changes to LASER and the mission sequence continues as per usual 4 After the final mission is completed the EPGS immediately enters Debrief mode automatically 21 The Mission Management Menu Explain and demonstrate This menu has facilities for post mission analysis display and management of mission results These include debrief of last mission review debrief of currently selected gunner s stored missions and deletion of missions from storage The review and debrief options cause the FSS to ente
262. objects on the battlefield undergo continual temperature changes that follow important predictable trends For example natural background objects such as trees grass rocks and earth are heated passively through the absorption of solar energy Even during overcast days some solar radiation is absorbed Daily solar heating begins at sunrise After midday the sun declines and the background objects begin to cool After sunset the objects cool down to approach the temperature of the air This daily two part heating and cooling cycle is called the diurnal cycle The IR battlefield is thus thermally dynamic changing constantly according to the time of day season and amount of cloud cover 26 During the diurnal cycle individual background and target objects heat and cool at different rates Large dense objects such as rocks tree trunks and non operating armoured vehicles heat and cool slowly Lightweight objects such as grass tree leaves bushes and the surface layer of the ground heat and cool much more quickly The more dense objects are said to have greater thermal mass while the lightweight objects have low thermal mass The diurnal cycle with example times is illustrated in Figure 3 10 116 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager GRASSITREE LEAVES AFTERNOON CROSSOVER MORNING CROSSOVER DEGREES ABOVE AIR TEMP C de NON OPERATING ARMOURED VEHICLE TIME OF DAY 24 HR CLOCH Fi
263. of the ICA computer mount the tripod see Figure 4 3 the firing sight assembly FSA and the missile launch assembly MLA then plug the MLA cable into the receptacle on the FSA J2 using the AO3060 9476210 cable connect the plug to the receptacle on the make sure that the ICA main switch 1s then plug the ICA power cable into a grounded external power outlet make sure that the MCA main switch is OFF then plug the MCA power cable into a grounded external power outlet CAUTION The cables are very fragile Care must be taken to avoid kinking or walking on them 128 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator 1 assemble the weight catching baskets and place them under each end of the missile tube and assemble the wire pull assembly WPA see Figure 4 4 and plug it into the rear of the MCA as shown in Figures 4 5 4 6 and 4 7 k connect cable 07270 9476433 between the WPA connector panel assembly connector P1 W P to J 1 receptacle and the MCA connector panel assembly cable end P6 MCA to J 6 receptacle and 1 connect power cable of WPA to a power source FIRING SIGHT ASSEMBLY WIREPULL ASSEMBLY a FRONT WEIGHT ASSEMBLY ALLEN KEY MISSILE LAUNCH ASSEMBLY MISSILE TUBE ASSEMBLY REAR WEIGHT WEIGHT BASKETS CASE ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTOR CASE
264. ol Chapter 2 Lessons 2 to 5 semi annual tactical training aimed at integrating and employing the weapon system within sub units during all phases of war Phase 3 Eryx live firing and Eryx instructor qualification DP 3A including the following 1 2 Live Firing 1 Individual training missile firing on a conventional range during annual unit Eryx firing concentration Live Firing 2 Collective training during annual unit or battle school Eryx firing concentration as follows a b Eryx detachment exercise in a bush lane and sub unit exercise up to company level in a movement box B GL 385 010 PT 001 Gunnery Training 3 Eryx instructor qualification DP 3A including the following a weapon system technical data b coaching with simulator and during live firing Eryx range conduct d Eryx missile firing TRAINING STANDARDS 2 Implicit in the progressive nature of SRAAW H training is the requirement for well defined standards These standards specify exactly what gunners must achieve prior to moving to the next phase 3 Phase 1 Formal skill at arms lessons are tested by weapon tests of elementary training The Eryx TOET checklist 1 at Annex A TOETs must be passed prior to progressing to EVIGS training for familiarization practices see Chapter 4 Lesson 3 4 Phase 2 The EVIGS is the prime training vehicle for learning SRAAW H gunner
265. olid lines that extend to a prominent point and secondary arcs by dotted lines to a prominent point Likely Reference Points and Target Locations Mark each spot with a small circle and number them Give the range and bearing to each with a brief description Identify reference points that will be visible not only with the optical sight but also with the thermal imager Dense objects such as rocks destroyed tanks and stone or brick buildings will provide good infrared signatures even during the night as they will cool down more slowly than other objects Location of Adjoining Trenches Mark these to prevent positions from accidentally firing on one another and to ensure all arcs of fire are interlocking Position from which card was made Give grid reference and call sign Method of Obtaining Range Map judging distance estimate laser range finder etc By Whom the Card was Made Out Indicate North Mark the direction of grid north to allow for section and platoon commanders to get the correct orientation for their range cards Date The time and date the card was prepared Max Range Line Maximum range that the Eryx can engage due to terrain or other features B GL 385 010 PT 001 87 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 10 Min Range Line Minimum range that the Eryx can engage 50 m Secondary LOA 5750 mils RANGE CARD CROQUIS DE REPERAGE Max Range Line Min Secondary ROA Range Line 6150
266. on Mission status will change from ON to FIRING If the gunner lowers the safety catch at any time during the mission the mission status bar will read ABORT and the message MISSION ABORTED LOCKING LEVER LOWERED will be displayed If the gunner releases the trigger at any moment during the missile flight the message TRIGGER BUTTON NO LONGER PRESSED will overlay the gunner s TSV This is not recorded in the mission results and will have no effect on the mission If the aimed at target is lost from view for more than 0 5 seconds the mission status bar will change from FIRING to NO If the missile flies outside the 224 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator simulated missile localization camera field of view for more than 120 milliseconds in the first two seconds of flight the motor flare will fall rapidly to the ground where the grounded icon will flash for one second at the point of impact If the missile flies outside the simulated localization camera field of view after it has flown for two seconds the missile will continue to fly unguided along its current flight path to its maximum range An EXCURS will be recorded as mission result 31 Hit Miss Assessment When the simulated missile reaches the aimed at target range the GM makes a HIT or MISS assessment If the missile hit the target a hit icon star is displayed in the gunner s sigh
267. on or kneeling supported with the tripod is recommended for all firing The following steps must be taken when firing from the prone position see Figure 2 12 a mount the tripod with the front tripod leg pointing towards the centre of arc b mount the firing post verify that the safety catch is engaged d rotate the firing post through 360 degrees to verify that there are no rough spots for tracking in azimuth 50 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx e rotate the elevation handle to verify that there are no rough spots for tracking in elevation f adopt prone position behind the weapon system and place the body at an angle of 45 degrees to the centre of arc legs spread apart inside of the feet against the ground right shoulder against the launching tube and body weight transferred to firing post handles g ensure that the field of fire 15 free of obstacles and h place either the left or right eye on the eye piece 22 When placing the tripod on a smooth surface the legs must be blocked so that they do not slide at missile launch Figure 2 11 Prone Position LOAD AND UNLOAD Explain demonstrate and practice 23 On the order LOAD the Eryx detachment performs the following GUNNER LOADER Verify that the safety catch is engaged Report LOAD B GL 385 010 PT 001 51 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ree ngs T loosen the straps that sec
268. on some ranges They will be supervised by the 2IC or an NCO not below the rank of MCpl who will be in charge of the target set up and aware of the training scenario 4 A pre fire check of the Eryx firing posts using a test set operated by a qualified FCS Technician must be carried out within 24 hours prior to firing a missile The results of the pre fire check will be written on the Eryx Firing Report DND 2053 Annex J A qualified FCS Technician will also be part of the exercise staff d Briefing Briefing to the exercise staff should include 1 a description of the practice to be conducted and the sequence of events 2 individual tasks and 3 local safety arrangements working arrangements and positions of firing points and arc of fire markers 27 Action Before Firing On arriving at the range the OIC or 2IC should a sign the range book b raise the flags and post sentries 338 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching establish communications with range control d establish communications with firing points bunkers towers and sentries carry a visual check to confirm the range is unobstructed in good order and safe for use establish an administrative area and ammunition point g clear the danger area of personnel and livestock h organize the sequence of gunners prior to the commencement of firing 1 brief the gunners and control staff on 1 range sa
269. onverter during data transfers of mission data and unit files to and from a PC and their processing using commercial software These operations require an RS232 type data connection cable see paragraph 5 b and a standard PC equipped with commercial spreadsheet type software or the EMRM During a training session mission results data is accumulated in the IM on a mission by mission basis in chronological sequence Through transfer this data can be recovered and viewed on a PC using any standard spreadsheet software package that can read sort and manipulate the IM memory language The PC requires a serial data port type RS232 to which the RS232 data cable can be connected This application will allow the coach to a combine the data from all EPGS firing systems in use into one data set saveable as one file b sort missions by gunner C sort missions by day d compare acquisition times between different gunners 232 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator e identify poor tracking technique f investigate poor moving target engagement technique and g segregate missions into long medium and close range categories DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE WITH HYPERTERMINAL AND A SPREADSHEET Explain and demonstrate 11 Mission results data transfer will be carried out using the Windows 95 98 2000 application HyperTerminal also integrated in the EMRM Due to the fact that a mission results transfer tr
270. or EPGS With this application mission results are uploaded to the EMRM from the EPGS IM Once the results are loaded the information can be viewed analysed and managed by EMRM application Instructor note Use this portion of the lesson in conjunction with the CD ROM and multimedia projector B GL 385 010 PT 001 237 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CHARACTERISTICS Explain 20 The following is a list of characteristics found in the EMRM application a Windows Standards The EMRM graphical user 238 interface is designed to be user friendly incorporating Microsoft Windows standards and quick view functionality Graphical icons have been designed to represent the various simulation parameters and mission parameters so that the user can analyze specific training mission details at a glance Language Selection During program start up the first time after installation a user can select either English or French for the program The language can be changed at any time via a Language Selector option located in the Menu bar of the Mission Set Summary Window providing no mission result records are loaded into the table Mission Selection In the Mission Set Summary Window mission results are displayed a table From this table you can select a record or a range of records and sort them by the table headings When one more mission summaries are selected the EMRM can then compute and display a p
271. or azimuth For moving targets however the missile trails the line of sight especially at higher crossing speeds At these speeds the point that is being tracked has always moved ahead as soon as the crosshairs are laid on it For this reason the point of aim for fast moving targets is moved forward of the centre a distance equal to of the length of the vehicle This will cause most of the missiles to impact on the centre 245 Vehicle Crossing Speed Vehicles appear to cross a field of view much faster if they are closer rather than farther away The number of mils in a field of view that a vehicle traverses every second is the measure of speed that 1 used not its actual speed on the ground For Eryx if a target vehicle s crossing speed is more than 177 mils sec the point of aim is shifted forward The following table contains examples of actual vehicle speeds at different ranges and gives the corresponding speed expressed in mils second CROSSING SPEED rancor CROSSINGSPEED 17 mils sec 33 mils sec 50 mils sec 67 mils sec 37 km h 71 km h 108 km h 145 km h 12 km h 24 km h 36 km h 48 km h 22 The decision to aim at the forward point of the target must be made by the gunner based on his perception of crossing speed From the above data it is clear that a vehicle does not have to be moving very fast to require aiming forward Oblique targets regardless of 308 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching their actual groun
272. or communications misunderstood orders and navigation problems create problems in situational awareness 37 Confirm by questions and practice CONCLUSION 38 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm all main teaching points by question and practice C summarize the lesson and stress that 1 knowing how thermal imagers work and are affected by atmospheric conditions is essential for effective weapon use and B GL 385 010 PT 001 121 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 2 fratricide can be minimized through better training and proper dissemination of information d forecast the next lesson and e pack kit 122 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CHAPTER 4 LESSON PLANS ERYX VIDEO INTERACTIVE GUNNERY SIMULATOR EVIGS LESSON 1 ASSEMBLE AND DISASSEMBLE THE EVIGS INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach the proper EVIGS set up procedures for training 2i Main Teaching Points a unpack and assemble b power up and power down and e disassemble and pack up 3 Time One 40 minute lesson 4 Method Explanation demonstration and practice 5 Stores a one EVIGS per four gunners b one sturdy table capable of supporting 137 kg C three chairs per EVIGS and d spare fuses 6 Preparation The instructor should a confirm that the EVIGS are complete as per checklist B GL 385 010 PT 001 123 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy b
273. or vehicle power outlet to the IM power input connector 3 If the FSS is to be powered from an AC power source check that the Charger Converter is set appropriately for the available AC source voltage the setting is indicated by the AC voltage label If the Charger Converter is set appropriately set the Charger Converter ON OFF switch to OFF then connect the AC power cable to the Charger Converter and to the AC power source Connect the DC power cable from the Charger Converter DC outlet to the IM power input connector Determine whether weight loss simulation is to be used or disabled for the intended training session If weight loss simulation is to be used ensure the front and rear weights are close at hand for attachment to the MTA before the start of each mission Determine whether the Mirabel Thermal Imager is to be used in the intended training session If this is B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator to be used have the thermal imager on hand for attachment to the firing post as required 1 Determine whether the neutral density filter is required for the mission intense sunlight conditions Make sure that the retroreflector TSS is installed properly on the vehicle used for the training Always remember that the accuracy and fidelity of EPGS depend greatly on the precise positioning of the TSS refer to Chapter 5 Annex A and C 10 412 000 MB 000 Annex B and
274. orbed by the gunner Since the missile reacts to where the weapon is being pointed these jerks could cause the missile to fly erratically or ground during the first second of flight 306 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching 13 To avoid this the weapon does not respond to the gunner s movement during the first part of the flight and sends a dummy command to the missile The command causes the missile to fly up and to the left 14 The weapon gradually decreases the influence of the dummy command and accepts tracking information from the gunner such that the gunner has full control of the missile at 50 metres 15 As aresult all missiles have a characteristic flight path They fly high and to the left immediately after launch and slowly move down to the point of aim after 50 metres This is depicted clearly by the series of graphs at Annexes C and D 16 These graphs show the actual paths of multiple missiles being fired by several gunners at both static and moving targets The zero line corresponds to the line of sight of the weapon Note that a the missile flies significantly above the line of sight especially at close range b the missile flies behind the line of sight for targets moving from right to left and the missile flies significantly behind the line of sight for targets moving from left to right 17 Eryx preferred point of aim PPA takes the missile flight path into consideration
275. otted on a standard grid B GL 385 010 PT 001 267 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy L weap AZIMUTH ott ttt tt ELI le EID ese ESTEE MM 1 74 sec 1 mifiracdians Tool d Icons graphical representations for simulation and mission parameters e Multiple missions can be displayed in Detailed Mission Results Windows simultaneously and they 268 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator can be presented in a number of ways including Tiled Cascaded Minimized Maximized and full screen If you want to view a specific detailed result the Show option in the Window Menu displays a sub list of mission results that have been opened in a detailed view By selecting a particular mission from this sub list it will become visible The Detailed Mission Results Window will also provide the user with a dialog box where comments about that mission can be entered and saved 28 Confirm by questions and practice EMRM FUNCTIONS Explain 29 This and the following sections contain instructional assistance for the various tasks and procedures associated with the EMRM application The following is a list of management tasks that are used the EMRM application a opening an existing Mission Set file b downloading results from the EPGS IM importing an existing EPGS result file d creating a new empty miss
276. ox 15 displayed Insert your name in the INSTRUCTOR NAME section and comments in the NEW COMMENTS section regarding the selected mission result and click the button to proceed The CANCEL button will close the dialog box without adding the comments Confirm by questions and practice Conclude the lesson Take questions from the class Confirm all MTPs by questions and practice Conduct safety precautions Summarize the lesson and stress that 1 Before the HyperTerminal application can connect to the IM a HyperTerminal configuration file file name ht e g EPGS ht has to be created B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator 2 If an existing file name is used new data will be appended to the end of the original data Data will not be overwritten 3 When a unit file is transferred from the PC to the IM the unit file replaces all gunner and instructor details stored in the IM 4 In order for the EMRM to download mission results from the IM the Port Settings configuration must be checked the first time you try to download 5 Make sure to use the RS232 crossover serial cable Null Modem 6 The RAM memory of the IM does not empty its data by itself thus each time a download is done the entire memory up to 1500 missions will be added to the download of the latest missions Forecast the next lesson Pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 287 Eryx
277. pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 135 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LESSON 2 OPERATE THE EVIGS INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach the fundamentals of EVIGS operation in order to enable users to operate the system and launch missions 25 Main Teaching Points a general principles b System Management C Mission Setup d Mission Control e Mission Debrief and f emergency power down and hardware initiated re boot 3 Time Two 40 minute lessons 4 Method Explanation demonstration and practice 2 Stores a one EVIGS per four gunners b one sturdy table per EVIGS and C three chairs per EVIGS 6 Preparation The instructor should a confirm that the EVIGS are complete as per checklist 136 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator b confirm that adequate space and power outlets are available for EVIGS training check the EVIGS for serviceability d review the EVIGS User s Manual C 10 399 000 MB 001 dated 97 11 07 7 Miscellaneous Given its sensitivity to the environment the EVIGS should not be operated outside of controlled classroom conditions CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions If any weapons are used in class safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review Cover the procedures for EVIGS power up and power down Start the lesson with EVIGS powered up with the Main Window
278. peration Desert Storm direct fire engagements from friendly forces caused 12 of the 24 US fratricide incidents Of these 12 all but one occurred at night Ten of them occurred well within the supposed recognition range of the weapon systems involved Commanders at all levels must consider the risk that an operation may produce fratricide casualties and then train to prevent it There are two means by which commanders can reduce the likelihood of fratricide incidents a Thermal Recognition Training Better trained soldiers will be less likely to engage their own 120 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager forces by mistake During the Gulf War many fratricide incidents were avoided because crews were able to identify a target as friendly even though they were told from higher authority that it was enemy b Situational Awareness Even with better training in thermal recognition it is impossible to positively identify a target as enemy or friendly beyond the recognition range for a thermal imager Weapon systems such as TOW and Eryx can engage targets past this point Commanders at all levels as well as gunners have to be well informed about the situation around them in order to make the right decision about whether or not to engage without letting a possible target get close enough for positive identification The most important information that must be passed down is the activity of any friendly units nearby Po
279. perational checks as detailed in Chapter 3 Lesson 1 B GL 385 010 PT 001 199 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 15 Instructor Module IM Check that the IM case and the lid are clean and show no distortion or impact damage Check that the hinges clasps and lid restraint are present and show no distortion Check that the rubber lid seal is present Check that the display window is clean and not cracked and secure with no internal misting Inspect the keypad not torn lifted or compressed flat and check that the membrane itself is not lifted from the panel Remove the cable connector caps and check that the connectors inside receptors and pins are clean with no sign of damage misalignment corrosion moisture or foreign matter 16 Battery Pack Check that the Battery Pack is clean with no signs of damage corrosion or leakage Check that the power connectors are clean with no signs of damage corrosion moisture or foreign matter Check the cover seal for good sealing Check the mechanical action of the switch Examine the vent for obstructions 17 Charger Converter Check that the Charger Converter is clean with no signs of damage corrosion or leakage Check that the power connectors are clean with no signs of damage corrosion moisture or foreign matter Check the cover seal for a good seal Check the mechanical action of the switch 18 Retroreflectors Assembly and Straps Inspect the retroreflector assembly and
280. ple activate the System Management window and then exit it 16 Some windows contain boxes To enter data into a box move the pointer to the box and press the C1 key A flashing cursor will appear and data can be typed in Press Enter when finished 17 Several text boxes are used to select options To select an item move the pointer to the desired selection and press the C1 key NOTE Examples of text boxes can be shown later the lesson 138 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator 18 The structure of the menus has been designed to follow a logical sequence for running missions Whenever in doubt of the sequence the operator should start at the top of the Main Window and work down through the following menus a System Management before starting an EVIGS training session test and calibrate the system b Mission Setup select a sequence of missions to be fired C Mission Control fire the sequence of missions and d Mission Debrief coach the gunner on each mission 19 The top down approach is applicable to all menus If the operator becomes lost in the sequence of menus he should push the Close button on each unfamiliar window until he 1s re oriented to the sequence 20 Do not click on a button repeatedly If the system is working when a button 15 clicked it will action the command as soon as it is free If a button 15 clicked repeatedly the command
281. pleted target lessons and those still incomplete h A refresher test may be given by the instructor in order to discover the student s level of training 1 The instructor can enter notes STUDENT S NOTES j The target diskette is inserted followed by save and shut down 20 Confirm by questions then have students prepare their instructor diskette B GL 385 010 PT 001 369 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy GROUP TRAINING AND EVALUATION Explain and demonstrate NOTE This lesson does not explore the maximum capabilities of the Intrest trainer Only the most important functions for an Eryx instructor are dealt with so as to standardize training 2l Group Training Group training is one of the three instructor functions chosen previously It is particularly useful for an instructor teaching a class with several students After having selected which AFVs to teach start the lesson Six windows will be displayed 16 a System intro and KRF This provides written explanations as well as narration The vehicle can be pivoted through any aspect and an optical or thermal image is available This option is used for a student who wishes to progress individually b Thermal Lesson This offers the same options The polarity colour and thermal state of the vehicle can be selected This option is used for a student who wishes to progress individually Games This is more suited for the instructor T
282. pted during re boot the EVIGS software may be damaged These steps must be followed a press RESET switch on the ICA computer once only b press RESET switch on the MCA DOS computer once only press RESET switch on MCA UNIX computer once only and 146 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator d wait until the user name prompt appears on the MCA screen 1 to 10 minutes 33 Confirm by questions and practice CONCLUSION 34 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm all main teaching points by questions and practice conduct safety precautions d summarize the lesson and stress that 1 the correct sequences for power up and power down must always be followed 2 the positioning system must be calibrated every time the simulator is powered up and 3 when in doubt of the correct sequence to follow go through the menus from top to bottom and push the Close button on any unwanted window forecast the next lesson f pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 147 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy LESSON 3 FIRE FAMILIARIZATION PRACTICES INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To introduce a novice gunner to firing Eryx from the tripod at static targets 2 MTP Engage static targets 3 Time Two 40 minute lessons 4 Method Each practice consists of firing five repetitions of the same mission for four differe
283. que characteristics which influence gunnery techniques a Light Weight The missile weighs more than the total weight of the weapon system components Consequently weight shift and weight loss at launch is significant and the gunner must have a very stable fire position to absorb it b Short Range Once the missile is airborne the gunner has very little time to give corrections As a result the gunner must immediately be on target after launch Thrust Vector Control The missile is extremely agile and reacts virtually instantaneously to all gunner corrections Accordingly the gunner must track the target as smoothly as possible to avoid erratic missile flight 20 Coach Selection Due to the unique nature of Eryx gunnery techniques live fire experience is a highly desirable quality for a coach When at all possible the instructor should have fired at least one missile 21 Confirm by questions COACHING BEFORE FIRING Explain demonstrate and practice 22 The Eryx instructor must ensure that gunners follow the correct procedures for target engagement each and every time an EVIGS or EPGS mission is fired Emphasis must be placed on the fire position point of aim and target engagement sequence 320 B GL 385 010 PT 001 22 24 23 26 205 28 Lesson Plans Coaching NOTE The instructor will conduct an EVIGS mission to demonstrate coaching technique Fire Position To absorb weight shift and weig
284. quence takes approximately one second b Propulsion 1 When the missile is 0 5 metres from the launch tube the flight motor is ignited by the suppression of a short circuit caused by the unravelling of the guidance wire B GL 385 010 PT 001 25 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 24 2 At 50 metres another short circuit 1 suppressed by the unravelling wire The safety and arming device SAD irreversibly arms the front warhead 3 motor burns throughout the missile s flight providing both forward thrust and directional control The missile accelerates constantly throughout its flight and reaches 600 metres in 4 3 seconds Localization and Guidance 1 firing post locates the in flight missile by scanning for the infra red beacon in the rear of the missile 2 SLG computer compares the angular position of the missile to the line of sight and determines the required flight corrections to keep the missile on the point of aim 3 missile auto rotates throughout its flight due to the orientation of the fins The position of the missile is transmitted to the firing post by the gyroscope via the guidance wire 4 SLG computer then calculates the orders for the jet deflectors and sends them to the missile via the guidance wire 5 The deflectors are located at the centre of gravity of the missile and control the direction of the thrust This vecto
285. r AN Incomplete Transmission some of the expected Mission Results were not iransmitied Please check that 1 the cable connection between the EP and this sysiem 15 secure 2 the EP G5 unit itself is functioning properly Try again Log 2 Help Erk CTS DSA Eror AsO TxD DTRRTS m Try Close Download from Wizard Error Message STOP Download Stopped The Mission Results download was stopped by request Click Try Again io start another download or click Close to end this SESSION E Results Log 4 Help Erk CTS DCO DSA Eror RxD TxD DTRATS 30690090098 8 Tm Again Close Incomplete Transmission Download Stopped 1 E 44 Confirm by questions and practice B GL 385 010 PT 001 283 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 45 Opening an Existing Mission Set file Explain and demonstrate If you want to work with an existing mission set the EMRM application will allow you to select a specific file from a variety of locations including the hard drive of your in use PC a floppy disk a CD ROM or from a network drive The following procedure details how to open an existing mission set file a On the Mission Set Summary Window using the File Menu select the VIEW MISSIONS option or click the OPEN MISSION SET button The Mission Set Selector dialog box is displayed
286. r Appendix 1 a Phase 1 Formal skill at arms lessons see Chapter 2 and firing familiarization practices see Chapter 4 Lesson 3 given during DP 1 No qualification is given as this phase is a weapon system familiarization This familiarization will be reviewed and evaluated during the Eryx gunner qualification b Phase 2 1 Eryx gunner qualification DP 2A including the following a EVIGS indoor training which 1 used for teaching and coaching the principles required to obtain Eryx tracking skills necessary for Phase 3 b Training with the Mirabel Thermal Imager and thermal AFV Recognition Level 1 and 2 tests c Advanced EPGS outdoor training to assess the capacity of the gunner to react effectively to a combat scenario while using previously obtained tracking skills EPGS is not required before firing a live missile but 15 B GL 385 010 PT 001 427 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 428 2 very helpful for maintaining gunner standards in the field during unit exercises continuous training Continuous training which is included in unit training calendars and containing the following aspects a b Individual training weekly evaluation on thermal AFV Recognition Level and 2 weekly rehearsals on EVIGS Chapter 4 Lessons 4 to 6 and monthly training on EPGS Chapter 7 Annex Eryx detachment training monthly training on detachment drills and fire contr
287. r proceeds f LOAD UNIT FILE FROM PC This setting allows the transfer of instructor and gunner lists from a PC to the IM via a data cable The instructor and gunner lists can be produced using a spreadsheet application During the transfer the IM displays the following message LOADING UNIT FILE FROM and indicates transfer progress by means of a bar display advancing left to right as the transfer proceeds g SAVE UNIT FILE TO PC This setting allows the transfer of instructor and gunner lists from IM to a PC via a data cable During the transfer the IM displays the following message SAVING UNIT FILE TO and indicates transfer progress means of a bar display advancing left to right as the transfer proceeds h PURGE ALL STORED RESULTS This setting allows the IM memory to be cleared of all stored mission results data A confirmation message YOU SURE PRESS ENTER CONTINUE PRESS ESCAPE TO CANCEL is displayed before the purge is performed 17 The Target Selection Menu allows selection of different targets Press ENTER to display the list of target options Use the UP and DOWN direction keys to highlight the required option Press ENTER to select the highlighted target type or ESC to cancel the operation The target type can be selected directly via a hot key This cycles through the available target types by updating the currently selected target type displayed on the
288. r 7 Annex C tical sight andthe A C donum Chap 5 Lesson 3 Total of 40 missions Test review and Course written test PO 103 package 205 01 205 04 205 05 Handling test TOET Chap 7 with the thermal Annex A imager Prone Test Chap 7 Beginner Annex B Appendix 1 Kneeling Test Chap 7 intermediate Annex B Appendix 2 Thermal AFV 5 to 8 students LFCO 21 13 Recognition Level 1 Jevery 15 min on Annex A Test the Intrest trainer with multimedia Thermal AFV 5 to 8 students LFCO 21 13 Recognition Level 2 Jevery 15 min on Annex A Test the Intrest trainer Thermal Imager Test advanced 98 day time 6 night time 104 456 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex D to Chapter 7 DP 3A ERYX INSTRUCTOR QUALIFICATION Fire mission in prone position beginner level practice Prone Test required prior to live firing Fire mission in kneeling position intermediate level practice Kneeling Test required prior to live firing Instructing and coaching the Eryx gunner lInstructor qualification Operate the AFV Recogntion Intrest training aid Describe technical information of the Eryx weapon system 03 Coach using the indoor simulator B GL 385 010 PT 001 OBJECTIVE REMARKS REF Coaching practice on EVIGS will also be conducted at the same time Chap 4 Lesson 4 Coaching test on EVIGS will also be conducted at the same time Chap 7 Annex B Appendix 1 Coaching pra
289. r counter clockwise without applying undue force Excessive force will damage the iris selection mechanism 4 The ETSVCS cannot and shall not be operated under inclement weather 5 The iris knob is used to select between two irises apertures in front of the camera lens one for outdoor daylight scenes day mode and one for dark days and for use with the Mirabel Thermal Imager night mode Rotating the knob completely B GL 385 010 PT 001 361 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy clockwise configures the camera for day mode and counter clockwise for night mode 6 The VCR recording speed must be set to SP in order to obtain the best recording quality Forecast the next lesson f Pack kit 362 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching LESSON 6 OPERATE THE INTREST TRAINER INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim teach how to launch and conduct a training session with the Intrest trainer The Eryx instructor will be able to train Eryx gunners effectively on thermal AFV Recognition Level 1 and 2 during Eryx gunner qualification DP 2A 2 Main Teaching Points a general information and assembly of the trainer b opening the session creating the training diskette C group training and evaluation and d terminology and demonstration 3 Time Two 40 minute lessons The last 20 minutes are a demonstration see paragraph 29 4 Method Explanation demonstration and practice 5 Stores a on
290. r debrief mode B GL 385 010 PT 001 219 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 220 a DEBRIEF LAST MISSION displays the gunner s aiming error graphs or mission video of the last mission Press the VIDEO key to switch between graph display and video display Press STOP or ESC to exit REVIEW GUNNER MISSIONS displays a list of missions performed by the currently selected gunner and allows selection of missions for graph display or video display if available in debrief mode Use the UP and DOWN direction keys to highlight the required mission or to select later or earlier sections of the list Press ENTER to select the required mission Press ESC to return to MISSION MANAGEMENT DELETE LAST MISSION allows deletion of the last mission verified by an ARE YOU SURE PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE PRESS ESCAPE TO CANCEL request for confirmation Press ENTER to delete the mission or press ESC to cancel the operation DELETE LAST MISSION can be accessed directly by hot key DELETE MISSION S displays a list of missions performed by the currently selected gunner and allows deletion of a mission from the list verified by an ARE YOU SURE PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE PRESS ESC TO CANCEL request for confirmation Use the UP and DOWN direction keys to highlight the required mission or to select later or earlier sections of the list Press
291. r incorrect point of aim Use of these missions should be avoided 3 The target action is described using one or more of the following abbreviations a RL right to left b LR left to right X crossing d A advancing and O oblique B GL 385 010 PT 001 169 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Disk 2A wl s mm om w A ue rm ort Dr a sm oR Dea om 115 T 72 XLR as retos 33 Fu a ema 5 a uem us Cm 4 wee em A _ ape Pass pee pu 29 170 110 Coyote i melee ua 200 160 113 w o 220 260 cougar xu Fa poop o 22010 45 P Tgt board XLR Video defect Fa a amp e a x rm a Es o weme rm om rsa A 230 150 OR rst a ms emu xu 235 T 72 X 260 T 72 XLR Video defect efa eem m x 25 rp eR 0 s a xo por P 20 T72 XIR Video defect _ 170 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 4 Disk 2B 01 280 240 Cougar ORL Pepa xs jus Cos 200 170 A 8 A T os a 295 MB 09 31
292. r is fitted proceed select SET ICON BRIGHTNESS menu 13 and use the up arrow and down arrow v The missile display will disappear after being displayed for 60 seconds 34 Confirm by questions and practice 208 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator POST OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES Explain and demonstrate 35 FSS TSS Components When all training sessions are completed a Power down the FSS via the OFF key on the IM Wait for the display to go blank b Switch the Battery Pack OFF if operating from battery power or switch the Charger Converter OFF if operating from AC power Disconnect all cables d Carry out a visual inspection of each FSS item and the TSS after removal from target vehicle If any item is damaged or unserviceable inform the approved maintenance authority Ensure all items clean and dry before stowing properly in cases f Recharge the Battery Pack fully prior to stowage in its case must do g Store all cases in a dry place 36 Confirm by questions and practice CONCLUSION 37 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm all MTPs by questions and practice conduct safety precautions B GL 385 010 PT 001 209 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy d summarize the lesson and stress the following 1 ensure the correct power source and compatibility with EPGS components 2 EPGS fi
293. r point of aim This effect of counterweight is more important on the tripod resulting in a bigger adjustment to bring the crosshairs on target 30 The other difference 15 the effect that the missile has on the sight picture The obscuration from the launch of the missile will be much reduced but the missile with its hot flight motor exhaust will be quite large and visible during its initial flight looking like a fireworks pinwheel The gunner should expect this and not be distracted Continue tracking the target the same as during obscuration and ignore the missile 31 When firing with the thermal imager weapon handling will change slightly in accordance with the following words of command On the word of command INSTALL THERMAL IMAGER ACTION BY GUNNER ACTION BY LOADER Verify that lens cover is closed and that the power switch is O FF Install thermal imager Figures 3 3 and 3 4 Install battery Figure 3 5 Flip the power switch to STAND BY and wait for 5 to 9 minutes Flip the power switch to ON and raise the lens cover Adjust the image brightness contrast and focus Figure 3 8 Check collimation Can help if needed Flip the power switch to STAND close the lens cover and report ERYX READY B GL 385 010 PT 001 107 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy On the word of command LOAD ACTION GUNNER ACTION BY LOADER Verify that the
294. rack the target at the point of aim until impact COACHING AFTER FIRING a Coach should ask student the following 1 did he observe the launch obscuration 2 did he experience heat flash 3 was the noise level high EN 4 did he feel the wire pull 5 was distracted the missile flight and 6 anything specific that he noticed b Debrief using ETSVCS EVIGS Graph EPGS Instr Console 1 Analyze gunner s point of aim in relation to PPA asa function of mission time Did the gunner pre aim Analyze Launch phase Did the gunner re aim 3 Analyze Cruise phase Was tracking smooth and consistent 404 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 6 TASK IE REMARKS Any last minute jerks in tracking Did the target make any sudden jerks 4 Give points to improve on and explain how in relation to PPA Firing position Marksmanship principles NOTES e IKE ineffective 0 pt effective 4 pts VE very effective 5 pts Coaching before firing must be successful with a minimum mark of 40 50 e Coaching after firing must be successful with a minimum mark of 40 50 PASS FAIL Date Student Instructor B GL 385 010 PT 001 405 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX C RANGE VS TIME AND SPEED VS TIME CHARTS RANGE TIME seated Em Em EUR MA mm
295. rameters of the mission fire debrief and store a mission EPGS settings are basically the same as those for EVIGS IM MENU SYSTEM AND SETTINGS Explain and demonstrate 11 Overview The instructor controls the FSS via the hierarchical menu system in the IM The main menu screen see Figure 5 12 allows access to all lower menu screens by using the UP DOWN direction keys and the ENTER key An option is selected from the displayed menu by moving the highlight bar to the required option then pressing the ENTER key This produces an immediate action or gives access to a lower menu The currently displayed menu screen is exited by pressing the ESC key 12 Data Entry The ten keys numbered 0 to 9 are for entering menu numbers or numeric data These keys also have alphabetic characters assigned to them and are used with the SHIFT key for entering alphabetic characters when required Numeric data entry 1s achieved by selecting the data field to be edited using direction keys and pressing ENTER to highlight it The highlight will show the first number entry position in the data field normally the left hand position Key in the numbers required then press the RIGHT direction key after entering each digit to move to the next digit position When all required characters are entered the field press ENTER to complete the entry or press ESC to abandon the entry leaving the data field unmo
296. rational theatre d whenever in doubt of the weapon s serviceability prior to live fire training and f after two years of storage 36 Video Clip Play video clip Lesson 2 Part 1 Test Set ST Confirm by questions and practice MISSILE MARKINGS AND IDENTIFICATION 38 All three missile containers are marked with valuable information useful during storage transportation and use These markings may be duplicated on some or all of the containers markings conform to NATO standards B GL 385 010 PT 001 4 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 39 Logistic Container Explain The markings the logistic container are found on metal labels see Figure 2 8 why LI ZI TM W U S WAT TE N Qus V ng Vom LOGISTIC CONTAINER MARKINGS SKID MARQUAGES DE L EMBALLAGE LOGISTIQUE PALETTE DESIGNATION DESIGNATION Type of device and UN classification Live missile round Typee d engin et classification ONU Munition active Weight Clearance Volume Masse encombrement volume Classification of the missile round Live missile round Classification de la munition Munition active Identification label consisting of Etiquette d identification regroupant UN international transportation code classe de transport international de mat riel ONU Manufacturer Identification Identification du f
297. red thrust acts immediately on the trajectory of the missile giving it the necessary agility to react at short ranges Impact B GL 385 010 PT 001 1 2 3 4 Lesson Plans Eryx impact the crush fuse in the nose cone sends the firing signal to the SAD which triggers the explosion of the front warhead front warhead is 33 mm High Explosive Anti Tank HEAT shaped charge with a total mass of 83 g It detonates reactive armour and fires the pyrotechnic delay The structure of the flight motor shields the main warhead from the blast of the front warhead pyrotechnic delay consists of a detonating cord which fires the main warhead Its burn rate creates enough delay between the firing of the two warheads to ensure that any reactive armour is cleared and that the optimum stand off distance is achieved for the main warhead main warhead is a 136 mm HEAT shaped charge with a mass of 3 5 kg It contains a hollow copper alloy cone which is Shaped into a jet on detonation and is propelled through the centre channel of the motor at extremely high speed to penetrate the target 31 Video Clip Play video clip Lesson 1 Part 3 Weapon Operation This supplements paragraph 31 32 Safety Features The missile has three built in safety features as follows a Igniter Shield The igniter has filtered wires and a metallic shield to prevent it from being detonated by elect
298. referable if resources are available target vehicles training area a application of detachment training within a sub unit context integration and tactical employment of the Eryx weapon system in accordance with each phase of war e g flank protection defensive fire Observation post fire base delay ambush B GL 385 010 PT 001 463 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy PREREQUISITES Live Firing 1 PO 205 Gunner qualified Appointed as an Eryx gunner or loader Intermediate tracking table successful within a week minimum required STANDARDS TO ACHIEVE Individual training during Eryx unit concentration 1 Fire an Eryx missile TP or HEAT at a moving target a target speed not exceeding 20 km h range of engagement between 300 and 550 metres kneeling position with tripod is preferable the optical sight will be used the use of the thermal imager will be ordered for operational purposes but the gunner will first have to engage a target successfully with the optical sight and the firing priority will be enforced as follow 1 most inexperienced gunner 2 experienced gunner who missed the target previously 3 experienced gunner who hit the target previously 2 This annual exercise must end with a successful engagement for the gunner in order to proceed with collective training Live Firing 2 However an experienced gunner who has already
299. removed withdraw it along the missile indexing slots Repeat CLEAR and report ERYX READY Discard the empty tube or replace the field packing on the unspent missile THE KNEELING AND STANDING POSITIONS Explain demonstrate and practice 29 Every effort must be made to adopt a firing position that provides as much support as possible to the firing post Support minimizes the effects of weight shift and weight loss at missile launch thereby reducing the possibility of an erratic missile flight 26 Kneeling Position This position is normally used for rapid fire at a target within 300 metres However using the tripod will allow target engagement up to maximum range It is critical that the proper kneeling position be achieved and practiced correctly during EVIGS and EPGS training The following steps must be taken when adopting the kneeling unsupported position see Figure 2 12 a adopt a standard kneeling position with the left leg aligned with the centre of arc b sit firmly on the right foot extend the left foot forward of the left knee d force the right knee outward to form a right angle to the centre of arc e bring the loaded firing post to the right shoulder 54 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx rest the left elbow on the inside of the left knee to increase lateral stability rest the forward most part of the left hand handle on the palm of the left hand grasp the firing handle wit
300. ress at his own speed and g the trainer is available in all units 2 Disadvantages a the environment must be suitable 384 class room power supply etc B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching b the instructor may be tempted to forget about the six principles of instruction and limit himself to just a simple lecture and the cost 31 Confirm by questions CONCLUSION 32 Conclude the lesson a Take questions from the class b Confirm all main teaching points by questions and practice e Conduct safety precautions d Summarize the lesson and stress 1 Training responsibility e g the LFC G3 Individual Training sets the minimum acceptable standards for AFV and AC identification in LFCO 21 13 2 and AC identification Level 1 lists are applicable to all LFC personnel 3 The AFV Level 2 list is applicable from MCpl to CWO and to all Reconnaissance and Anti armour Platoon personnel mortar fire controllers MFC and Eryx weapon system teams 4 The Minimum Identification Standard for AFV and AC is for a person to be able to recognize a minimum of twenty four out of thirty 35 mm slides which corresponds to a success rate of 80 B GL 385 010 PT 001 385 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 5 6 7 5 The standards for use of optical and thermal sights for AFV Recognition Level and 2 are a optical sight up to 600 metres and b thermal sight
301. rget represents the target Se Cougar for the current simulation Target Grizzly Target represents the target Grizzly for the current simulation Target LAV 3 Target represents the target LAV 3 for the current simulation B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator ICON TITLE TEXT DESCRIPTION LABEL Target Iltis Target represents the target Iltis for the current simulation Target LAV RECCE Target represents the target Coyote for the current simulation Target represents the target AA ESI 206 for the current simulation Target LSVW Target represents the target LSVW for the current simulation Aspect Front Target Aspect represents a front target aspect for the current simulation Aspect Front Left Target Aspect represents a front left target aspect for the current simulation Aspect Front Right Target Aspect represents a front right target aspect for the current simulation Target Aspect represents a left target aspect for the current simulation Target Aspect represents a right target aspect for the current simulation Target Aspect represents a rear target aspect for the current simulation Rear Left Target Aspect represents a rear left target aspect for the current simulation Rear Right Target Aspect represents a rear right target aspect for the current simulation B GL 385 010 PT 001 261 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy
302. ring post is a class laser device so it is unconditionally safe for the eye 3 ensure that pin connectors are not damaged or dirty GM IM and cables 4 EPGS accuracy relies greatly on precise and secure positioning of the TSS on the target vehicle 5 always do a pre start check before powering up the EPGS 6 BIT must be initiated at least twice during a training session or after 80 engagements and 7 recharge the Battery Pack fully prior to stowage in its case must do forecast the next lesson f pack kit 210 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator LESSON 3 OPERATION OF THE EPGS INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach how to set up a mission enter Mission mode and be familiar with Debrief mode basically similar to EVIGS The user will be able to operate the EPGS in order to conduct a mission 2 Main Teaching Points a IM menu system and settings b status displays and hot keys C Mission mode d Debrief mode and e Sleep mode 3 Time Three 40 minute lessons 4 Method Explanation demonstration and practice which is the best way to introduce a new system as it confirms ability through hands on practice 5 Stores a EPGS system complete per section b one tripod per section and references 6 Preparation a confirm that the EPGS is complete mounted and ready to operate review Chapter 5 Lesson 2 B GL 385 010 PT 001 211 Er
303. rom the EPGS Instructor Module IM store these in an EPGS Results File and import these into a Mission Set Exit mission set Exits the EMRM Mission Set Summary Window and summary returns you to the EMRM Start Up Window EDIT MENU FUNCTIONS Undo options below Cuts the selected text from an edit box 1 e Mission Results Table Table Edit Box and copies that text content to the Windows Clipboard Copy Copies the selected text from a cell s in the Mission Results Table to the Windows Clipboard Paste Inserts the contents of the Windows Clipboard into the current cursor location 1 e Mission Results Table Table Edit Box Select Selects all text in the edit box B GL 385 010 PT 001 245 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy MISSION MENU FUNCTIONS First Mission Advances the pointer to the first mission result in the Mission Results Table Previous Mission Advances the pointer to the previous mission result in the Mission Results Table Next Mission Advances the pointer to the next mission result in the Mission Results Table Last Mission Advances the pointer to the last mission result in the Mission Results Table Delete Mission Flags select a mission result in the Mission Results Table to be deleted from the mission set Un delete Removes the flag deselects from a mission result in Mission the Mission Results Table so that it will not be delete
304. romagnetic impulses b Safety and Arming Device SAD B GL 385 010 PT 001 25 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 1 2 3 4 The SAD is a device located behind the front warhead which ensures that the warhead cannot be fired prematurely The SAD has a pyrotechnic interrupter device which physically blocks the path between the primer and the front warhead To arm the front warhead the missile must first leave the tube allowing the removal of the safety pin on the SAD Secondly the missile must reach its arming distance of 50 metres where a knot in the guidance wire eliminates a short circuit the pyrotechnic interrupter is removed and the front warhead is irreversibly armed When the crush fuse sends a signal to the primer in the SAD the front warhead is detonated Thrust Stopping Device TSD 1 2 26 TSD opens a hole in the combustion chamber of the flight motor to release the combustion gases The missile has no aerodynamic lift and consequently grounds immediately The TSD fires under the following circumstances a loss of the missile by the SLG computer missile excursion during the first two seconds of flight b absence of guidance orders to the missile a break in the guidance wire B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx detection of abnormal pitch yaw or rotation of the missile missile malfunction and d break of the metallic
305. rossing targets and d oblique targets 3 Time Fourteen 40 minute lessons 4 Method Each practice consists of firing five repetitions of the same mission in accordance with criteria detailed at Chapter 7 Annex B total of 70 engagements Students are to rotate after firing five repetitions each A debrief is to be given following every repetition series can be repeated to practice weak areas The kneeling position with tripod will be used first then gradually replaced by kneeling position without tripod for the test 5 Stores One EVIGS per four gunners 6 Preparation The instructor should start all the EVIGS and run several missions on each to ensure that the simulators are serviceable Mission Parameters are to be set to INTERMEDIATE unless otherwise stated under COMMENTS Miscellaneous On average four students per simulator complete 10 engagements each during a 40 minute class More time must be allocated if more than four students are training on one simulator 156 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions Safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 Remind students that the weights must fall into the baskets 9 Review Emphasize the correct point of aim for static moving targets 10 Introduction Explain The following missions are intended to develop kn
306. s available 3 one EPGS per four gunners and 4 aiming aids sliding 6 Preparation The instructor should keep in mind that coaching fundamentals are basically the same for both EVIGS and EPGS However EVIGS is primarily used to bring the gunner to a certain level prior to firing a live missile while EPGS is used as an advanced training system for qualified gunners Training area preparation is essential to provide maximum realism when using the EPGS see Chapter 7 Annex Targets must never be predictable and every EPGS mission should be unique In preparing his training the instructor must remember that EVIGS 15 a support for teaching and coaching principles necessary to obtain Eryx tracking skills and EPGS 1S a Support to assess the capacity of the gunner to react effectively to a combat scenario using previously obtained tracking skills Preparation includes the following a confirm that EVIGS EPGS are complete as per checklist B GL 385 010 PT 001 217 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy b confirm for EVIGS that adequate space and power outlets are available and for EPGS confirm that batteries are fully charged or that the power source will come from a vehicle like the Coyote or check EVIGS EPGS for serviceability d the training area used for EPGS training must be suitable for the vehicles used and must also allow different approaches and realism for adequate training and re
307. s only available for missions recorded with MULTIPLE TARGETS 1 3 at option menu 59 set to 1 Target Masking This key is operational in Menu mode and in Mission mode when reloading This key is disabled during mission recording and mission debrief and when performing BIT operations Help During normal operation the HELP key is used to display basic descriptions of the key pad keys By first pressing and then any other key button a description of the pressed key is presented on the IM screen In BIT mode this key provides a detailed list of faults detected during BIT Menu The MENU key allows quick access to all menus You must press the MENU hot key followed by a corresponding menu code e g MENU 532 ENTER Pressing the ENTER key confirms the action and ESC aborts the action Confirm by questions and practice MISSION MODE Explain and demonstrate In order to conduct effective training and coaching without experiencing IM problems the EPGS must be set up properly prior to proceeding with Mission mode There are two ways to set up the EPGS mission Default settings involve firing from the tripod using the sight not the thermal imager Audible effects are enabled Weight loss and wire pull simulation B GL 385 010 PT 001 223 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy are enabled Obscuration is disabled A single target M113A2 is engaged showing the gunner
308. safety precautions summarize the lesson and stress that 1 regular maintenance is crucial to ensure weapon reliability and 2 Eryx is essentially a computer and must be treated as such forecast the next lesson and pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx LESSON 3 PREPARE THE SRAAW H FOR FIRING INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach a the preparation of Eryx for firing and b the importance of a proper fire position for successfully engaging targets 2 Main Teaching Points a missile preparation b the prone position LOAD and UNLOAD d the kneeling and standing positions one man LOAD UNLOAD f dismounted carry and g stowage 3 Time Two 40 minute lessons 4 Method Demonstration and practice 5 Stores a one Eryx per two gunners b one dummy missile per weapon e one VCR and one television B GL 385 010 PT 001 47 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy d one Eryx integrated training video one individual container weapon f one missile protective envelope per weapon 6 Preparation The instructor should a check weapons for serviceability b check the VCR and television for serviceability and e ensure that the video is at the start of Lesson 3 7 Miscellaneous Consider the following a the video section on Missile Preparation will take 2 minutes and b the video section on Firing Positions will take 2 minutes COND
309. sance and Anti armour Platoon personnel and 2 mortar fire controllers MFC 13 Identification is the ability to state the common name and role of AFVs or AC The different roles and abbreviations for AFVs used in the answer sheets are as follows LFCO 21 13 Annex B contains a list of suggested abbreviations SERIAL ROLE ABBREVIATION ARTILLERY ARTY RECONNAISSANCE RECCE ANTI ARMOUR A ARMOUR 3 ENGINEER ENGR ARMOUR ARMOURED PERSONNEL APC CARRIER ARMOURED RECOVERY BH om 8 AND RADIOLOGICAL ComwANDPOST _ F cM 3 14 Minimum Identification Standard and AC is for a person to be able to recognize a minimum of twenty four out of 378 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching thirty 35 mm slides which corresponds to a success rate of 80 see Chapter 7 Annex E Whether slides are used extensively or not during training it is expected that this testing methodology and pass rate be maintained regardless of the teaching materials used To prevent AFV and AC Identification tests from concentrating on one or AC and its variants to the exclusion of others at least twenty different AFV or AC should be on each test for all levels 15 Various identification distances are used but they should always allow for identification 16 Minimum Identification Conditions stipulate that views of vehicles and aircraft be provided from different aspects static or moving
310. sate for this However the result is more visual noise in the display creating a snowy image 31 Fallen Snow Fallen snow tends to make all ground temperatures the same Depth perception by size comparison becomes difficult with snow cover due to lack of terrain features with which to compare The cool washed out background can enhance target detectability by reducing the amount of background clutter As with the rain effects described above target vehicles often stand out conspicuously especially when engines are running 32 Dust Diesel Fog and Smoke The effect of dust particles on thermal imager effectiveness is similar to that of falling precipitation Visibility through dust from artillery impacts is reduced significantly Only the hotter features of a target will penetrate heavy dust but as with rain snow and fog this will usually be better than what is visible with the naked eye IR energy transmits very well through diesel fog and conventional smoke screens Usually only the very source of the smoke is visible in the display After the initial burst of a white phosphorous round thermal imagers can see quite easily through the smoke generated 118 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager 33 Confirm by questions IMAGE CONTROLS Explain demonstrate and practice 34 Although a gunner s ability to see targets properly with the thermal imager is affected by many factors beyond his control there are wa
311. sion needed for developing novice gunners and must be used in conjunction with Chapter 7 Annex A B GL 385 010 PT 001 5 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy PRACTICE PERIODS 8 Simulator practice periods are organized progressively to develop the physical skills necessary for effective live fire training Each period concentrates on a particular skill and can be repeated as necessary until the skill is learned 9 Each practice period should comprise the following stages a remind by explanation b assess weaknesses by practice or test e improve on weaknesses by practice d progress by competitions e tracking test trials to confirm if students can get higher than the norm f conduct tracking test and g if the test 1 successful carry on with the next level 10 Faults should be immediately brought to the gunner s attention and corrected If it becomes obvious during a practice period that gunners have failed to grasp a particular skill the instructor will have to go back to that part of the lesson and teach it again The incentive of competition will always help to make practice more interesting An entire practice period can be based on competition if the instructor so wishes When organizing competitions the instructor a may form teams b must ensure that the teams are well balanced in terms of abilities in order that the more advanced members of the team can help the weaker members Ci can g
312. sion of mission results is complete The buttons found on step 4 of the Wizard are listed below Download From IM Step 4 Download from EPGS Mission Help Step 4 Generate Mission Set from Download Mission Results download i complete Click Results to view the content of the download Mission Results Click Log to read the log file for download status information Click Continue to generate the Mission Set from the downloaded EPGS Results The entry below indicates the Mission Set file name to be generated This file name may be changed if necessary Click E xit to return to Mission Set Summary Screen without generating new Mission Set 20011102_102756 08_EMRM E Results Log Results button to view the content of the download Mission Results Log button to read the log file for download status information Help button to open the context sensitive help for the active Window gt Continue Continue button to generate the Mission Set from the downloaded EPGS Results 276 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator Try Again button to return to Step 1 and start Ty Again e another transmission Note Try Again button appears only when the transmission is incomplete 37 Step 5 This step will generate the Mission Set when gt Continue button is selected using a process similar to the conversion done in the Import EPGS Results form
313. ssembly 1 Ensemble d lestage avant 2 Missile Tube Assembly 2 Ensemble tube missile 3 Speaker 3 Haut parleur 4 Rear Weight Loss Assembly 4 Ensemble d lestage arriere 5 Rear Weight 5 kg 5 Poids arri re 5 kg 6 Missile Tube Connector 6 Connecteur du tube de missile 7T Trigger Button 7T Bouton de mise de feu 8 Safety Flap 8 Cache de s curit 9 Locking Lever 9 Levier de s ret 10 Firing Post Assembly 10 Ensemble poste de tir 11 Front Weight 3 kg 11 Poids avant 3 kg 12 Wire Pull Cord 12 Cordon de tire fil 13 Junction Unit Umbilical Cable 13 Cable ombilical du boltier de liaison 14 Missile Tube Locking Lever 14 Levier de s ret du tube missile Figure 5 3 Gunner Module GM Ignore Terminology Used for Items 8 and 9 B GL 385 010 PT 001 177 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 178 4 Audio circuitry and speaker item 3 for amplifying and reproducing sound effects 5 The MTA electrical connector is only designed for one shot and is not suitable for continuous use in a training simulator Power and data are supplied to a connector on the MTA via a short umbilical cable from the junction unit of the Firing Post item 13 The MTA is installed on the Firing Post and locked in place with the missile tube locking lever item 14 6 Weight loss is simulated by dropping weights from the front and rear of the MTA at precise moments during the missile launch 7 Missile wire pull is simulated by a motor pow
314. ssile after trigger press a Failure to Launch The weapon fails to initiate and could be at any stage in the launch sequence The crew must exercise extreme caution to avoid injury from a delayed missile launch A delayed launch usually occurs within one minute but it can occur as long as 30 minutes after the trigger press or b In Flight The missile fails to function correctly The thrust stopping device TSD and the safety and arming device SAD ensure crew safety 37 Should the missile fail to launch the Eryx detachment performs the following GUNNER LOADER Report MISFIRE KEEP TRIGGER PRESSED and continue to track the target Repeat MISFIRE Verify that the missile 15 loaded properly by trying to lift the missile by the carrying handle If the missile is disengaged it means that the missile locking lever is not engaged properly Recheck the back blast danger area and report BACK BLAST AREA CLEAR B GL 385 010 PT 001 73 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy GUNNER Release the trigger button close the safety cover and engage the safety catch Disengage the safety catch move the safety cover aside and press the trigger button again If the missile does not fire again report MISFIRE LOADER Keep the weapon pointed downrange and wait one minute keeping the trigger button pressed throughout the one minute duration Repeat MISFIRE Re
315. sting charges with ammunition of any type use of any non service or obsolete ammunition use of foreign ammunition other than that received through normal supply channels or supplied in accordance with NATO Standardization Agreements manufacture and use of locally fabricated explosive training devices battle simulators saluting charges etc any alteration to the design of ammunition or explosive devices deviations from authorized drills for use of ammunition or explosive devices and rendering live ammunition inert for use as museum or instructional items The prohibitions in paragraph 5 do not apply to authorized experiments modifications etc carried out by experimental research proof or inspection establishments authorized breakdown modification repairs proof testing etc carried out as normal functions of a Canadian Forces ammunition depot or base ammunition facility personnel employed at Canadian Forces School of Aerospace and Ordnance Engineering as instructors Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy or trainees under supervision when breaking down is carried out as part of a course training standard and in accordance with an approved course training plan use for its designed role of commercial pattern ammunition obtained by local purchase as specified in CFP 137 or as authorized by NDHQ in accordance with CFAO 36 19 use for its designed role of commercial pattern ammunition w
316. t Transfer then select Capture text and enter a descriptive file name e g EX 1 4 99 CSV Then click Start NOTE If an existing file name is used new data will be appended to the end of the original data Data will not be overwritten On the IM using the direction keys on the IM select SAVE RESULTS TO PC menu 16 Press Enter The IM displays a bar graph showing the progress of the transfer operation The PC displays mission results data as it is being transferred If the IM screen displays either NO PC DETECTED CHECK CABLES PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE or PC NOT READY TO RECEIVE PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE or the display does not display mission results check cable connections and repeat the procedure If it still does not work return the unit to the approved maintenance authority At the end of a successful results transfer the IM displays RESULTS SAVED TO PC PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE Press ENTER on the IM The IM displays the SYSTEM MANAGEMENT menu then close the HyperTerminal application Confirm that the PC has indeed received the file e g Ex 1 4 99 CS V by importing the file into a spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator 12 Confirm by questions and practice UNIT FILE TRANSFERS TO PC Explain and demonstrate 13 Instructor and gunner lists can be generated in the IM and
317. t the Battery Pack is now ready for use STK 8000 09 309 4068 EPGS BATTERY PACK BLOC BATTERIES STPE MFGL17928 421 006789 CONTR W5467 456734 SER 00 XXXX DND CANADA WARNING AVERTISSEMENT OPEN BEFORE CLOSE AFTER CHARGING CHARGING OUVRIR AVANT FERMIER APRES DE CHARGER AVOIR CHARGE Carrying Handle ON OFF Switch Charging Indicator LED 24 V DC Outlet Connector Charging Inlet Connector Protection Fuse 6 25 A Ventilation Port Poign e de transport Interrupteur SOUS HORS TENSION Indicateur DEL de charge Connecteur de sortie courant continu 24 V Connecteur d entr e de charge Fusible de protection 6 25 A Vis de ventilation T4 Ui RON 4 0 Ut RON Figure 5 7 Battery Pack 20 TARGET SUB SYSTEM TSS The TSS see Figure 2 8 includes two retroreflector assemblies and straps The retroreflector is a passive device which requires no power During tracking range finding and engagement the retroreflector assembly returns the laser pulses transmitted by an attacking firing system The retroreflector B GL 385 010 PT 001 187 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy assembly consists of three retroreflector prism assemblies arranged in a circle around a mounting hub Each prism assembly contains three glass prisms A laser beam striking any prism from any direction will be reflected backward along its path of incidence 21 The mounting hub is normally installed
318. t The GM 1 linked by a cable to the IM and the Battery Pack or Charger Converter if operating from an AC power supply is linked by a power cable to the IM 12 Gunner Module GM The GM see Figure 5 3 simulates the Eryx weapon physically and functionally It has the same size shape and feel as the real Eryx weapon and can be operated from the existing Eryx tripod or from the gunner s shoulder The GM consists of two major assemblies the Missile Tube Assembly and the Firing Post a Missile Tube Assembly MTA the MTA is a spent missile case that is modified to contain the following item numbers refer to Figure 5 3 1 Electro mechanical components for simulating weight loss items 1 4 5 and 11 on launching the missile 176 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator 2 Electro mechanical components for simulating missile wire pull item 12 on launching the missile 3 Microcontroller for controlling the electro mechanical components and generating the sound effect signals simulating missile launch motor and flight motor sounds on firing STK 8000 09 306 4068 EPGS MISSILE TUBE ASSEMBLY ENSEMBLE TUBE MISSILE STPE 117979 421 006789 CONTR WEATG ADK 3202 Fid SER G XXXX DMD CANADA MON STK 8000 09 309 4068 EPSS FIRING POST POSTE DE STPE L17928 421 006789 CONTR 4 14 FA SER G0 XXXX DND CANADA MON 1 Front Weight Loss A
319. t be made to determine 1 the suitability of the range for the exercise 2 specific restrictions detailed in Range Standing Orders 3 the facilities available such as communications control facilities shelters and latrines 4 the location of suitable moving targets 5 the location of suitable firing points and B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching 6 the location of warning and control flags telephone hook ups parking areas and sentry posts Administrative Preparation The following should be considered 1 transport for a advance party b ammunition stores weapons rations etc d main party and e casualties helicopter if available 2 requests for a rations b stores ammunition and d targetry and 3 miscellaneous a personal dress and equipment and b special equipment and stores Tasking The following should be considered when organizing tasks 1 Stores troops and ammunition must arrive on time and at the correct place B GL 385 010 PT 001 337 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 2 The OIC will normally man the firing point and issue orders for the conduct of each practice When more than one firing point or position is in simultaneous use he will require an ARSO for each firing point see also B GL 381 001 TS 000 Chapter 1 section 2 paragraph 45 3 A target operator and range party may be required
320. t on the target The icon flashes for one second after impact If the missile misses the target the flight continues until the maximum range of 600 metres is reached at which point the flight motor flare falls rapidly to the ground where a grounded icon a crown flashes for one second at the point of impact A MISS will be the recorded result If the GM detects or applies a loss of control or a wire break event these situations will produce the same visual effect If the missile hits the ground before the target is reached or beside the target the ground icon flashes for 1 second at the point of impact A GRND will be recorded as the result At the end of the flight time after a further one second delay for recording the hit miss effect recording stops and the mission ends It will not be possible to start another mission until the simulated reload period ten seconds has elapsed Approximately one second after missile impact on the ground or on the target the mission result data is assembled and stored in the IM memory for debriefing and analysis 32 After the mission ends the GM waits for 15 seconds then enters Sleep mode If no key presses are detected for 90 seconds after the mission ends in debrief mode the IM exits Debrief mode and enters Sleep mode 33 Confirm by questions and practice DEBRIEF MODE Explain and demonstrate 34 Overview After the mission is completed one second after missile impact th
321. t of aim throughout the flight and NEVER try to give flight corrections to the missile by changing his point of aim 3 Video Clip Play video clip Lesson 4 Part 2 Firing 32 Confirm by questions and practice TARGET Explain demonstrate and practice 33 On the order TARGET followed by a target indication the Eryx detachment performs the following B GL 385 010 PT 001 71 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy GUNNER LOADER Repeat TARGET repeat target indication and remove the sight protective plug Acquire the target with the sight Verify that the back blast danger area is clear and announce BACK BLAST AREA CLEAR Disengage the safety catch move the safety cover aside and place the thumb on the trigger button Report ON and await the order to fire FIRE Explain demonstrate and practice 34 On the order FIRE the Eryx detachment performs the following GUNNER LOADER Fire and track target until missile impact Report UNLOAD Repeat UNLOAD and carry out the unload procedure 35 engage multiple targets the orders TARGET and FIRE will be given immediately after the first target is destroyed The gunner and loader continue through the drills for an Unload Load Target and Fire without additional prompting T2 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx MISFIRE Explain demonstrate and practice 36 A misfire is a failure of either the firing post or the mi
322. t then moves down to the point of aim after 50 metres To sum up it is imperative that you fully understand weapon characteristics before attempting to effectively site Eryx to its full potential In order to site a weapon effectively you must study the weapon and terrain and apply the characteristics and fundamentals of that weapon to the ground the next lesson GL 385 010 PT 001 93 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CHAPTER 3 LESSON PLANS MIRABEL THERMAL IMAGER LESSON 1 OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE MIRABEL THERMAL IMAGER INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach a the characteristics and operation of the Mirabel Thermal Imager in order to better understand its capabilities b maintaining the thermal imager and firing with the thermal imager 2 Main Teaching Points a characteristics and description b installation and removal of the Mirabel Thermal Imager power sources d operating the Mirabel Thermal Imager firing with the Mirabel Thermal Imager and f maintenance 3 Time Two 40 minute periods 4 Method Explanation and demonstration 5 Stores B GL 385 010 PT 001 95 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy a one Eryx per two gunners b one Mirabel Thermal Imager per two gunners one dummy missile per weapon d one non rechargeable battery per weapon e one rechargeable battery and charger per weapon f one power adapter g one Mirabel power source M
323. tart with that mission in the same order as originally selected 27 Confirm by questions and practice MISSION DEBRIEF 28 This window may be called up after each mission is fired It may also be accessed by selecting the Mission Debrief button on the Main Window To debrief the gunner on his performance the instructor uses the Mission Debrief Window 144 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator Aiming Error Graphs Displays how much the gunner s line of sight has deviated from the aim point on the target 1 red lines represent the deviation during the launch phase in mils 2 green lines represent the deviation during the cruise phase in metres and 3 blue lines represent the maximum allowable error margin for a successful track Mission Result Displays a synopsis of the mission and the score A click on a mission event timing will position the playback at that instant Scroll Bar Allows the operator to progress through the replay of the mission 1 the arrows move the replay forward or backward one frame at a time 2 the scroll bar can be moved to position the playback at a specific frame 3 a click in the area between the scroll bar and the arrows will move the replay forward or backward by ten frames 4 the frame counter displays the current frame and 5 the time counter displays the mission elapsed time with trigger press at t 0 Play Missio
324. tch to REPLAY see Figure 6 10 14 Confirm by questions and practice 358 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching FIRING POST CLAMP COHU CAMERA SCREW Set the transcoder rotation switches to L R to Off U D to On _ IRIS KNOB SELECTOR DAY NIGHT IRIS KNOB SELECTOR DAY NIGHT SCREW CLAMP TRIPOD Set the transcoder rotation switches to to On U D to Off COHU CAMERA Figure 6 12 Cohu Camera Setting B GL 385 010 PT 001 359 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy BATTERY CHECK AND CHARGING PROCEDURE Explain demonstrate and practice 15 The battery selection LED when ON indicates that there 15 enough energy in the battery to operate the ETSVC Depending on the energy level of the battery the capacity will vary from 5 minutes to approximately 3 hours of continuous operation Choosing AC for an alternate power source will permit the ETSVCS to recharge the battery while being operated The recharging time however will be approximately four times longer The following explains the battery check and charging procedure step by step see Figure 6 9 a Position the ETSVCS power supply selection rotary switch to select AC power source b Switch AC connector rotary switch to the available AC power source 110 or 220 V Plug power cord into ETSVCS connector and to the power source d Switch power supply ON OFF switch to The power supp
325. the infantry can use to strengthen their position against possible counterattack 23 Confirm by questions SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Explain 24 Danger areas exist with all anti armour missiles and commanders therefore must apply the following safety considerations when siting Eryx a At the time of launch the missile will leave the tube of the weapon and travel 0 5 metres before the flight motor will ignite and burn continuously through the flight of the missile to the target b The missile is wired controlled Therefore care must be taken to clear lines of sight to possible killing zones in order to ensure the wire will not break off on trees or obstacles This is also important to remember when firing over friendly troops C The short range hazard of 150 metres must also be considered due to the high explosive 136 mm warhead flying debris etc d During flight the missile does not fly on a direct line and will change its flight path by vector thrusts that will direct the missile in attitude pitch yaw and roll This direction will all be transferred from the SLG computer to the missile via the guidance wire e Down range hazard an arc of fire 400 373 mils either side of the firing axis must be clear of friendly B GL 385 010 PT 001 9 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy troops This is the basic dimension for the Danger Area Template see Chapter 6 Annex I f Back blast a 7 metre danger area b
326. the gunner must use the position indicated 2 A passing grade is assigned if at least 7 10 graphs pass the minimum standards GRAPHS PASS FAIL 74 TN gt 24 Q un 2A 09 T72 90 160 ORL kneeling unsupported 110 170 ORL kneeling unsupported EN 220 110 OLR kneeling supported COMMENTS 0 T 72 160 210 kneeling supported 5 5 C mw 2 49 T 72 20 3 B GL 385 010 PT 001 443 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX C EPGS TRAINING STANDARDS TRAINING CRITERIA Ideally every EVIGS training level will be reached prior to commencing EPGS training However it is not necessary to do EPGS training prior to live firing Generally every qualified gunner should take advantage of the EPGS outdoor simulator to improve his abilities whenever the situation allows it The EPGS must be seen as a developmental tool that will permit the section leader and his Eryx team to emphasize the following training criteria a selection of the site for the weapon system and trench local protection and mutual support target priority range evaluation target recognition use of the thermal imager Mirabel assessment of the capacity to react quickly and effectively towards a threat improvement of weapon system team drill improvement of tracking realistic conditio
327. the lens cover raised thermal picture will appear in the optics The higher pitched sound that is emitted when the thermal imager is on is the sound of the scanner operating 26 Image Controls The Mirabel Thermal Imager has controls for brightness contrast and focus see Figure 3 8 three have optimum pre set positions that feel like soft clicks as the knobs are turned These pre sets are tailored to engagements under most conditions within the range band of the weapon system They enable a gunner to engage quickly without the need to make fine adjustments to the thermal imager especially if he is firing from the shoulder The brightness knob increases or decreases the apparent sensitivity of the sight and will enable a gunner to show all IR sources or threshold out less intense ones The contrast knob increases or decreases the amount of detail in the picture and is useful for recognition or identification purposes The focus knob when turned has very little effect The focus for the thermal imager is optimized for the entire range band of the weapon and only when objects well beyond 600 metres are being observed will changing the focus have any discernable effect Gunners should become very familiar with the effect on the sight picture that different adjustments produce B GL 385 010 PT 001 105 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 21 Collimation Whenever the thermal imager is installed collimation should be checked
328. three system menu options opening the verification trainer session is now Selected After selecting this option a keyboard appears and you must a insert the personal diskette key disk in the disk drive and b type in your identification to open an instructor or a student session as applicable 1 e ID ENTER followed by PASSWORD ENTER 17 The screen Training Options appears and offers seven windows a Lesson Provides targets based on the curriculum list decided on by the instructor which allows the student to begin a lesson and progress at his own speed All target aspects are studied using explanations by a narrator as well as written explanations b Evaluation Tests the students once all lessons for a certain level have been completed B GL 385 010 PT 001 367 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Repetition Accumulates targets the student may review as required Targets are put away only if they have been viewed and successfully memorized d Instructor Function Contains 15 different windows This function does not appear on the student s key disk The windows are the following print the Key Recognition Factor KRF of the vehicle adjust date and time set the games scoring group evaluation group training create a new diskette save a student s diskette format a diskette results of refresher training edit modify a diskette view a diskette log change password curriculum list a
329. time Static tgt A 166 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 4 ee ee ee m Leopard JORLR Similarto msn 35 D wo e MESE fast tgt NNNM Lee o ux Le o x eme 1 Mus eim 7 54 319 Leopard Tgt obscured and static T 72 Poor Mar static Cs Tr Tom qe ares Poor idus B GL 385 010 PT 001 167 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX B EVIGS INFRARED MISSION DESCRIPTIONS 1 This Annex details the characteristics of every EVIGS Infrared IR mission stored on disk 002 for Eryx Instructors to use to develop a training plan for refresher or advancement training with the Mirabel Thermal Imager 2 The evaluation of each mission is based on the following criteria a G Good These missions are effective for gunnery training and can be used for evaluation because the point of aim is correct and the target motion is consistent b A Acceptable These missions can be used for refresher training but should not be used for evaluation because the target is erratic and the point of aim is questionable P Poor These missions are unsatisfactory for training because of poor visibility erratic target motion o
330. tion for kneeling firing without tripod and with tripod Practices must be conducted IAW Chapter 4 Lesson 5 with and without tripod as follows static target mission advancing target mission 4 crossing target missions 4 oblique target missions and review targets for a total of 14 missions x 5 repetitions for a total of 70 Test found in Appendix 2 to this Annex B GL 385 010 PT 001 437 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy RESULTS REMARKS NOTE 1 NOTES 2 3 AND 4 This level is required to proceed with live firing Advanced 7 10 Taught during DP 2A to Eryx gunners Qualification for firing with the thermal imager Mirabel at all positions with and without tripod Practices must be conducted AW Chapter 4 Lesson 6 as follows 2 advancing target missions 4 crossing target missions 4 oblique target missions and review targets for a total of 14 missions x 5 repetitions for a total of 70 Test found at Appendix 3 to this Annex NOTES 1 The number of test missions whose graphs must pass the standards is defined in Chapter 6 Lesson 2 2 Gunners are to be given only one attempt per mission during the test Should they not engage the target within the mission time the mission will be assessed as a fail with a score of O 3 Testing will be conducted with the gunners wearing fighting order 4 Training for firing while kneeling must be done with and without
331. to download Mission Results fram the EPGS Instruction Module through communications link First select a file in which to store the Mission Results To start the download click Start and follow the instructions in the next step Otherwise click Exit to avoid downloading and close this session E Log Erk CTS DCO DSA Error RxD TxD RTS O QOO Os gt Start Ext Wizard 32 The Download from IM Wizard is used to retrieve mission results from the IM in CSV file format and to execute a conversion database format automatically or on command In order to access this dialog box you must select Import then Download from EPGS option from the File menu of the Mission Summary Window or select the assistant from the toolbar of the same window When the Wizard appears click on File then on Advanced port settings and finally on Port settings Make sure that the port parameters are as per the figure below and then click OK prior to carrying on with step 1 B GL 385 010 PT 001 271 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Port Settings Download Properties M am f COM Port Settings must match those of the EPGS IM Baud Hate S600 t 19200 576500 Data Bit ie B Parit Mane Even Odd Stop Bits 1 Restore Defaults all Apply Canca e Download from IM Port Settings Tab 33 Step 1 The first step in the Wizard is to s
332. to the microphone pre amp e Optical fixtures 15 a sealed unit with the camera installed to prevent moisture accumulation fogging or frosting of the internal mechanism Two nitrogen B GL 385 010 PT 001 355 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 356 purge ports are provided for desiccation purposes These are threaded to fit the 2 6 mm nitrogen desiccation adapter The two red purging port screws are fitted with gaskets to maintain the sealing integrity of the optical fixture after desiccation by a technician A clamp with a thumbnut allows quick installation of the optical fixture on the firing post eyecup groove It also allows the gunner to quickly and easily rotate the optical fixture 180 degrees to accommodate left or right eye operation without using tools In order to maximize the gunner s field of view a modified eyecup is provided with the optical fixture The iris knob is used to select between two irises apertures in front of the camera lens one for outdoor daylight scenes day mode and one for dark days and for use with the Mirabel Thermal Imager night mode Rotating the knob completely clockwise configures the camera for day mode and rotating counter clockwise for night mode When storing the ETSVCS insert the iris knob of the optical fixture into the hole as shown at Figure 6 8 The optical cable can be coiled into the space on the left hand side of the compartment VCR Monitor has a 4 inch LCD scr
333. tor can make as any defects must be repaired by qualified technicians Exterior surfaces be cleaned with normal soap and water with a rag The IR lens on the front of the thermal imager is made of Germanium and should be treated with proper care All optical surfaces should be first lightly brushed with a lens brush to remove dust and then cleaned with lens paper and lens cleaner to ensure that scratches do not appear The storage temperature ranges from 46 C to 71 C 34 Confirm by questions B GL 385 010 PT 001 109 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy CONCLUSION 35 110 Conclude the lesson a take questions from the class b confirm all main teaching points by question and practice summarize the lesson and stress that the Mirabel Thermal Imager is an important tool for a gunner but that he must understand completely how it works and how to take care of it in order to be effective d forecast the next lesson and e pack kit B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Mirabel Thermal Imager LESSON 2 DESCRIBE THERMAL IMAGER FUNDAMENTALS INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1 Aim To teach a basic infrared theory in order to better understand how thermal imagers operate b the effects of weather obscurants and the day night heating cooling cycle on the performance of thermal imagers and how to manipulate the image controls to maximize the performance of the thermal imager and to avoid fr
334. tore the defaults or ESC to cancel the operation This option also sets the obscuration brightness back to the factory settings overriding any changes made by maintenance personnel MISSION PARAMETERS This displays menu of mission parameters i e SOUND WEIGHT LOSS WIRE PULL ON or and LAUNCH OBSCURATION or RANDOM Use the UP and DOWN direction keys to highlight the required selection then press ENTER to select it or press ESC to cancel The launch obscuration setting can be selected directly via a hot key This cycles through the available obscuration settings by updating the currently selected obscuration setting displayed on the system configuration bar on the top of the screen B GL 385 010 PT 001 217 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 218 d SYSTEM FAULTS This displays a menu of simulated weapon system failures 1 e LAUNCH MOTOR FAILURE FLIGHT MOTOR FAILURE or WIRE BREAK Use the UP and DOWN direction keys to highlight the required selection In each case press ENTER to display a sub menu with three options OFF or RANDOM Use the UP and DOWN direction keys to highlight the required option then press ENTER to select it or press ESC to cancel Setting SYSTEM FAULTS to ON only affects the next mission SELECT FIRING POSI
335. trate 16 Once a list of instructors and gunners has been produced in a spreadsheet package such as MS Excel save it as comma separated ASCII text file name CS V e g Unitl CSV The file name must be in the 8 3 DOS format xxxxxxxx yyy and path names must have no more than eleven characters and not have spaces e g myfile cvs The whole path and file name must not exceed 128 characters 17 When a unit file 15 transferred from the PC to the IM the unit file replaces all gunner and instructor details stored 1n the IM Therefore if current details stored in the IM are needed in the future they should be saved to the PC as described in paragraph 16 before transferring the new unit details from the PC to the IM Then proceed as follows a Open MS DOS command prompt b Change directory to the one containing the CSV file using the change directory CD command then type copy file name csv file name txt a followed by ENTER This adds an of character control Z to the file and renames it as file name txt e g Unitl txt Type Exit at the MS DOS prompt The CD command is used to move around the DOS directory structure The command CD will move to the root or lowest directory CD folder name will move to the directory folder name one level up CD will move one directory level down C Start the HyperTerminal application as detailed in paragraph 11 b 236 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Ery
336. truction Char de front Char de c t Char de biais TTB de front TTB de c t TTB de biais E Autre B Data Direction of Movement of Target Relative to Gunner Static n 1 Speed Distance m m Statique Vitesse 9 km h Mobile 4 V E Direction de d placement de la cible par rapport au tireur SECTION 5 RESULTS R SULTATS on NS POINT OF IMPACT POINT D IMPACT POINT OF AIM AT IMPACT POINT DE VIS E A L IMPACT p eril quce ish a E Hit But 22 23 24 22 23 24 od Charge detonated Explosion charge 112134567 11213145617 Gunner error Erreur tireur 25 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 26 251819 110 12 13 14 26 D Missile defect D faut missile 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 15 1617 18 1920 21 CF 410 completed CF 410 remplie 27 27 e No of CF 410 CF 410 LEGEND L GENDE EN Target Cible Miss Area Zone d erreur SECTION 6 RANGE SAFETY OFFICER OFFICIER DE S CURIT DU CHAMPS DE TIR 1 Service No de matricule 2 Name and Rank Nom et grade 3 Unit Code Code de l unit SIGNATURE DND 2053 6 64 B GL 385 010 PT 001 423 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX L ERYX FIRING SUMMARY MESSAGE Qnis adds ho Wee
337. umber of AF Vs is limited and they are expensive PO EO 403 01A REF A LFCO 21 13 PREPARE A LESSON ON AFV AC IDENTIFICATION TEACHING POINTS 1 AFV AC identification standards 2 Teaching methods 3 Training aids 400 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Annex to Chapter 6 CONCLUSION B GL 385 010 PT 001 401 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX B ERYX COACH TEST LIVE FIRE EVIGS EPGS coxcuncuerorenmnc THEE L sse 2 Prior EVIGS 2 Prior EVIGS performance 3 Weather EVIGS PME EE Previous b Previous video missions reviewed I c Firing pad preparation pad preparation Take up position to the left of the firer and verify the following 1 Fire position must be stable to absorb weight shift and weight loss 2 Correct PPA for target being engaged based on visible mass and target speed 3 One second delay from trigger press to launch 4 Noise and flash heat from the missile 5 Target Engagement Sequence Estimate distance to target Pre aim the weapon with the pre aim arrow Track the target to get a feel for its motion Breathe normally Tense the body and press the B GL 385 010 PT 001 403 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy SER TASK IE E VE REMARKS trigger button Hold the trigger button down throughout the missile flight Relax the body after launch Re aim with the cross hairs and T
338. unit in the defence and is the last organic weapon that can stop a tank before it enters the position Local Countermoves Eryx can deploy to reinforce another position or be used as a blocking force Cover Obstacles Gaps and Dead Ground Ideally suited to cover minefields other obstacles and gaps Eryx may be tasked to destroy enemy engineer vehicles trying to breach obstacles Eryx can also be sited to cover dead ground making best use of enfilade and defilade positions and Strengthen Isolated Positions Eryx can give isolated platoon positions some anti armour defence and can also strengthen standing patrols and observation posts Obviously to execute these tasks it is necessary to respect the fundamentals and siting considerations discussed thus far A properly dug in fire position will offer an Eryx crew greater concealment and survivability Completion of Eryx trenches should be high on the priority of work if there is an armor threat In addition proper construction of an Eryx trench and an accurate range card drawing become extremely important The Eryx Trench Eryx can be fired from virtually any type of trench in an emergency but a properly designed trench will provide good protection for the team and their missiles as well as make it easier for the gunner to engage and track targets The Eryx trench is based on the two person battle trench with the important differences being the addition of a missile storage bay on th
339. ure the end caps and remove the front and rear end caps Inspect the missile check the missile tube for cracks or dents check the nose cone for damage verify that the missile has not moved forward or backward the tube check the missile tube guide pins for damage verify that the missile electrical connectors and cover are functional and clean check the missile alignment pin for damage check the copper ribbon cable running the length of the missile tube for damage and check the rear of the missile to ensure that 32 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx GUNNER LOADER the three white electrical wires are not broken launch motor nozzles are not blocked and the beacon is not damaged Load the missile on the firing post align the missile tube guide pins with the missile indexing slots slide the missile forward and down along the slots and rotate the missile down and ensure that the missile locking lever is fully engaged Report READY Repeat READY 24 On the order UNLOAD the Eryx detachment performs the following GUNNER LOADER Verify that the safety catch 15 engaged Depress the missile locking lever with the right thumb B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy GUNNER LOADER Replace the sight protective Rotate the missile tube up and plug if
340. ure to shift so that the crosshairs will be on the point of aim once the missile is airborne 70 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx 24 The gunner tenses during the launch to absorb the weight shift and weight loss He must relax afterward to be able to track Some gunners will prefer to hold their breath throughout their track 25 Since the Eryx missile is thrust vector controlled it is exceptionally agile and reacts almost immediately to gunner tracking Even the slightest irregular movement can cause an erratic missile flight therefore tracking must be smooth 26 Should the sight deviate greatly from the point of aim the gunner must resist the urge to jerk it back on target Large corrections must be done smoothly 27 If the target disappears behind an obstacle the gunner must maintain the same tracking rate until the target reappears 28 The flight motor ignites 0 5 metres from the launch tube This will kick loose dirt and debris towards the Eryx crew The loader must turn his face to the side for protection 29 When the fire position is in deep snow it is essential that the snow be packed down The flight motor may kick loose snow into the optical port blinding the gunner 30 Flying the Missile Explain The flight path of the missile passes directly through the gunner s line of sight and can be extremely distracting At no time whatsoever can the gunner look at the missile The gunner must maintain his poin
341. us On average four students per simulator can complete ten engagements each during a 40 minute lesson More time 160 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Video Interactive Gunnery Simulator must be allocated if more than four students are training on one simulator CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions Safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 Remind students that the weights must fall into the baskets 9 Review Explain Emphasize the correct point of aim for moving targets oblique and crossing and underline the fact that when firing with the Mirabel weight shift and weight loss is less important The end result is that the observable weight shift is seen as a shift of the crosshairs down of only approximately 6 mils This means that a gunner should still aim and fire in the same way but be ready to make a small adjustment down to get the crosshairs on the proper point of aim This effect will normally only be noticeable when firing from the tripod When firing from the shoulder the change due to weight shift is less evident 10 Also emphasize that during launch the missile produces a tremendous thermal signature for more than one second Consequently the background image is darker especially at night and obviously tracking will be very difficult during this period This is why it is imperative that the gunner focus on the target and anticipate the thermal signature alo
342. use of a demonstration board and without using the six principles of instruction the lesson will be nothing more than a simple lecture without much interest The following is a brief summary of the principles of instruction a interest attitude of instructor knowledge of subject b understanding use of proper terminology B GL 385 010 PT 001 381 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy emphasis drawing attention to certain details d participation by asking questions target construction e obtaining results by immediately marking the test and f confirmation during a review at each stage by a test 28 Confirm by questions TRAINING AIDS Explain 29 Training Aids Training aids are as varied as they are numerous and an instructor is limited only by imagination Here are some examples of training aids a scaled models Miltra b various publications such as Jane s e 35 mm slides d film video e Internet and f the Intrest training system 30 Advantages and Disadvantages The arrival of recognition trainers is a wonderful addition in garrison but of little use in the field where AFV and AC identification could become an excellent simultaneous activity Although there are a number of training aids as seen in paragraph 29 only three are discussed here i e scale models slides and the Intrest trainer a Scale Models Miltra 1 Advantages 382 B GL 385 010 PT 001
343. ust permit engagement with the weapon system sight and the thermal imager B GL 385 010 PT 001 447 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 448 f fire positions will generally be with tripod but the kneeling position without tripod must be practiced and employment of at least three different types of target vehicles ideally Leopard C2 LAV III LAV Coyote and or M 113 The LSVW which cannot be engaged from the rear and the 206 due to its different aiming point should be avoided B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy APPENDIX 1 TO ANNEX C EPGS TRACKING EXERCISES GUNNER TRAINING EXERCISE NUMBER TARGET RANGE OF MISSIONS Prone with tripod Crossing oblique 450 600 m 5 advancing Kneeling with Crossing oblique 300 600 m 5 tripod and without advancing TI Kneeling with Crossing oblique 300 600 m 25 tripod and advancing Kneeling without Crossing advancing 150 300 m 5 tripod and TI INSTRUCTOR TRAINING EXERCISE NUMBER TARGET OF MISSIONS FIRING POSITION Kneeling with Crossing oblique 300 600 m tripod and without TI Kneeling with Crossing oblique 300 600 m 10 tripod and TI advancing advancing B GL 385 010 PT 001 449 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy APPENDIX 2 TO ANNEX C EPGS MISSION RESULTS poe tet tt te tT 9 TT TT INL
344. utton f hold the trigger button down throughout the missile flight g relax the body after launch h re aim with the crosshairs and 1 track the target at the point of aim until impact 3I EVIGS training must be conducted as though live missiles were being fired Casual and unsupervised training does not develop the specific skills necessary for effective Eryx gunnery 22 Confirm by questions and practice COACHING AFTER FIRING Explain demonstrate and practice 33 It is imperative that the gunner be given timely and accurate coaching about his performance after every mission 34 Hit or Miss The EVIGS has a significant limitation because the model used to calculate the missile flight is approximate As a result the calculation of hit or miss is not representative of the actual weapon It is much harder to achieve a hit on the EVIGS than it is on the Eryx The EPGS simulation is much closer to the actual live missile however this simulator has its own limitations precision of TSS positioning appropriate masking level relative to the terrain used ground slope used by target vehicle too steep that lead to a very narrow margin of error Consequently it is slightly harder to achieve a hit on the EPGS than it is on the Eryx Accordingly the instructor cannot use hit or miss as an evaluation of gunner performance All gunners must be aware of this when training 35 Mission Debrief Debrief Mode The coach can access the M
345. via TCCCS connector to the Battery Pack using the DC power cable for Battery Pack recharging The Battery Pack is fitted with an ON OFF switch allowing the DC supply output to the IM to be switched off while the DC power cable is connected protection fuse rated at 6 25 A is fitted to offer protection in the event of a short circuit fault The Battery Pack enclosure is fitted with a ventilation port to control the internal pressure during recharging The Battery Pack is recharged from an AC power source using the Charger Converter as follows choose a dry secure and ventilated area set the Charger Converter to OFF connect the Charger Converter to the AC power source using the AC power cable connect the Battery Pack to the Charger Converter using the DC power cable set the Charger Converter to ON and check that its power indicator LED is lit set the Battery Pack power switch to loosen the vent screw on the Battery Pack to avoid build up of gases due to charging check that the Battery Pack charging indicator LED is lit which indicates that charging current is now flowing allow 5 hours for charging from AC power or 10 hours from 24 V DC vehicle power source B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator when fully charged switch both units OFF and disconnect the cables and k tighten the vent screw on the Battery Pack front panel to reseal uni
346. video playback position is after trigger press then the time marker line will be positioned at the point on the tracking graphs corresponding to the video playback position In graph display mode this key changes to the frozen video display corresponding to the mission time indicated by the marker line on the graph Obscuration This key is operational in Menu mode and in Mission mode when reloading This key is disabled during mission recording and mission debrief and when performing BIT operations If the thermal imaging unit is fitted and launch obscuration has been selected obscuration time can only be set to one second Target Type This key is operational in Menu mode and in Mission mode when reloading This key is disabled during mission recording and mission debrief and when performing BIT operations Aim Point Marker This dedicated hot key allows the coach to directly cause display or removal of the aim point marker for the aimed at target Pressing this key in Debrief mode while replaying the mission video recording causes display or removal B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator of a regenerated aim point marker where appropriate 1 e where there is aiming error data associated with the video when the mission status 1s ON or FIRING The regenerated aim point marker is displayed only in normal replay and freeze frame modes The regenerated aim point marker facility i
347. view Nil B GL 385 010 PT 001 351 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 10 Introduction The ETSVCS was developed and manufactured for use as a training aid to analyze firing results and help gunners improve their target tracking performance This is done by playing back on a 4 inch VCR monitor the recorded video of the firing sequence seen by the gunner through the Eryx sight Figure 6 7 Overview of the ETSVCS Assembly in its Carrying Case SYSTEM COMPONENTS OVERVIEW Explain and demonstrate 11 The system see Figures 6 7 and 6 8 includes a power supply Cohu camera Sony video recorder monitor transcoder microphone optical fixture and carrying case as follows 352 B GL 385 010 PT 001 CAMERA CONTROL and PAL NTSC TRANSCODER INTERFACE PANEL CARRYING TUN COHU CAMERA OPTICAL FIXTURE POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE PANEL Lesson Plans Coaching COVER MICROPHONE PREAMP MICROPHONE AC CABLE SUNSHIELD VCR and Display under Sunshield BLOW PAD TRANSPORT HANDLE Figure 6 8 ETSVCS Components a Power supply see Figure 6 9 allows the ETSVCS to operate on 12 or 24 V DC and on 110 or 220 V AC Its external battery provides at least 3 hours of continuous operation The power supply interface panel is divided into three sections 1 2 External power section which includes the AC and DC input connectors for the power cords The DC portion has a 3 A input protection fuse
348. view the EVIGS User s Manual C 10 399 000 MB 001 EPGS User s Manual C 10 412 000 M B 000 and particularly the point of aim Chapter 2 Lesson 4 paragraphs 16 to 20 and C 10 412 000 MB 000 Figure 5 1 7 Miscellaneous Due to its sensitivity to the environment the EVIGS should not be operated outside of controlled classroom conditions 8 EVIGS tripods should be set up on a non slip surface Start the lesson with EVIGS EPGS powered up with the Main Window IM menu on the screen 9 The review this lesson is crucial There is no point continuing with this lesson if the students do not have excellent knowledge of Eryx gunnery techniques see paragraph 11 CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 10 Safety Precautions If any weapons are used in class safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 11 Review The Weapon Operation section from Chapter 2 Lesson 1 must be fully reviewed and all aspects of the section Hold 318 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Coaching Aim and Fire from Chapter 2 Lesson 4 must be firm in every student s mind 12 Furthermore the sequence for running an EVIGS EPGS training session and the function of each major window menu should be reviewed 13 Introduction Explain Several weapons currently in military service can be compared to Eryx Indeed most anti tank missile systems have features such as SACLOS guidance wire command l
349. weapon system Furthermore firing on the EVIGS will have identified the gunner s strengths and weaknesses d Weather Conditions Novice Eryx gunners should not fire in poor weather conditions Prior to firing simulator training must have been conducted in the environmental clothing to be worn on the range 13 Video Video footage of missiles being fired should be shown to the gunner just prior to his first shot to reduce the effects of surprise Emphasis must be placed on ignoring the missile and concentrating on the preferred point of aim PPA 14 Firing Pad Preparation The instructor must ensure that the firing pad is free from loose snow and dirt that may be kicked up by the ignition of the flight motor In conditions of freezing rain or blowing snow the firing post must be checked to ensure that the ports are unobstructed 15 Firing should not be conducted with cross winds of 36 km h or greater 16 Coaching Explain and demonstrate Prior to firing the instructor should take up a position to the left of the gunner and remind him of the following a one second delay between trigger press and launch motor ignition b noise flash and heat from the missile launch re aim with the central crosshairs d the missile will be very prominent in his sight and he must ignore it continue to track the missile well past target impact and f do not fire until he is ready 346 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans
350. which is the best way to introduce a new system as it confirms ability through hands on practice 3 Stores a EPGS system complete per section b one tripod per section and references 6 Preparation 196 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator a confirm that the two EPGS boxes are complete as per checklist and displayed in the classroom with covers on ready to be used by the instructor b confirm that adequate space and power outlets are available for EPGS training and that EPGS batteries are recharged e check the EPGS for serviceability and d review the EPGS Operator s Manual 10 412 000 000 pages 4 2 to 5 6 and Annex B Miscellaneous a Ensure the power and EPGS cables do not present a tripping hazard to personnel moving in the training area and are routed appropriately to avoid them becoming damaged by personnel or vehicle movement b A Charger Converter that is set for 110 V AC connection will be damaged if it is connected to a 220 V AC power source If the Charger Converter is to be used ensure it 1 set appropriately for the available AC power source The neutral density filter NDF and the Mirabel Thermal Imager must not be fitted at the same time d High voltage is present in the firing post when the FSS is powered up Do not attempt to disassemble the firing post Invisible laser light is used the operation of the EPGS The EPGS
351. x Percision Gunnery Simulator d Power up the IM and select LOAD UNIT FILE FROM PC menu 17 Press ENTER Follow the same procedure as used in UNIT FILE TRANSFER TO PC however this time select TRANSFER the HyperTerminal menu bar then select SEND TEXT FILE Enter the required file name e g Unitl text Then click START The instructor and gunner lists should commence transfer immediately f If the IM screen displays either PC DETECTED CHECK CABLES PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE PC NOT READY TO TRANSMIT PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE this means that the data connection is not working Check cable connections reset the PC configuration settings to their factory default settings via the RESET DEFAULTS option at menu 52 and repeat the procedure If it still does not work return the unit to the approved maintenance authority g If the message FILE TRANSFER ERROR AT LINE n is displayed there has been a problem with the unit file format Check that the format is the same as the comma separated variables for mission data fields and that the control Z end of file marker has been added to the end of the file as described in paragraph 17 b 18 Confirm by questions and practice MISSION RESULTS DATA TRANSFERS USING THE EMRM EPGS MISSION RESULTS MANAGER Explain 19 The is a software application designed as a training tool for the Eryx Precision Gunnery Simulat
352. x high Launch max low Cruise max left 1 35526 26 mrad 2 28 mrad 8 14 mrad 8 18 mrad 9 0 98 m 8 B GL 385 010 PT 001 417 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy Cruise max right 1 09 m 7 Cruise max high 0 66 m 8 Cruise max low 1 00 m 0 Note 0 5 V 6x2x8x8x9 0 5x 8 7 8 0 0 5X V 6912 0 5 X V0 0 5 X 5 80 0 5 X 0 2 90 0 2 9 gt fail 418 B GL 383 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX I EVIGS GRAPHS 1 For target A a gunner motion of 23 mils corresponds to 7 m of movement at 300 m 2 For target that same gunner motion of 23 mils corresponds to 14 m of movement at 600 m 3 Thus on the EVIGS display graph the green line varies accordingly to the range of the target It will never be continuous with the red line because each measures different quantities B GL 385 010 PT 001 419 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX J DANGER AREA TEMPLATE DANGER ZONE AND BACKBLAST CAUTION ZONE FOR ERYX TP AND HEAT MISSILE DANGER ZONE TP MISSILE DANGER ZONE HEAT MISSILE SAFETY HEIGHT 1600 m an mmm 0 500 1000 2000 SCALE 1 50 000 CHELLE 1 50 000 BACKBLAST AREA CAUTION ZONE B GL 385 010 PT 001 42 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX K ERYX FIRING REPORT ivi National D fense ERYX FIRING REPORT FICHE DE TIR ER
353. y skills There are three testable levels of EVIGS gunnery proficiency this excludes familiarization practices Each test corresponds to the skill level required of a gunner according to his employment EVIGS Gunnery Standards are at Annex B Gunnery skills developed by EVIGS training will be used on the EPGS EPGS Training Standards are at Annex C including at Appendix 1 exercises 5 Phase 3 Qualification on the EVIGS will ensure that a gunner is ready for live firing see Annex D and advanced field firing scenarios Any firing at stationary or basic targets is very wasteful and should be avoided Live fire engagements with the Eryx are the culmination of the training scheme They hone gunnery skills and confirm that gunners have confidence in their weapon and are fully prepared for war The Live Firing Standards to be achieved are at Annex D Appendix 1 B GL 385 010 PT 001 429 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy 6 Instructor Standards Training given to Eryx instructors will enable them to do the following a conduct efficient training on simulators b teach and train gunners on thermal AFV Recognition Level and 2 coach effectively during live firing d prepare and supervise conduct on an Eryx firing range and act as RSO ARSO during live firing 430 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Eryx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy ANNEX A ERYX TESTS OF ELEMENTARY TRAINING TOETS CHECKLIST 1 Ea
354. ys that he can manipulate the thermal imager controls to detect recognize or identify targets more effectively The contrast and brightness controls are balanced at their pre set positions to give a gunner an optimum setting for engaging a target at any range without delay should the situation be urgent The following are suggested settings for different situations These are only general suggestions and gunners should experiment with their thermal imager under various conditions to learn what works best a Brightness Low Contrast Medium to High This is a good setting for scanning an area in search of targets Background clutter will be suppressed and only the hotter objects will show up Cooler objects will not be visible When a possible target has been found the brightness can be increased and contrast lowered gradually to reveal more target detail This setting 15 also good for conditions of light fog or rain and light dust conditions b Brightness Low to Medium Contrast Medium This is the best overall setting for seeing target detail With medium contrast brightness can be varied up and down to bring out features and determine which vehicle parts are hottest When brightness is lowered the cooler parts such as tracks darken before the hotter parts Often very small changes in brightness can reveal much about vehicle detail For example road wheels can sometimes be seen at long range if this technique is used This process is
355. yx Short Range Anti armour Weapon Heavy b confirm that adequate space and power outlets are available for indoor EPGS training or that EPGS batteries will be fully charged if outdoor training is conducted check EPGS for serviceability d if outdoor training is conducted choose appropriate terrain and target vehicles and review EPGS Operator s Manual 10 412 000 000 pages 5 7 to 5 37 and Annexes and 7 Miscellaneous a Refer to all special considerations in Chapter 5 Lesson 2 b This lesson should be done outside to achieve better training including effectively employing TSS on target vehicles Results will be much more realistic and practices more effective CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 8 Safety Precautions If any weapons are used in class or outside safety precautions must be conducted as detailed in Chapter 2 Lesson 1 9 Review As the components of the EPGS are laid the floor review procedures that make EPGS ready for use detailed in Chapter 5 Lesson 2 10 Introduction After language selection configuration check BIT and TEST LASER check the FSS becomes operational From this point FSS operation is controlled and monitored by the instructor using the IM display and keypad This keypad gives access to FSS menu system hot keys and modes permitting you to configure the 212 B GL 385 010 PT 001 Lesson Plans Eryx Percision Gunnery Simulator pa

b-gl-385-010 - Eryx

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents